General Injectables & Vaccines, Inc

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

General Injectables & Vaccines, Inc Drugs

Graphites 200c

Graphites 200c

The dose is dependent on the requirements of the individual patient. Intravenous calcium gluconate injection must be administered slowly.

Usual Dosage

Adults - 500 mg to 2 g (5 to 20 mL)

Pediatric patients - 200 to 500 mg (2 to 5 mL)

Infants - Not more than 200 mg (not more than 2 mL)

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discorloration prior to adminsitration, whenever solution and container permit.
Cyanocobalamin

Cyanocobalamin

Avoid using the intravenous route. Use of this product intravenously will result in almost all of the vitamin being lost in the urine. Pernicious Anemia: Parenteral vitamin B12 is the recommended treatment and will be required for the remainder of the patient's life. The oral form is not dependable. A dose of 100 mcg daily for 6 or 7 days should be administered by intramuscular or deep subcutaneous injection. If there is clinical improvement and if a reticulocyte response is observed, the same amount may be given on alternate days for seven doses, then every 3 to 4 days for another 2 to 3 weeks. By this time hematologic values should have become normal. This regimen should be followed by 100 mcg monthly for life. Folic acid should be administered concomitantly if needed.Patients with Normal Intestinal Absorption: Where the oral route is not deemed adequate, initial treatment similar to that for patients with pernicious anemia may be indicated depending on the severity of the deficiency. Chronic treatment should be with an oral B12 preparation. If other vitamin deficiencies are present, they should be treated.Schilling Test: The flushing dose is 1000 mcg.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual adult dose of atropine is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested doses for children are as follows:
7-16 pounds 0.1 mg 17-24 pounds 0.15 mg 24-40 pounds 0.2 mg 40-65 pounds 0.3 mg 65-90 pounds 0.4 mg Over 90 pounds 0.4 to 0.6 mg As indicated previously, however, these doses may be considerably exceeded in certain cases. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.
Tigan

Tigan

(See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)Dosage should be adjusted according to the indication for therapy, severity of symptoms and the response of the patient.

Geriatric Patients Dose adjustment such as reducing the total dose administered at each dosing or increasing the dosing interval should be consideredin elderly patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance £ 70 mL/min/1.73m2). Final dose adjustment should be based uponintegration of clinical efficacy and safety considerations. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Patients with Renal Impairment In subjects with renal impairment (creatinine clearance £ 70 mL/min/1.73m2), dose adjustment such as reducing the total doseadministered at each dosing or increasing the dosing interval should be considered. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY andDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).INJECTABLE, 100 mg/mL (Not for use in pediatric patients) Usual Adult Dosage 2 mL (200 mg) t.i.d. or q.i.d. intramuscularly.NOTE: The injectable form is intended for intramuscular administration only; it is not recommended for intravenous use.Intramuscular administration may cause pain, stinging, burning, redness and swelling at the site of injection. Such effects may beminimized by deep injection into the upper outer quadrant of the gluteal region, and by avoiding the escape of solution along the route.
Trimethobenzamide Hydro...

Trimethobenzamide Hydrochloride

(See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Dosage should be adjusted according to the indication for therapy, severity of symptoms, and the response of the patient.

Geriatric Patients Dose adjustment such as reducing the total dose administered at each dosing or increasing the dosing interval should be considered in elderly patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance £70 mL/min/1.73m2). Final dose adjustment should be based upon integration of clinical efficacy and safety considerations. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).Patients with Renal Impairment In subjects with renal impairment (creatinine clearance £70 mL/min/1.73m2), dose adjustment such as reducing the total dose administered at each dosing or increasing the dosing interval should be considered. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).Injectable — 100 mg/mL (Not for use in pediatric patients.)Usual Adult Dosage. 2 mL (200 mg) t.i.d. or q.i.d. intramuscularly.Note: The injectable form is intended for intramuscular administration only; it is not recommended for intravenous use. Intramuscular administration may cause pain, stinging, burning, redness, and swelling at the site of injection. Such effects may be minimized by deep injection into the upper outer quadrant of the gluteal region, and by avoiding the escape of solution along the route.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, after dilution in 50 or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or by intravenous infusion. The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value.Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy.

Converting to Oral Anticoagulant: When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. If continuous I.V. heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time. In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect with Full-Dose Heparin Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
Method of Administration Frequencey Recommended dose* IntermittentIntravenous Injection Initial DoseEvery 4 to 6 hours 10,000 Units, in 50-100mLof 5% Dextrose Injection or0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection5000-10,000 Units, in50-100mL of %5 DextroseInjection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection ContinuousIntravenous Injection Initial DoseContinuous 5000 Units by I.V. Injection20,000-40,000Units/24 Hours in5% Dextrose Injection or0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection *Based on 150 lb. (68 kg) patient. Pediatric Use: Follow recommendations of appropriate pediatric reference texts. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline: Initial Dose:Maintenance Dose: 50 Units/kg (I.V. drip)100 Units/kg (I.V. drip)every four hours or20,000 Units/m(2)/24 hourscontinuously Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels: Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units per kilogram is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes. Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism: A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that lowdose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having brain or spinal cord surgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery, or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite lowdose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. Prior to initiating heparinization the physician should rule out bleeding disorders by appropriate history and laboratory tests, and appropriate coagulation tests should be repeated just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated at these times. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency. See PRECAUTIONS. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE To Open Diluent Container: Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually. To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:(Use Aseptic Technique) 1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1.), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Once the breakaway cap has been removed, do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately½ turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately. To Prepare Admixture: 1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time. Preparation for Administration (Use Aseptic Technique) 1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp. WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.
Lidocaine

Lidocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of lidocaine injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia, and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of lidocaine hydrochloride injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.Epidural Anesthesia For epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage form of lidocaine hydrochloride injection is recommended:2%, 10 mL single-dose vial Although this solution is intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, it may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided it is employed as a single-dose unit. This solution contains no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2-3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of lidocaine injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES: Note: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine. Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for nonobstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and nonobstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS.)Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs, the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 mg to 100 mg (1.5 mg/lb to 2 mg/lb). In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Insome cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored, cloudy and/or contain particulate matter should not be used.
Table 1. Recommended Dosages Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection(without epinephrine) PROCEDURE Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.05 or 1 1-60 5-300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10-60 50-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. Brachial 1.5 15-20 225-300 Dental 2 1-5 20-100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3-5 30-50 Pundendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5-10 50-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural * Thoracic 1 20-30 200-300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25-30 250-300 Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 2 10-15 200-300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20-30 200-300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 * Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURES Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema.
Epinephrine

Epinephrine

Subcutaneously or intramuscularly – 0.2 to 1 mL (mg). Start with a small dose and increase if required.Note: The subcutaneous is the preferred route of administration. If given intramuscularly, injection into the buttocks should be avoided.

Hypersensitivity Reactions For bronchial asthma and certain allergic manifestations, e.g., angioedema, urticaria, serum sickness, anaphylactic shock, use epinephrine subcutaneously. The adult intravenous dose forhypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks.Cardiac Resuscitation A dose of 0.5 mL (0.5 mg) diluted to 10 mL with sodium chloride injection can be administered intravenously or intracardially to restore myocardial contractility. Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route. External cardiac massage should follow intracardial administration to permit the drug to enter coronary circulation. The drug should be used secondarily to unsuccessful attempts with physical or electromechanical methods.Ophthalmologic Use Ophthalmologic use (for producing conjunctival decongestion, to control hemorrhage, produce mydriasis and reduce intraocular pressure) – use a concentration of 1:10,000 (0.1 mg/mL) to1:1000 (1 mg/mL).Regional Anesthesia A final concentration of 1:200,000 of epinephrine injection is recommended for infiltration injection, nerve block, caudal or other epidural blocks. From 0.3 to 0.4 mg of epinephrine (0.3 to0.4 mL of 1:1000 solution) may be mixed with spinal anesthetic agents. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Calcium Chloride

Calcium Chloride

10% Calcium Chloride Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection (not to exceed 1 mL/min) and/or in cardiac resuscitation, by injection into the ventricular cavity. It mustnot be injected into the myocardium. The usual precautions for intravenous therapy should be observed. If time permits, the solution should be warmed to body temperature. The injection should be halted if the patient complains of any discomfort; it may be resumed when symptoms disappear. Following injection, the patient should remain recumbent for a short time.The usual adult dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 500 mg to 1 g (5 to 10 mL) at intervals of 1 to 3 days, depending on the response of the patient and/or results of serum calciumdeterminations. Repeated injections may be required because of rapid excretion of calcium. In magnesium intoxication, an initial adult dose of 500 mg (5 mL) should be administered promptly and the patient observed for signs of recovery before further doses are given. In hyperkalemic ECG disturbances of cardiac function, the dosage of calcium chloride injection should be titrated by constant monitoring of ECG changes during administration. In cardiac resuscitation, the usual adult dosage ranges from 500 mg to 1 g (5 to 10 mL) intravenously, or from 200 to 800 mg (2 to 8 mL) when injected into the ventricular cavity. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS. To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Methylene Blue

Methylene Blue

0.1 to 0.2 mL per kilogram of body weight (0.045 to 0.09 mL per pound of body weight). Inject Methylene Blue intravenously very slowly over a period of several minutes.
Reglan

Reglan

For the Relief of Symptoms Associated with Diabetic Gastroparesis (Diabetic Gastric Stasis) If only the earliest manifestations of diabetic gastric stasis are present, oral administration of metoclopramide may be initiated. However, if severe symptoms are present, therapy should begin with REGLAN Injection (IM or IV). Doses of 10 mg may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period. Administration of REGLAN Injection (metoclopramide injection, USP) up to 10 days may be required before symptoms subside, at which time oral administration of metoclopramide may be instituted. The physician should make a thorough assessment of the risks and benefits prior to prescribing further metoclopramide treatment.

For the Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy Intravenous infusions should be made slowly over a period of not less than 15 minutes, 30 minutes before beginning cancer chemotherapy and repeated every 2 hours for two doses, then every 3 hours for three doses. The initial two doses should be 2 mg/kg if highly emetogenic drugs such as cisplatin or dacarbazine are used alone or in combination. For less emetogenic regimens, 1 mg/kg per dose may be adequate. For doses in excess of 10 mg, REGLAN Injection should be diluted in 50 mL of a parenteral solution. The preferred parenteral solution is Sodium Chloride Injection (normal saline), which when combined with REGLAN Injection, can be stored frozen for up to 4 weeks. REGLAN Injection is degraded when admixed and frozen with Dextrose-5% in Water. REGLAN Injection diluted in Sodium Chloride Injection, Dextrose-5% in Water, Dextrose-5% in 0.45% Sodium Chloride, Ringer’s Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection may be stored up to 48 hours (without freezing) after preparation if protected from light. All dilutions may be stored unprotected from light under normal light conditions up to 24 hours after preparation. If acute dystonic reactions should occur, inject 50 mg Benadryl® (diphenhydramine hydrochloride) intramuscularly, and the symptoms usually will subside.

For the Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting REGLAN Injection should be given intramuscularly near the end of surgery. The usual adult dose is 10 mg; however, doses of 20 mg may be used.

To Facilitate Small Bowel Intubation If the tube has not passed the pylorus with conventional maneuvers in 10 minutes, a single dose (undiluted) may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period. The recommended single dose is: Pediatric patients above 14 years of age and adults — 10 mg metoclopramide base. Pediatric patients (6-14 years of age) — 2.5 to 5 mg metoclopramide base; (under 6 years of age) — 0.1 mg/kg metoclopramide base.

To Aid in Radiological Examinations In patients where delayed gastric emptying interferes with radiological examination of the stomach and/or small intestine, a single dose may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period. For dosage, see intubation above.

Use in Patients With Renal or Hepatic Impairment Since metoclopramide is excreted principally through the kidneys, in those patients whose creatinine clearance is below 40 mL/ min, therapy should be initiated at approximately one-half the recommended dosage. Depending upon clinical efficacy and safety considerations, the dosage may be increased or decreased as appropriate. See OVERDOSAGE section for information regarding dialysis. Metoclopramide undergoes minimal hepatic metabolism, except for simple conjugation. Its safe use has been described in patients with advanced liver disease whose renal function was normal.NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

ADMIXTURES COMPATIBILITIES REGLAN Injection (metoclopramide injection, USP) is compatible for mixing and injection with the following dosage forms to theextent indicated below:Physically and Chemically Compatible Up to 48 Hours Cimetidine Hydrochloride (SK and F), Mannitol, USP (Abbott), Potassium Acetate, USP (Invenex), Potassium Phosphate, USP (Invenex).

Physically Compatible Up to 48 Hours Ascorbic Acid, USP (Abbott), Benztropine Mesylate, USP (MS and D), Cytarabine, USP (Upjohn), Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate, USP (ESI, MS and D), Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride, USP (Parke-Davis), Doxorubicin Hydrochloride, USP (Adria), Heparin Sodium, USP (ESI), Hydrocortisone Sodium Phosphate (MS and D), Lidocaine Hydrochloride, USP (ESI), Multi-Vitamin Infusion (must be refrigerated-USV), Vitamin B Complex with Ascorbic Acid (Roche).

Physically Compatible Up to 24 Hours (Do not use if precipitation occurs) Clindamycin Phosphate, USP (Upjohn), Cyclophosphamide, USP (Mead-Johnson), Insulin, USP (Lilly). Conditionally Compatible (Use within one hour after mixing or may be infused directly into the same running IV line) Ampicillin Sodium, USP (Bristol), Cisplatin (Bristol), Erythromycin Lactobionate, USP (Abbott), Methotrexate Sodium, USP (Lederle), Penicillin G Potassium, USP (Squibb), Tetracycline Hydrochloride, USP (Lederle).

Incompatible (Do Not Mix) Cephalothin Sodium, USP (Lilly), Chloramphenicol Sodium, USP (Parke-Davis), Sodium Bicarbonate, USP (Abbott).
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration and it is recommended in emergency situations. Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.3

Intravenous Infusion Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose injection. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient’s response. Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

GeneralParenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

USAGE IN ADULTS

Opioid Overdose - Known or Suspected. An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at two to three minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid-induced or partial opioid-induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid-Induced Depression. For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone hydrochloride should be titrated according to the patient’s response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal, i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating or circulatory stress. Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one to two hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock: The optimal dosage of naloxone hydrochloride or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

USAGE IN CHILDREN Opioid Overdose - Known or Suspected. The usual initial dose in children is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration isnot available, naloxone may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, naloxone hydrochloride injection can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Opioid Depression. Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Opioid Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

USAGE IN NEONATES Opioid-Induced Depression. The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M. or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual adult dose of atropine is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested doses for children are as follows:
7-16 pounds 0.1 mg 17-24 pounds 0.15 mg 24-40 pounds 0.2 mg 40-65 pounds 0.3 mg 65-90 pounds 0.4 mg Over 90 pounds 0.4 to 0.6 m
As indicated previously, however, these doses may be considerably exceeded in certain cases. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration,whenever solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual adult dose of atropine is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested doses for children are as follows:

7 - 16 pounds - 0.1 mg17 - 24 pounds - 0.15 mg24 - 40 pounds - 0.2 mg40 - 65 pounds - 0.3 mg65 - 90 pounds - 0.4 mgOver 90 pounds - 0.4 to 0.6 mg

As indicated previously, however, these doses may be considerably exceeded in certain cases. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.
Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection, USP may be given intramuscularly or by intravenous infusion. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.Patients with Normal Renal FunctionAdults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1). For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1). It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. For example, the peak concentration (at 30 to 60 minutes after intramuscular injection) is expected to be in the range of 4 to 6 mcg/mL. When monitoring peak concentrations after intramuscular or intravenous administration, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.
Table 1 Dosage Schedule Guide For Adults With Normal Renal Function (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals) 40 mg/mL Patient's Weight* Usual Dose for Serious Infections 1 mg/kg q8h Dose for Life- Threatenting Infections (Reduce as Soons as Clinically Indicated) kg (lb) (3 mg/kg/day) 1.7 mg/kg q8h** (5 mg/kg/day) mg/dose mL/dose mg/dose mL/dose q8h q8h 40 (88) 40 1 66 1.6 45 (99) 45 1.1 75 1.9 50 (110) 50 1.25 83 2.1 55 (121) 55 1.4 91 2.25 60 (132) 60 1.5 100 2.5 65 (143) 65 1.6 108 2.7 70 (154) 70 1.75 116 2.9 75 (165) 75 1.9 125 3.1 80 (176) 80 2 133 3.3 85 (187) 85 2.1 141 3.5 90 (198) 90 2.25 150 3.75 95 (209) 95 2.4 158 4 100 (220) 100 2.5 166 4.2 * The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. ** For q6h schedules, dosage should be recalculated. Children: 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (2 to 2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours). Infants and Neonates: 7.5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours). Premature or Full-Term Neonates One Week of Age or Less: 5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 12 hours). NOTE: For further information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see pediatric gentamicin sulfate injection product information. The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated. For Intravenous Administration The intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For intermittent intravenous administration in adults, a single-dose of gentamicin sulfate may be diluted in 50 to 200 mL of sterile isotonic saline solution or in a sterile solution of 5% dextrose in water, in infants and children, the volume of diluent should be less. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours. The recommended dosage for intravenous and intramuscular administration is identical. Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule. Patients with Impaired Renal Function Dosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2 x 8). In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process. It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment. Table 2 Dosage Adjustment Guide for Patients with Renal Impariment (Dosage at Eight-Hour Intervals After the Usual Initial Dose) SerumCreatinine(mg %) ApproximateCreatinineClearance Rate(mL/min/1.73M2) Percent ofUsual Doses Shown inTable 1 less than or equal to 1.0 greater than 100 100 1.1-1.3 70-100 80 1.4-1.6 55-70 80 1.7-1.9 45-55 55 2.0-22 40-45 50 2.3-2.5 35-40 40 2.6-3.0 30-35 35 3.1-3.5 25-30 30 3.6-4.0 20-25 25 4.1-5.1 15-20 20 5.2-6.6 10-15 15 6.7-8.0 less than 10 10 In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection. In children, a dose of 2 mg/kg may be administered. The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible. A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Adults: Parenteral therapy with Furosemide Injection should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

EdemaThe usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 40 mg given as a single dose, injected intramuscularly or intravenously. The intravenous dose should be given slowly (1 to 2 minutes). Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, another dose may be administered in the same manner 2 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg and given not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. This individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily.

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response. Close medical supervision is necessary.

If the physician elects to use high dose parenteral therapy, add the furosemide to either Sodium Chloride Injection USP, Lactated Ringer's Injection USP, or Dextrose (5%) Injection USP after pH has been adjusted to above 5.5, and administer as a controlled intravenous infusion at a rate not greater than 4 mg/min. Furosemide Injection is a buffered alkaline solution with a pH of about 9 and drug may precipitate at pH values below 7. Care must be taken to ensure that the pH of the prepared infusion solution is in the weakly alkaline to neutral range. Acid solutions, including other parenteral medications (e.g., labetalol, ciprofloxacin, amrinone, milrinone) must not be administered concurrently in the same infusion because they may cause precipitation of the furosemide. In addition, furosemide injection should not be added to a running intravenous line containing any of these acidic products.

Acute Pulmonary EdemaThe usual initial dose of furosemide is 40 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes). If a satisfactory response does not occur within 1 hour, the dose may be increased to 80 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes).

If necessary, additional therapy (e.g., digitalis, oxygen) may be administered concomitantly.

Pediatric Patients: Parenteral therapy should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical. The usual initial dose of Furosemide Injection (intravenously or intramuscularly) in pediatric patients is 1 mg/kg body weight and should be given slowly under close medical supervision. If the diuretic response to the initial dose is not satisfactory, dosage may be increased by 1 mg/kg not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose, until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended. Literature reports suggest that the maximum dose for premature infants should not exceed 1 mg/kg/day (see WARNINGS, Pediatric Use). Furosemide Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration.
Metoclopramide

Metoclopramide

For the Relief of Symptoms Associated with Diabetic Gastroparesis (Diabetic Gastric Stasis) If only the earliest manifestations of diabetic gastric stasis are present, oral administration of metoclopramide may be initiated. However, if severe symptoms are present, therapy should begin with metoclopramide injection (IM or IV). Doses of 10 mg may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period. Administration of metoclopramide injection up to 10 days may be required before symptoms subside, at which time oral administration of metoclopramide may be instituted. The physician should make a thorough assessment of the risks and benefits prior to prescribing further metoclopramide treatment.

For the Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy Intravenous infusions should be made slowly over a period of not less than 15 minutes, 30 minutes before beginning cancer chemotherapy and repeated every 2 hours for two doses, then every 3 hours for three doses. The initial two doses should be 2 mg/kg if highly emetogenic drugs such as cisplatin or dacarbazine are used alone or in combination. For less emetogenic regimens, 1 mg/kg per dose may be adequate. For doses in excess of 10 mg, metoclopramide injection should be diluted in 50 mL of a parenteral solution. The preferred parenteral solution is Sodium Chloride Injection (normal saline), which when combined with metoclopramide injection, can be stored frozen for up to 4 weeks. Metoclopramide injection is degraded when admixed and frozen with Dextrose-5% in Water. Metoclopramide injection diluted in Sodium Chloride Injection, Dextrose-5% in Water, Dextrose-5% in 0.45% Sodium Chloride, Ringer’s Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection may be stored up to 48 hours (without freezing) after preparation if protected from light. All dilutions may be stored unprotected from light under normal light conditions up to 24 hours after preparation. If acute dystonic reactions should occur, inject 50 mg Benadryl® (diphenhydramine hydrochloride) intramuscularly, and the symptoms usually will subside.

For the Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting Metoclopramide injection should be given intramuscularly near the end of surgery. The usual adult dose is 10 mg; however, doses of 20 mg may be used.

To Facilitate Small Bowel Intubation If the tube has not passed the pylorus with conventional maneuvers in 10 minutes, a single dose (undiluted) may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period.The recommended single dose is: Pediatric patients above 14 years of age and adults — 10 mg metoclopramide base. Pediatric patients (6-14 years of age) — 2.5 to 5 mg metoclopramide base; (under 6 years of age) — 0.1 mg/kg metoclopramide base.

To Aid in Radiological Examinations In patients where delayed gastric emptying interferes with radiological examination of the stomach and/or small intestine, a single dose may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1- to 2-minute period. For dosage, see intubation above.

Use in Patients With Renal or Hepatic Impairment Since metoclopramide is excreted principally through the kidneys, in those patients whose creatinine clearance is below 40 mL/min, therapy should be initiated at approximately one-half the recommended dosage. Depending upon clinical efficacy and safety considerations, the dosage may be increased or decreased as appropriate. See OVERDOSAGE section for information regarding dialysis. Metoclopramide undergoes minimal hepatic metabolism, except for simple conjugation. Its safe use has been described in patients with advanced liver disease whose renal function was normal.NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

ADMIXTURES COMPATIBILITIES

Metoclopramide injection is compatible for mixing and injection with the following dosage forms to the extent indicated below:

Physically and Chemically Compatible Up to 48 Hours Cimetidine Hydrochloride (SK and F), Mannitol, USP (Abbott), Potassium Acetate, USP (Invenex), Potassium Phosphate, USP (Invenex).

Physically Compatible Up to 48 Hours Ascorbic Acid, USP (Abbott), Benztropine Mesylate, USP (MS and D), Cytarabine, USP (Upjohn), Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate, USP (ESI, MS and D), Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride, USP (Parke-Davis), Doxorubicin Hydrochloride, USP (Adria), Heparin Sodium, USP (ESI), Hydrocortisone Sodium Phosphate (MS and D), Lidocaine Hydrochloride, USP (ESI), Multi-Vitamin Infusion (must be refrigerated-USV), Vitamin B Complex with Ascorbic Acid (Roche).

Physically Compatible Up to 24 Hours (Do not use if precipitation occurs) Clindamycin Phosphate, USP (Upjohn), Cyclophosphamide, USP (Mead-Johnson), Insulin, USP (Lilly).

Conditionally Compatible (Use within one hour after mixing or may be infused directly into the same running IV line) Ampicillin Sodium, USP (Bristol), Cisplatin (Bristol), Erythromycin Lactobionate, USP (Abbott), Methotrexate Sodium, USP (Lederle), Penicillin G Potassium, USP (Squibb), Tetracycline Hydrochloride, USP (Lederle).

Incompatible (Do Not Mix) Cephalothin Sodium, USP (Lilly), Chloramphenicol Sodium, USP (Parke-Davis), Sodium Bicarbonate, USP (Abbott).
Heparin Lock Flush

Heparin Lock Flush

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency. (See PRECAUTIONS.) Heparin Lock Flush Solution, USP 10 or 100 USP Units/mL, is injected as a single dose into an intravenous injection device using a volume of solution equivalent to that of the indwelling venipuncture device. A single dose should be injected following venipuncture when the indwelling device is not to be used immediately. After each useof the indwelling venipuncture device for injection or infusion of medication, or withdrawal of blood samples, another dose should be injected to restore the effectiveness of the heparin lock. The amount of heparin solution is sufficient to prevent clotting within the lumen of indwelling venipuncture devices (usually not holding more than 0.2 to 0.3 mL) for up to twenty-four hours. When the indwelling device is used to administer a drug which is incompatible with heparin, the entire heparin lock set should be flushed with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP before and after the medication is administered. Following the second flush, another dose of heparin solution should be injected to restore the effectiveness of the heparin lock. When the indwelling device is used for repeated withdrawal of blood samples for laboratory analyses and the presence of heparin or saline is likely to interfere with or alter results of the desired blood tests, the in situ heparin flush solution should be cleared from the device by aspirating and discarding 1 mL before the desired blood sample is drawn. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Neo-synephrine

Neo-synephrine

NEO-SYNEPHRINE is generally injected subcutaneously, intramuscularly, slowly intravenously or in dilute solution as a continuous intravenous infusion. In patients with paroxysmal supraventricular tachycardia and, if indicated, in case of emergency, Phenylephrine Hydrochloride Injection is administered directly intravenously. The dose should be adjusted according to the pressor response.
Dosage Calculations Dose Required Use NEO-SYNEPHRINE 1% 10 mg 1 mL 5 mg 0.5 mL 1 mg 0.1 mL For convenience in intermittent intravenous administration, dilute 1 mL NEO-SYNEPHRINE 1% with 9 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, to yield 0.1% NEO-SYNEPHRINE. Dose Required Une DilutedNEO-SYNEPHRINE (0.1%) 0.1 mg 0.1 mL 0.2 mg 0.2 mL 0.5 mg 0.5 mL Mild or Moderate Hypotension SUBCUTANEOUSLY OR INTRAMUSCULARLY: Usual dose, from 2 mg to 5 mg. Range, from 1 mg to 10 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 5 mg. INTRAVENOUSLY: Usual dose, 0.2 mg. Range, from 0.1 mg to 0.5 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg. Injections should not be repeated more often than every 10 to 15 minutes. A 5 mg intramuscular dose should raise blood pressure for one to two hours. A 0.5 mg intravenous dose should elevate the blood pressure for about 15 minutes. Severe Hypotension and Shock - Including Drug-Related Hypotension Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, NEO-SYNEPHRINE can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement. Hypotension and occasionally severe shock may result from overdosage or idiosyncrasy following the administration of certain drugs, especially adrenergic and ganglionic blocking agents, rauwolfia and veratrum alkaloids and phenothiazines tranquilizers. Patients who receive a phenothiazine derivative as preoperative medication are especially susceptible to these reactions. As an adjunct in the management of such episodes, NEO-SYNEPHRINE Injection is a suitable agent for restoring blood pressure. Higher initial and maintenance doses of NEO-SYNEPHRINEare required in patients with persistent or untreated severe hypotension or shock. Hypotension produced by powerful peripheral adrenergic blocking agents, chlorpromazine or pheochromocytomectomy may also require more intensive therapy. Continuous Infusion: Add 10 mg of the drug (1 mL of 1 percent solution) to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (providing a 1:50,000 solution). To raise the blood pressure rapidly, start the infusion at about 100 mcg to 180 mcg per minute (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 100 to 180 drops per minute). When the blood pressure is stabilized (at a low normal level for the individual), a maintenance rate of 40 mcg to 60 mcg per minute usually suffices (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 40 to 60 Drops per minute). If the drop size of the infusion system varies from the 20 drops per mL the dose must be adjusted accordingly. If a prompt initial pressor response is not obtained, additional increments of NEO-SYNEPHRINE(10 mg or more) are added to the infusion bottle. The rate of flow is then adjusted until the desired blood pressure level is obtained. (In some cases, a more potent vasopressor, such as norepinephrine bitartrate, may be required.) Hypertension should be avoided. The blood pressure should be checked frequently. Headache and/or bradycardia may indicate hypertension. Arrhythmias are rare. Spinal Anesthesia-Hypotension Routine parenteral use of NEO-SYNEPHRINEhas been recommended for the prophylaxis and treatment of hypotension during spinal anesthesia. It is best administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly three or four minutes before injection of the spinal anesthetic. The total requirement for high anesthetic levels is usually 3 mg, and for lower levels, 2 mg. For hypotensive emergencies during spinal anesthesia, NEO-SYNEPHRINE may be injected intravenously, using an initial dose of 0.2 mg. Any subsequent dose should not exceed the previous dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg and no more than 0.5 mg should be administered in a single dose. To combat hypotension during spinal anesthesia in children, a dose of 0.5 mg to 1 mg per 25 pounds body weight, administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly, is recommended. Prolongation of Spinal Anesthesia The addition of 2 mg to 5 mg of NEO-SYNEPHRINE to the anesthetic solution increases the duration of motor block by as much as approximately 50 percent without any increase in the incidence of complications such as nausea, vomiting or blood pressure disturbances. Vasoconstrictor for Regional Analgesia Concentrations about ten times those employed when epinephrine is used as a vasoconstrictor are recommended. The optimum strength is 1:20,000 (made by adding 1 mg of NEO-SYNEPHRINE to every 20 mL of local anesthetic solution). Some pressor responses can be expected when 2 mg or more are injected. Paroxysmal Supraventricular Tachycardia Rapid intravenous injection (within 20 to 30 seconds) is recommended. The initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg, and subsequent doses, which are determined by the initial blood pressure response, should not exceed the preceding dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg and should never exceed 1 mg. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Vitamin K1

Vitamin K1

Whenever possible, Vitamin K1 Injection (Phytonadione Injectable Emulsion, USP) should be given by the subcutaneous route. (See Box Warning.) When intravenous administration is considered unavoidable, the drug should be injected very slowly, not exceeding 1 mg per minute.Protect from light at all times.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.Directions for Dilution Vitamin K1 Injection may be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or 5% Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection. Benzyl alcohol as a preservative has been associated with toxicity in newborns. Therefore,all of the above diluents should be preservative-free (see WARNINGS). Other diluents should not be used. When dilutions are indicated, administration should be started immediately after mixture with the diluent, and unused portions of the dilution should be discarded, as well as unused contents of the ampul.Prophylaxis of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that vitamin K1 be given to the newborn. A single intramuscular dose of Vitamin K1 Injection 0.5 to 1 mg within one hour of birth is recommended.Treatment of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn Empiric administration of vitamin K1 should not replace proper laboratory evaluation of the coagulation mechanism. A prompt response (shortening of the prothrombin time in 2 to 4 hours) following administration of vitamin K1 is usually diagnostic of hemorrhagic disease of the newborn, and failure to respond indicates another diagnosis or coagulation disorder. Vitamin K1 Injection 1 mg should be given either subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants. Whole blood or component therapy may be indicated if bleeding is excessive. This therapy, however, does not correct the underlying disorder and Vitamin K1 Injection should be given concurrently.Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin time caused by oral anticoagulant therapy—2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required. Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition (see WARNINGS). If in 6 to 8 hours after parenteral administration the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated.
Vitamin K1 Injection (Phytonadione Injectable Emulsion, USP) Summary of Dosage Guidelines (See circular text for details) Newborns Dosage Hemorrhagic Disease of the NewbornProphylaxisTreatment 0.5 to 1 mg IM within 1 hour of birth1 mg SC or IM(Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oralanticoagulants) Adults Initial Dose Anticoagulant-InducedProthrombin Deficiency (caused by coumarin or indanedione derivatives)HypothrombinemiaDue to other causes (Antibiotics; Salicylates or other drugs;Factors limiting absorptionor synthesis. 2.5 mg to 10 mgor up to 25 mg(rarely 50 mg)2.5 mg to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) In the event of shock or excessive blood loss, the use of whole blood or component therapy is indicated. Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained. If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates; antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent Vitamin K1 Injection. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of Vitamin K1 Injection is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

Table I (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.Epidural Anesthesia For an epidural test dose, only the following available specific product of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USPby Hospira is recommended:1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................... 5 mL single-dose ampulsFor epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP byHospira are recommended:1% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................... 30 mL single-dose ampuls30 mL single-dose vials1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................. 30 mL single-dose ampuls30 mL single-dose vials2% with epinephrine 1:200,000........................ 20 mL single-dose vialsAlthough these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single-dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2-3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2-3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine injection should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10-15 μg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.Maximum Recommended Dosages Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum dose of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg per lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients andnon-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).Pediatric Population: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for pediatric patients, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For pediatric patients over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75-100 mg (1.5-2 mg/lb). In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.FOR EPIDURAL USE ONLY.Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Do not use the injection if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.
Table I Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol.(mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration PercutaneousIntravenous Regional 5.5 or 1.00.5 1-6010-60 5-30050-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. BrachialDentalIntercostalParavetebralPundendal (each side)Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.52.01.01.01.01.0 15-201-533-51010 225-30020-1003030-50100100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion)Lumbar 1.01.0 55-10 5050-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic Lumbar Analgesia AnesthesiaCaudal Obstetrical Analgesia Surgical Anesthesia 1.01.01.52.01.01.5 20-3025-3015-2010-1520-3015-20 200-300250-300225-300200-300200-300225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/ dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper or ampul thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use. Do not autoclave.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of 200 to 300 mEq of bicarbonate, given as a 7.5% or 8.4% solution is suggested for adults. Cautions should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated.

Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day is recommended. Slow administration rates and a solution diluted to 4.2% are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-toeight- hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight — depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH.

Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Cyanocobalamin

Cyanocobalamin

Avoid using the intravenous route. Use of this product intravenously will result in almost all of the vitamin being lost in the urine.Pernicious Anemia: Parenteral vitamin B12 is the recommended treatment and will be required for the remainder of the patient's life. The oral form is not dependable. A dose of 100 mcg daily for 6 or 7 days should be administered by intramuscular or deep subcutaneous injection. If there is clinical improvement and if a reticulocyte response is observed, the same amount may be given on alternate days for seven doses, then every 3 to 4 days for another 2 to 3 weeks. By this time hematologic values should have become normal. This regimen should be followed by 100 mcg monthly for life. Folic acid should be administered concomitantly if needed. Patients with Normal Intestinal Absorption: Where the oral route is not deemed adequate, initial treatment similar to that for patients with pernicious anemia may be indicated depending on the severity of the deficiency. Chronic treatment should be with an oral B12 preparation. If other vitamin deficiencies are present, they should be treated.Schilling Test: The flushing dose is 1000 mcg.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

The usual dose is 1 to 3 mg administered under careful monitoring, such as electrocardiography and central venous pressure. The rate of administration should not exceed 1 mg (1 mL) per minute to diminish the possibility of lowering blood pressure and causing cardiac standstill. Sufficient time should be allowed for the drug to reach the site of action even when a slow circulation is present. If necessary, a second dose may be given after two minutes. Thereafter, additional drug should not be given in less than four hours. Additional propranolol should not be given when the desired alteration in rate or rhythm is achieved. Transfer to oral therapy as soon as possible. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of 200 to 300 mEq of bicarbonate, given as a 7.5% or 8.4% solution is suggested for adults. Cautions should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day is recommended. Slow administration rates and a solution diluted to 4.2% are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-toeight- hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight — depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acidbase status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Adults: Parenteral therapy with Furosemide Injection should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

EdemaThe usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 40 mg given as a single dose, injected intramuscularly or intravenously. The intravenous dose should be given slowly (1 to 2 minutes). Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, another dose may be administered in the same manner 2 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg and given not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. This individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily.

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response. Close medical supervision is necessary.

If the physician elects to use high dose parenteral therapy, add the furosemide to either Sodium Chloride Injection USP, Lactated Ringer's Injection USP, or Dextrose (5%) Injection USP after pH has been adjusted to above 5.5, and administer as a controlled intravenous infusion at a rate not greater than 4 mg/min. Furosemide Injection is a buffered alkaline solution with a pH of about 9 and drug may precipitate at pH values below 7. Care must be taken to ensure that the pH of the prepared infusion solution is in the weakly alkaline to neutral range. Acid solutions, including other parenteral medications (e.g., labetalol, ciprofloxacin, amrinone, milrinone) must not be administered concurrently in the same infusion because they may cause precipitation of the furosemide. In addition, furosemide injection should not be added to a running intravenous line containing any of these acidic products.

Acute Pulmonary EdemaThe usual initial dose of furosemide is 40 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes). If a satisfactory response does not occur within 1 hour, the dose may be increased to 80 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes).

If necessary, additional therapy (e.g., digitalis, oxygen) may be administered concomitantly.

Pediatric Patients: Parenteral therapy should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical. The usual initial dose of Furosemide Injection (intravenously or intramuscularly) in pediatric patients is 1 mg/kg body weight and should be given slowly under close medical supervision. If the diuretic response to the initial dose is not satisfactory, dosage may be increased by 1 mg/kg not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose, until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended. Literature reports suggest that the maximum dose for premature infants should not exceed 1 mg/kg/day (see WARNINGS, Pediatric Use). Furosemide Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration.
Solu-medrol

Solu-medrol

When high dose therapy is desired, the recommended dose of SOLU-MEDROL Sterile Powder is 30 mg/kg administered intravenously over at least 30 minutes. This dose maybe repeated every 4 to 6 hours for 48 hours.

In general, high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient’s condition has stabilized; usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours.

Although adverse effects associated with high dose short-term corticoid therapy are uncommon, peptic ulceration may occur. Prophylactic antacid therapy may be indicated.

In other indications initial dosage will vary from 10 to 40 mg of methylprednisolone depending on the clinical problem being treated. The larger doses may be required for short-term management of severe, acute conditions. The initial dose usually should be given intravenously over a period of several minutes. Subsequent doses may be given intravenously or intramuscularly at intervals dictated by the patient’s response and clinical condition. Corticoid therapy is an adjunct to, and not replacement for conventional therapy.

Dosage may be reduced for infants and children but should be governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or size. It should not be less than 0.5 mg per kg every 24 hours.

Dosage must be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days. If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued. Routine laboratory studies, such as urinalysis, two-hour postprandial blood sugar, determination of blood pressure and body weight, and a chest X-ray should be made at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with an ulcer history or significant dyspepsia.

SOLU-MEDROL may be administered by intravenous or intramuscular injection or by intravenous infusion, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. To administer by intravenous (or intramuscular) injection, prepare solution as directed. The desired dose may be administered intravenously over a period of several minutes. If desired, the medication may be administered in diluted solutions by adding Water for Injection or other suitable diluent (see below) to the Act-O-Vial and withdrawing the indicated dose.

To prepare solutions for intravenous infusion, first prepare the solution for injection as directed. This solution may then be added to indicated amounts of 5% dextrose in water, isotonic saline solution or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution.

Multiple Sclerosis

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (4 mg of methylprednisolone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).

DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE ACT-O-VIAL SYSTEM1. Press down on plastic activator to force diluent into the lower compartment.2. Gently agitate to effect solution.3. Remove plastic tab covering center of stopper.4. Sterilize top of stopper with a suitable germicide.5. Insert needle squarely through center of stopper until tip is just visible. Invert vial and withdraw dose.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer of the drug to be administered.

These parenterals should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single-dose vial containing 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be used.Epidural Anesthesia For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection by Hospira are recommended: 1%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mL single-dose teartop vials 1.5%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mL single-dose ampuls 2%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL single-dose ampuls Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2−3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2−3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine hydrochloride should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10−15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient "epinephrine response" within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solutions into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. Maximum Recommended Dosages NOTE: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine. Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One-half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 — 100 mg (1.5 — 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (i.e., 0.25 — 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used. Table 1 Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol. (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1.0 1-60 5-300 Intravenous Regional 0.5 10-60 50-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. Brachial 1.5 15-20 225-300 Dental 2.0 1-5 20-100 Intercostal 1.0 3 30 Paravertabral 1.0 3-5 30-50 Pudendal (each side) 1.0 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.0 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1.0 5 50 Lumbar 1.0 5-10 50-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1.0 25-30 200-300 Lumbar Analgesia 1.0 25-30 250-300 Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 Caudal Obstetrical Analgesia 1.0 20-30 200-300 Surgical Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for ski or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.
Romazicon

Romazicon

ROMAZICON is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and normal saline solutions. If ROMAZICON is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, ROMAZICON should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products,ROMAZICON should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, ROMAZICON should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult PatientsFor the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric PatientsFor the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of ROMAZICON administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of ROMAZICON in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg. Do not rush the administration of ROMAZICON. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS). Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of ROMAZICON, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner). If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of ROMAZICON, the major cause of sedation islikely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional ROMAZICON is likely to have no effect. In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. Safety and Handling ROMAZICON is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors.).The 1 mL vial must not be confused with a “catheter lock flush” vial or other 1 mL vial of inappropriate strength. Confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength prior to administration of the drug.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection.

The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every four hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn four to six hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.
Converting to Oral Anticoagulant
When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about five hours after the last IV bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.
Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose Heparin
Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
METHOD OF ADMINISTRATION FREQUENCY RECOMMENDED DOSE (based on 150 lb [68 kg] patient) Deep Subcutaneous (Intrafat) InjectionA different site should be usedfor each injection to prevent the development of massive hemmatoma. Initial DoseEvery 8 hoursor Every 12 hours 5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentratedsolution, subcutaneously.8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution.15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution. Intermittent Intravenous Injection Initial DoseEvery 4 to 6 hours 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Intravenous Infusion Initial DoseContinuous 5,000 units by IV injection20,000 to 40,000 units/24hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or any comparable solution) for infusion. Pediatric Use
Do not administer Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preserved with benzyl alcohol, to neonates and infants (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, Pregnancy, Nursing Mothers, and Pediatric Use and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use). When indicated, Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preservative free should be used in neonates and infants.

Follow recommendations of appropriate pediatric reference texts. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline:

Initial Dose: 50 units/kg (IV, infusion)

Maintenance Dose: 100 units/kg (IV, infusion) every four hours, or 20,000 units/m2/24 hours continuously
Geriatric Use
Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.
Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels
Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.
Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism
A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for seven days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as well as patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.
Extracorporeal Dialysis
Follow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully.
Blood Transfusion
Addition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units/1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.
Laboratory Samples
Addition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.
Hydralazine Hydrochlori...

Hydralazine Hydrochloride

When there is urgent need, therapy in the hospitalized patient may be initiated intramuscularly or as a rapid intravenous bolus injection directly into the vein. Hydralazine hydrochloride injection should be used only when the drug cannot be given orally. The usual dose is 20-40 mg, repeated as necessary. Certain patients (especially those with marked renal damage) may require a lower dose. Blood pressure should be checked frequently. It may begin to fall within a few minutes after injection, with the average maximal decrease occurring in 10-80 minutes. In cases where there has been increased intracranial pressure, lowering the blood pressure may increase cerebral ischemia. Most patients can be transferred to oral hydralazine hydrochloride within 24-48 hours.The product should be used immediately after the vial is opened. It should not be added to infusion solutions. Hydralazine hydrochloride injection may discolor upon contact with metal; discolored solutions should be discarded. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single-dose vial containing 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be used.Epidural Anesthesia For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection by Hospira are recommended: 1%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mL single-dose teartop vials 1.5%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mL single-dose ampuls 2%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL single-dose ampuls Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2−3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2−3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine hydrochloride should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10−15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient "epinephrine response" within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solutions into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. Maximum Recommended Dosages NOTE: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine. Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One-half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 — 100 mg (1.5 — 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (i.e., 0.25 — 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used. Table 1 Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol. (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1.0 1-60 5-300 Intravenous Regional 0.5 10-60 50-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. Brachial 1.5 15-20 225-300 Dental 2.0 1-5 20-100 Intercostal 1.0 3 30 Paravertabral 1.0 3-5 30-50 Pudendal (each side) 1.0 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.0 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1.0 5 50 Lumbar 1.0 5-10 50-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1.0 25-30 200-300 Lumbar Analgesia 1.0 25-30 250-300 Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 Caudal Obstetrical Analgesia 1.0 20-30 200-300 Surgical Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for ski or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.
Epinephrine

Epinephrine

Epinephrine Injection, USP is administered by intravenous injection and/or in cardiac arrest, by intracardiac injection into the left ventricular chamber or via endotracheal tube directly into the bronchial tree. The adult intravenous dose for hypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg (1 to 2.5 mL of 1:10,000 solution), injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks. In cardiac arrest, 0.5 to 1.0 mg (5 to 10 mL of 1:10,000 solution) may be given. During a resuscitation effort, 0.5 mg (5 mL) should be administered intravenously every five minutes. Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route. The intracardiac dose usually ranges from 0.3 to 0.5 mg (3 to 5 mL of 1:10,000 solution). Alternatively, if the patient has been intubated, epinephrine can be injected via the endotracheal tube directly into the bronchial tree at the same dosage as for intravenous injection. It is rapidly absorbed through the lung capillary bed. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.) To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single-dose vial containing 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be used.Epidural Anesthesia For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection by Hospira are recommended: 1%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mL single-dose teartop vials 1.5%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mL single-dose ampuls 2%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL single-dose ampuls Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2−3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2−3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine hydrochloride should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10−15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient "epinephrine response" within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solutions into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. Maximum Recommended Dosages NOTE: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine. Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One-half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 — 100 mg (1.5 — 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (i.e., 0.25 — 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used. Table 1 Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol. (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1.0 1-60 5-300 Intravenous Regional 0.5 10-60 50-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. Brachial 1.5 15-20 225-300 Dental 2.0 1-5 20-100 Intercostal 1.0 3 30 Paravertabral 1.0 3-5 30-50 Pudendal (each side) 1.0 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.0 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1.0 5 50 Lumbar 1.0 5-10 50-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1.0 25-30 200-300 Lumbar Analgesia 1.0 25-30 250-300 Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 Caudal Obstetrical Analgesia 1.0 20-30 200-300 Surgical Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for ski or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.
Marcaine

Marcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of MARCAINE should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. MARCAINE is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). In recommended doses, MARCAINE produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations. 0.25%#when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5%#provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential. 0.75%#produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. The duration of anesthesia with MARCAINE is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of MARCAINE up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case. These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. MARCAINE is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of MARCAINE, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of MARCAINE (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.)Use in Dentistry: The 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% MARCAINE with epinephrine). Injections should be made slowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE in dentistry is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use. This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of MARCAINE. Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local infiltration 0.25% (4) up to max up to max - Epidural 0.75% (2,4)0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 10-2010-2010-20 75-15050-10025-50 completemoderate to completepartial to moderate Caudal 0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 15-3015-30 75-15037.5-75 moderate to completemoderate Peripheral nerves 0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 5 to max5 to max 25 to max12.5 to max moderate to completemoderate to complete Retrobulbar (3) 0.75% (4) 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Dental (3) 0.5% w/ epi 1.8-3.6 per site 9-18 per site Epidural (3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi (10-15 micrograms epinephrine) (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate

Intramuscular: Adults and older children: For severe hypomagnesemia, 1 to 5 g (2 to 10 mL of 50% solution) daily in divided doses; administration is repeated daily until serum levels have returned to normal. If deficiency is not severe, 1 g (2 mL of 50% solution) can be given once or twice daily. Serum magnesium levels should serve as a guide to continued dosage.

Intravenous: 1 to 4 g Magnesium Sulfate may be given intravenously in 10% to 20% solution, but only with great caution; the rate should not exceed 1.5 mL of 10% solution or equivalent per minute until relaxation is obtained.

Intravenous Infusion: 4 g in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection at a rate not exceeding 3 mL per minute.

Usual Dose Range: 1 to 40 g daily.

Electrolyte Replenisher: Intramuscular 1 to 2 g in 50% solution four times a day until serum magnesium is within normal limits.

Usual Pediatric Dose: Intramuscular 20 to 40 mg per kg of body weight in a 20% solution repeated as necessary.

For Eclampsia: Initially 1 to 2 g in 25% or 50% solution is given intramuscularly. Subsequently, 1 g is given every 30 minutes until relief is obtained. The blood pressure should be monitored after each injection.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Dopamine Hydrochloride

Dopamine Hydrochloride

WARNING: This is a potent drug; it must be diluted before administration to the patient.Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP is administered (only after dilution) by intravenous infusion.Suggested Dilution - For the 40 mg/mL preparation, transfer by aseptic technique the contents containing either 5 mL, 200 mg or 10 mL, 400 mg of Dopamine Hydrochloride to either a 250 mL or 500 mL bottle of one of the sterile I.V. solutions listed below. For the 80 mg/mL preparation, transfer by aseptic technique the contents containing 10 mL, 800 mg of Dopamine Hydrochloride to a 250 mL, 500 mL or 1000 mL bottle of one of the following sterile I.V. solutions:0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5% Dextrose Injection, USP5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer’s InjectionSodium Lactate Injection, USP 1/6 MolarLactated Ringer’s Injection, USPThe resultant dilutions are summarized in the following chart:
Concentration of Dopamine Hydrochloride 40 mg/mL 80 mg/mL Volume of DopamineHydrochloride Injection, USP 5 mL 10 mL 10 mL 250 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution 800 mcg/mL 1600 mcg/mL 3200 mcg/mL 500 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution 400 mcg/mL 800 mcg/mL 1600 mcg/mL 1000 mL Bottle of I.V. Solution 200 mcg/mL 400 mcg/mL 800 mcg/mL Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP has been found to be stable for a minimum of 24 hours after dilution in the foregoing I.V. solutions. However, as with all I.V. admixtures, dilution should be made just prior to administration. Do NOT add Dopamine Hydrochloride to Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP or other alkaline I.V. solutions, since the drug is inactivated in alkaline solution. Rate of Administration - Dopamine Hydrochloride Injection, USP after dilution, is administered intravenously by infusion via a suitable I.V. catheter or needle. When administering Dopamine Hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set. Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic or renal response to dopamine. In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized. Administration at rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/min have safely been used in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution. Suggested Regimen: 1. When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or pulmonary wedge pressure is 14 to 18 mm Hg. 2. Begin infusion of diluted solution at doses of 2 - 5 mcg/kg/min of Dopamine Hydrochloride in patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion. In more seriously ill patients, begin infusion of diluted solution at doses of 5 mcg/kg/min of Dopamine Hydrochloride and increase gradually using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min increments up to a rate of 20 to 50 mcg/kg/min as needed. If doses in excess of 50 mcg/kg/min are required, it is advisable to check urine output frequently. Should urinary flow begin to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of dopamine dosage should be considered. Multiclinic trials have shown that more than 50 percent of patients have been satisfactorily maintained on doses less than 20 mcg/kg/min.In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures or urine flow, additional increments of dopamine may be given in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion. 3. Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of blood volume, augmentation of cardiac contractility, and distribution of peripheral perfusion. Dosage of dopamine should be adjusted according to the patient’s response, with particular attention to diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of new dysrhythmias as indices for decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage. 4. As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of administration to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of the drug. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single-dose vial containing 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP should be used.Epidural Anesthesia For epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection by Hospira are recommended: 1%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 mL single-dose teartop vials 1.5%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 mL single-dose ampuls 2%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mL single-dose ampuls Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2−3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2−3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine hydrochloride should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10−15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient "epinephrine response" within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solutions into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. Maximum Recommended Dosages NOTE: The products accompanying this insert do not contain epinephrine. Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One-half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 — 100 mg (1.5 — 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (i.e., 0.25 — 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Solutions that are discolored and/or contain particulate matter should not be used. Table 1 Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol. (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1.0 1-60 5-300 Intravenous Regional 0.5 10-60 50-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. Brachial 1.5 15-20 225-300 Dental 2.0 1-5 20-100 Intercostal 1.0 3 30 Paravertabral 1.0 3-5 30-50 Pudendal (each side) 1.0 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.0 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1.0 5 50 Lumbar 1.0 5-10 50-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1.0 25-30 200-300 Lumbar Analgesia 1.0 25-30 250-300 Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 Caudal Obstetrical Analgesia 1.0 20-30 200-300 Surgical Anesthesia 1.5 15-20 225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for ski or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). The 1 mL vial must not be confused with a “catheter lock flush” vial or other 1 mL vial of inappropriate strength. Confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength prior to administration of the drug.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every four hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn four to six hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.
Converting to Oral Anticoagulant
When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about five hours after the last IV bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.
Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose Heparin
Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
METHOD OF ADMINISTRATION FREQUENCY RECOMMENDED DOSE (based on150 lb [68 kg] patient) Deep Subcutaneous (Intrafat) InjectionA different site shouldbe used for eachinjection to prevent the development of massivehematoma. Initial DoseEvery 8 hoursor Every 12 hours 5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution.15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution Intermittent Intravenous Injection Initial DoseEvery 4 to 6 hours 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium ChlorideInjection, USP5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% SodiumChloride Injection, USP Intravenous Infusion Initial DoseContinuous 5,000 units by IV Injection20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or in any compatible solution) for infusion) Pediatric Use
Do not administer Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preserved with benzyl alcohol, to neonates and infants (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, Pregnancy, Nursing Mothers, and Pediatric Use and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use). When indicated, Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preservative free should be used in neonates and infants.

Follow recommendations of appropriate pediatric reference texts. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline:

Initial Dose: 50 units/kg (IV, infusion)

Maintenance Dose: 100 units/kg (IV, infusion) every four hours, or 20,000 units/m2/24 hours continuously
Geriatric Use
Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.
Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels
Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.
Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism
A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for seven days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as well as patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.
Extracorporeal Dialysis
Follow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully.
Blood Transfusion
Addition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units/1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.
Laboratory Samples
Addition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil injection is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and 0.9% sodium chloride solutions. If flumazenil injection is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil injection should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil injection should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult Patients For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE). In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric Patients For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections. Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil injection administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established. It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE). The safety and efficacy of flumazenil injection in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE). In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg. Do not rush the administration of flumazenil injection. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS). Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil injection, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner). If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil injection, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil injection is likely to have no effect. In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and Handling Flumazenil injection is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Prochlorperazine Edisyl...

Prochlorperazine Edisylate

Notes on Injection For intramuscular administration, inject deeply into the upper, outer quadrant of the buttock. Subcutaneous administration is not advisable because of local irritation.

StabilityThis solution should be protected from light. A slight yellowish discoloration will not alter potency. If markedly discolored, solution should be discarded.

CompatibilityIt is recommended that prochlorperazine injection not be mixed with other agents in the syringe.

ADULTS (For children's dosage and administration, see below.) Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients.

Elderly PatientsIn general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients. To Control Severe Nausea and Vomiting: Adjust dosage to the response of the individual. Begin with the lowest recommended dosage.I.M. Dosage: Initially 5 to 10 mg (1 to 2 mL) injected deeply into the upper outer quadrant of the buttock. If necessary, repeat every 3 or 4 hours. Total I.M. dosage should not exceed 40 mg per day.I.V. Dosage: 2.5 to 10 mg (0.5 to 2 mL) by slow I.V. injection or infusion at a rate not to exceed 5 mg per minute. Prochlorperazine edisylate injection may be administered either undiluted or diluted in isotonic solution. A single dose of the drug should not exceed 10 mg; total I.V. dosage should not exceed 40 mg per day. When administered I.V., do not use bolus injection. Hypotension is a possibility if the drug is given by I.V. injection or infusion.Subcutaneous administration is not advisable because of local irritation.

Adult Surgery (for severe nausea and vomiting): Total parenteral dosage should not exceed 40 mg per day. Hypotension is a possibility if the drug is given by I.V. injection or infusion.I.M. Dosage: 5 to 10 mg (1 to 2 mL) 1 to 2 hours before induction of anesthesia (repeat once in 30 minutes, if necessary), or to control acute symptoms during and after surgery (repeat once if necessary).I.V. Dosage: 5 to 10 mg (1 to 2 mL) as a slow I.V. injection or infusion 15 to 30 minutes before induction of anesthesia, or to control acute symptoms during or after surgery. Repeat once if necessary. Prochlorperazine may be administered either undiluted or diluted in isotonic solution, but a single dose of the drug should not exceed 10 mg. The rate of administration should not exceed 5 mg per minute. When administered I.V., do not use bolus injection.

In Adult Psychiatric Disorders: Adjust dosage to the response of the individual and according to the severity of the condition. Begin with the lowest recommended dose. Although response ordinarily is seen within a day or 2, longer treatment is usually required before maximal improvement is seen.I.M. Dosage: For immediate control of adult schizophrenic patients with severe symptomatology, inject an initial dose of 10 to 20 mg (2 to 4 mL) deeply into the upper outer quadrant of the buttock. Many patients respond shortly after the first injection. If necessary, however, repeat the initial dose every 2 to 4 hours (or, in resistant cases, every hour) to gain control of the patient. More than three or four doses are seldom necessary. After control is achieved, switch patient to an oral form of the drug at the same dosage level or higher. If, in rare cases, parenteral therapy is needed for a prolonged period, give 10 to 20 mg (2 to 4 mL) every 4 to 6 hours. Pain and irritation at the site of injection have seldom occurred.Subcutaneous administration is not advisable because of local irritation.

CHILDREN DO NOT USE IN PEDIATRIC SURGERY. Children seem more prone to develop extrapyramidal reactions, even on moderate doses. Therefore, use lowest effective dosage. Tell parents not to exceed prescribed dosage, since the possibility of adverse reactions increases as dosage rises. Occasionally the patient may react to the drug with signs of restlessness and excitement; if this occurs, do not administeradditional doses. Take particular precaution in administering the drug to children with acute illnesses or dehydration (see under PRECAUTIONS and Dystonia).Severe Nausea and Vomiting in Children: Prochlorperazine should not be used in pediatric patients under 20 pounds in weight or 2 years of age. It should not be used in conditions for which children's dosages have not been established. Dosage and frequency of administration should be adjusted according to the severity of the symptoms and the response of the patient. The duration of activity following intramuscular administration may last up to 12 hours. Subsequent doses may be given by the same route if necessary.I.M. Dosage: Calculate each dose on the basis of 0.06 mg of the drug per lb of body weight; give by deep I.M. injection. Control is usually obtained with one dose.Children with Schizophrenia: I.M. Dosage: For ages under 12, calculate each dose on the basis of 0.06 mg of prochlorperazine per lb of body weight; give by deep I.M. injection. Control is usually obtained with one dose. After control is achieved, switch the patient to an oral form of the drug at the same dosage level or higher.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Romazicon

Romazicon

ROMAZICON is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and normal saline solutions. If ROMAZICON is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, ROMAZICON should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products,ROMAZICON should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, ROMAZICON should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult PatientsFor the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric PatientsFor the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of ROMAZICON administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of ROMAZICON in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult PatientsFor the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour. It is recommended that ROMAZICON be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult PatientsFor initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of ROMAZICON is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg. Do not rush the administration of ROMAZICON. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS). Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of ROMAZICON, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner). If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of ROMAZICON, the major cause of sedation islikely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional ROMAZICON is likely to have no effect. In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and HandlingROMAZICON is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration and it is recommended in emergency situations. Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion: Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP may be diluted for intravenous infusion in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose injection. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must bediscarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient’s response. Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

Usage in Adults: Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at 2 to 3 minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid induced or partial opioid induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone should be titrated according to the patient’s response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal, i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating or circulatory stress.Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one to two hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock: The optimal dosage of Naloxone or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Usage in Pediatric Population: Opioid Overdose—Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in pediatric patients is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired de ree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, Naloxone Hydrochloride may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, Naloxone Hydrochloride Injection, USP can be diluted with sterile water for injection. Postoperative Opioid Depression: Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

Usage in Neonates When using naloxone hydrochloride injection in neonates a product containing 0.02 mg/mL should be used.

Opioid-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

The addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection solution to intravenous infusions is not recommended due to lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.Not to exceed 50 mg per minute, intravenously in adults, and not exceeding 1#3 mg/kg/min in neonates. There is a relatively small margin between full therapeutic effect and minimally toxic doses of this drug. The solution is suitable for use as long as it remains free of haziness and precipitate. Upon refrigeration or freezing, a precipitate might form; this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. Only a clear solution should be used. A faint yellow coloration may develop; however, this has no effect on the potency of the solution. In the treatment of status epilepticus, the intravenous route is preferred because of the delay in absorption of phenytoin whenadministered intramuscularly. Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.Status Epilepticus: In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70-kg patient). The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6#8 hours. Recent work in neonates and children has shown that absorption of phenytoin is unreliable after oral administration, but a loading dose of 15#20 mg/kg of phenytoin sodium intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10#20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1#3 mg/kg/min. Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be injected slowly and directly into a large vein through a large-gauge needle or intravenous catheter. Each injection of intravenous phenytoin should be followed by an injection of sterile saline through the same needle or catheter to avoid local venous irritation due to alkalinity of the solution. Continuous infusion should be avoided; the addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection to intravenous infusion fluids is not recommended because of the likelihood of precipitation. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression. Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage. Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous shortacting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection. If administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia, and other appropriate measures should be considered. Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours. Neurosurgery: Prophylactic dosage#100 to 200 mg (2 to 4 mL) intramuscularly at approximately 4-hour intervals during surgery and continued during the postoperative period. When intramuscular administration is required for a patient previously stabilized orally, compensating dosage adjustments are necessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites. If the patient requires more than a week of I.M. phenytoin, alternative routes should be explored, such as gastric intubation. For time periods less than one week, the patient shifted back from I.M. administration should receive one half the original oral dose for the same period of time the patient received I.M. phenytoin. Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate

Both intravenous and intramuscular administration are appropriate. Intramuscular administration of the undiluted 50% solution results in therapeutic plasma levels in 60 minutes, whereas I.V. doses will provide a therapeutic level almost immediately. The rate of I.V. injection should generally not exceed 1.5 mL of a 10% concentration (or its equivalent) per minute, except in severe eclampsia with seizures (see below).

Solutions for intravenous infusion must be diluted to a concentration of 20% or less prior to administration. The diluents commonly used are 5% Dextrose Injection, USP and 0.9% SodiumChloride Injection, USP. Deep intramuscular injection of the undiluted (50%) solution is appropriate for adults, but the solution should be diluted to a 20% concentration prior to suchinjection in children.

In Magnesium Deficiency In the treatment of mild magnesium deficiency, the usual adult dose is 1 g, equivalent to 8.12 mEq of magnesium (2 mL of the 50% solution) injected intramuscularly every six hours for four doses (equivalent to a total of 32.5 mEq of magnesium per 24 hours). For severe hypomagnesemia, as much as 2 mEq (0.5 mL of the 50% solution) per kg of body weight may be given intramuscularly within a period of four hours if necessary. Alternatively, 5 g, (approximately 40 mEq) can be added to one liter of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP for slow intravenous infusion over a three-hour period.

In Hyperalimentation In total parenteral nutrition, maintenance requirements for magnesium are not precisely known. The maintenance dose recommended for adults is 5 to 8 mEq magnesium/liter of TPN solution; typical daily adult intake ranges from 10 to 24 mEq. For infants, the recommended intake ranges from 0.25 to 0.6 mEq/kg/day.

In Eclampsia In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. Intravenously, a dose of 4 to 5 g in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% SodiumChloride Injection, USP may be infused. Simultaneously, intramuscular doses of up to 10 g (10 mL of the undiluted 50% solution in each buttock) are given. Alternatively, the initial intravenous dose of 4 g may be given by diluting the 50% solution to a 10 or 20% concentration; the diluted fluid (40 mL of a 10% solution or 20 mL of a 20% solution) may then be injected intravenously over a period of three to four minutes. Subsequently, 4 to 5 g (8 to 10 mL of the 50% solution) are injected intramuscularly into alternate buttocks every four hours, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex and adequate respiratory function. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease. A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g should not be exceeded and less should be used if the patient is anuric.

In Nephritic Seizures In children with nephritic seizures, the 50% concentration should be diluted to a 20% solution for intramuscular injection. The dose for children is 20 to 40 mg (0.1 to 0.2 mL of a 20% solution) per kg of body weight administered intramuscularly as needed to control seizures.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Solu-medrol

Solu-medrol

When high dose therapy is desired, the recommended dose of SOLU-MEDROL Sterile Powder is 30 mg/kg administered intravenously over at least 30 minutes. This dose maybe repeated every 4 to 6 hours for 48 hours.

In general, high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient’s condition has stabilized; usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours.

Although adverse effects associated with high dose short-term corticoid therapy are uncommon, peptic ulceration may occur. Prophylactic antacid therapy may be indicated.

In other indications initial dosage will vary from 10 to 40 mg of methylprednisolone depending on the clinical problem being treated. The larger doses may be required for short-term management of severe, acute conditions. The initial dose usually should be given intravenously over a period of several minutes. Subsequent doses may be given intravenously or intramuscularly at intervals dictated by the patient’s response and clinical condition. Corticoid therapy is an adjunct to, and not replacement for conventional therapy.

Dosage may be reduced for infants and children but should be governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or size. It should not be less than 0.5 mg per kg every 24 hours.

Dosage must be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days. If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued. Routine laboratory studies, such as urinalysis, two-hour postprandial blood sugar, determination of blood pressure and body weight, and a chest X-ray should be made at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with an ulcer history or significant dyspepsia.

SOLU-MEDROL may be administered by intravenous or intramuscular injection or by intravenous infusion, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. To administer by intravenous (or intramuscular) injection, prepare solution as directed. The desired dose may be administered intravenously over a period of several minutes. If desired, the medication may be administered in diluted solutions by adding Water for Injection or other suitable diluent (see below) to the Act-O-Vial and withdrawing the indicated dose.

To prepare solutions for intravenous infusion, first prepare the solution for injection as directed. This solution may then be added to indicated amounts of 5% dextrose in water, isotonic saline solution or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution.

Multiple Sclerosis

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (4 mg of methylprednisolone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).

DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE ACT-O-VIAL SYSTEM1. Press down on plastic activator to force diluent into the lower compartment.2. Gently agitate to effect solution.3. Remove plastic tab covering center of stopper.4. Sterilize top of stopper with a suitable germicide.5. Insert needle squarely through center of stopper until tip is just visible. Invert vial and withdraw dose.
Kinevac

Kinevac

Reconstitution and Storage
Sincalide for Injection may be stored at room temperature prior to reconstitution.

To reconstitute, aseptically add 5 mL of Sterile Water for Injection USP to the vial. This solution may be kept at room temperature and should be used within 8 hours of reconstitution, after which time any unused portion should be discarded.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

For prompt contraction of the gallbladder, a dose of 0.02 mcg sincalide per kg (1.4 mcg/70 kg) is injected intravenously over a 30- to 60-second interval; if satisfactory contraction of the gallbladder does not occur in 15 minutes, a second dose, 0.04 mcg sincalide per kg, may be administered. To reduce the intestinal side effects (see ADVERSE REACTIONS), an intravenous infusion may be prepared at a dose of 0.12 mcg/kg in 100 mL of Sodium Chloride Injection USP and given at a rate of 2 mL per minute; alternatively, an intramuscular dose of 0.1 mcg/kg may be given. When Kinevac (Sincalide for Injection) is used in cholecystography, roentgenograms are usually taken at five-minute intervals after the injection. For visualization of the cystic duct, it may be necessary to take roentgenograms at one-minute intervals during the first five minutes after the injection.

For the Secretin-Kinevac test of pancreatic function, the patient receives a dose of 0.25 units secretin per kg by intravenous infusion over a 60-minute period. Thirty minutes after the initiation of the secretin infusion, a separate IV infusion of Kinevac at a total dose of 0.02 mcg per kg is administered over a 30-minute interval. For example, the total dose for a 70 kg patient is 1.4 mcg of sincalide; therefore, dilute 1.4 mL of reconstituted Kinevac solution to 30 mL with Sodium Chloride Injection USP and administer at a rate of 1 mL per minute.

To accelerate the transit time of a barium meal through the small bowel, administer Kinevac after the barium meal is beyond the proximal jejunum. (Sincalide, like cholecystokinin, may cause pyloric contraction.) The recommended dose is 0.04 mcg sincalide per kg (2.8 mcg/70 kg) injected intravenously over a 30- to 60- second interval; if satisfactory transit of the barium meal has not occurred in 30 minutes, a second dose of 0.04 mcg sincalide per kg may be administered. For reduction of side effects, a 30-minute IV infusion of sincalide [0.12 mcg per kg (8.4 mcg/70 kg) diluted to approximately 100 mL with Sodium Chloride Injection USP] may be administered.

Sodium Chloride Injection dilutions may be kept at room temperature and should be used within one hour of dilution.
Bacteriastatic Sodium C...

Bacteriastatic Sodium Chloride

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection, is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Sterile Water

Sterile Water

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer.

This parenteral should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate Injection, USP may be administered subcutaneously, ntramuscularly or intravenously. The average adult dose is 0.5 mg (5 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution), range 0.4 to 0.6 mg (4 to 6 mL). As an antisialogogue it is usually injected intramuscularly prior to induction of anesthesia. This produces only minimal blocking of vagal activity. In children, the dosage ranges from 0.1 mg in the newborn to 0.6 mg (6 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) in a child age 12 years, injected subcutaneously 30 minutes before surgery. During surgery, the drug is given intravenously when reduction in pulse rate and cessation of cardiac action are due to increased vagal activity; however, if the anesthetic is cyclopropane, doses less than 0.4 mg should be used and should be given slowly to avoid the possible production of ventricular arrhythmia. Usual doses are used to reduce severe bradycardia and syncope associated with hyperactive carotid sinus reflex. For bradyarrhythmias the usual intravenous adult dosage ranges from 0.4 to 1 mg (4 to 10 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) every one to two hours as needed; larger doses up to a maximum of 2 mg may be required. In children, intravenous dosage ranges from 0.01 to 0.03 mg per kg of body weight. Atropine is also a specific antidote for cardiovascular collapse resulting from injudiciousadministration of choline ester. When cardiac arrest has occurred, external cardiac massage or other method of resuscitation is required to distribute the drug after intravenous injection. In anticholinesterase poisoning from exposure to insecticides, large doses of at least 2 to 3 mg (20 to 30 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) should be administered parenterally and repeated until signs of atropine intoxication appear. In the ‘‘rapid’’ type of mushroom poisoning, atropine should be given in doses sufficient to control parasympathomimetic signs before coma and cardiovascular collapse supervene. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Propranolol

Propranolol

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

The usual dose is 1 to 3 mg administered under careful monitoring, such as electrocardiography and central venous pressure. The rate of administration should not exceed 1 mg (1 mL) per minute to diminish the possibility of lowering blood pressure and causing cardiac standstill. Sufficient time should be allowed for the drug to reach the site of action even when a slow circulation is present. If necessary, a second dose may be given after two minutes. Thereafter, additional drug should not be given in less than four hours. Additional propranolol hydrochloride should not be given when the desired alteration in rate or rhythm is achieved.

Transfer to oral therapy as soon as possible.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of one to two 50 mL vials (44.6 to 100 mEq) may be given initially and continued at a rate of 50 mL (44.6 to 50 mEq) every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), the 4.2% solution is recommended for intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day. Slow administration rates and the 4.2% solution are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight - depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/L at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Esmolol Hydrochloride

Esmolol Hydrochloride

Dosing Information

SUPRAVENTRICULAR TACHYCARDIA Dosage needs to be titrated, using ventricular rate as the guide.

An initial loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg (500 mcg/kg) infused over a minute duration followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.05 mg/kg/ min (50 mcg/kg/min) for the next 4 minutes is recommended. This should give a rough guide with respect to the responsiveness of ventricular rate.

After the 4 minutes of initial maintenance infusion (total treatment duration being 5 minutes), depending upon the desired ventricular response, the maintenance infusion may be continued at 0.05 mg/kg/min or increased step-wise (e.g. 0.1 mg/kg/min, 0.15 mg/kg/min to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min) with each step being maintained for 4 or more minutes.

If more rapid slowing of ventricular response is imperative, the 0.5 mg/kg loading dose infused over a 1 minute period may be repeated, followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.1 mg/kg/min for 4 minutes. Then, depending upon ventricular rate, another (and final) loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg/min infused over a 1 minute period may be administered followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.15mg/kg/min. If needed, after 4 minutes of the 0.15 mg/kg/min maintenance infusion, the maintenance infusion may be increased to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min.

In the absence of loading doses, constant infusion of a single concentration of esmolol reaches pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic steady-state in about 30 minutes. Maintenance infusions (with or without loading doses) may be continued for as long as 24 hours.

The following table summarizes the above and assumes that 3 loading doses (the maximum recommended) are infused over 1 minute and incremental maintenance doses are required after each loading dose. There should be no 4th loading dose, but the maintenance dose may be incremented one more time.
Loading Dose(over 1 minutes Maintenance Dose(over 4 minutes) Elapsed Time(minutes) micrograms/kg/min milligrams/kg/min micrograms/kg/min milligrams/kg/min 0-1 500 0.5 1-5 50 0.05 5-6 500 0.5 6-10 100 0.1 10-11 500 0.5 11-15 150 0.15 15-16 - - 16-20 200* 0.2* greater than 20 Maintenance dose titratedto heart rate or other clinicalendpoint. *As the desired heart rate or endpoint is approached, the loading infusion may be omitted and the maintenance infusion titrated to 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) or downward as appropriate. Maintenance dosages above 200 mcg/kg/min (0.2 mg/kg/min) have not been shown to have significantly increased benefits. The interval between titration steps may be increased. In the treatment of supraventricular tachycardia, responses to esmolol hydrochloride usually (over 95%) occur within the range of 50 to 200 mcg/kg/min (0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg/min). The average effective dosage is approximately 100 mcg/kg/min (0.1 mg/kg/min) although dosages as low as 25 mcg/kg/min (0.025 mg/kg/min) have been adequate in some patients. Dosages as high as 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) have been used, but these provide little added effect and increase the rate of adverse effects, so doses greater than 200 mcg/kg/min are not recommended. Dosage of esmolol in supraventricular tachycardia must be individualized by titration in which each step consists of a loading dosage followed by a maintenance dosage. This specific dosage regimen has not been studied intraoperatively and, because of the time required for titration, may not be optimal for intraoperative use. The safety of dosages above 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) has not been studied. In the event of an adverse reaction, the dosage of esmolol may be reduced or discontinued. If a local infusion site reaction develops, an alternate infusion site should be used and caution should be taken to prevent extravasation. The use of butterfly needles should be avoided. Abrupt cessation of esmolol in patients has not been reported to produce the withdrawal effects which may occur with abrupt withdrawal of beta blockers following chronic use in coronary artery disease (CAD) patients. However, caution should still be used in abruptly discontinuing infusions of esmolol in CAD patients. After achieving an adequate control of the heart rate and a stable clinical status in patients with supraventricular tachycardia, transition to alternative antiarrhythmic agents such as propranolol, digoxin, or verapamil, may be accomplished. A recommended guideline for such a transition is given below but the physician should carefully consider the labeling instructions for the alternative agent selected. Alternative Agent Dosage Propranolol hydrochloride 10 to 20 mg q 4 to 6 hours Digoxin 0.125 to 0.5 mg q 6 hours (p.o. or i.v.) Verapamil 80 mg q 6 hrs The dosage of esmolol hydrochloride should be reduced as follows: 1. Thirty minutes following the first dose of the alternative agent, reduce the infusion rate of esmolol by one-half (50%). 2. Following the second dose of the alternative agent, monitor the patient's response and if satisfactory control is maintained for the first hour, discontinue esmolol. The use of infusions of esmolol up to 24 hours has been well documented; in addition, limited data from 24 to 48 hrs (N=48) indicate that esmolol is well tolerated up to 48 hours. INTRAOPERATIVE AND POSTOPERATIVE TACHYCARDIA AND/OR HYPERTENSION In the intraoperative and postoperative settings it is not always advisable to slowly titrate the dose of esmolol hydrochloride to a therapeutic effect. Therefore, two dosing options are presented: immediate control dosing and a gradual control when the physician has time to titrate. 1. Immediate Control For intraoperative treatment of tachycardia and/or hypertension give an 80 mg (approximately 1 mg/kg) bolus dose over 30 seconds followed by a 150 mcg/kg/min infusion, if necessary. Adjust the infusion rate as required up to 300 mcg/kg/min to maintain desired heart rate and/or blood pressure. 2. Gradual Control For postoperative tachycardia and hypertension, the dosing schedule is the same as that used in supraventricular tachycardia. To initiate treatment, administer a loading dosage infusion of 500 mcg/kg/min of esmolol for one minute followed by a fourminute maintenance infusion of 50 mcg/kg/min. If an adequate therapeutic effect is not observed within five minutes, repeat the same loading dosage and follow with a maintenance infusion increased to 100 mcg/kg/min (see above SUPRAVENTRICULAR TACHYCARDIA ). Note: Higher dosages (250 to 300 mcg/kg/min) may be required for adequate control of blood pressure than those required for the treatment of atrial fibrillation, flutter and sinus tachycardia. One third of the postoperative hypertensive patients required these higher doses. Directions for Use of the 10 mL Ready-to-use Vial (10 mg/mL) This dosage form is prediluted to provide a ready-to-use 10 mg/mL concentration recommended for esmolol intravenous administration. It may be used to administer the appropriate esmolol hydrochloride loading dosage infusions by hand-held syringe while the maintenance infusion is being prepared. The 10 mL Ready-to-use Vial contains Esmolol Hydrochloride at a concentration of 10 mg/mL. When using a 10 mg/mL concentration, a loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg infused over 1 minute period of time, for a 70 kg patient is 3.5 mL. Compatibility with Commonly Used Intravenous Fluids Esmolol was tested for compatibility with ten commonly used intravenous fluids at a final concentration of 10 mg Esmolol Hydrochloride per mL. Esmolol was found to be compatible with the following solutions and was stable for at least 24 hours at controlled room temperature or under refrigeration: Dextrose (5%) Injection Dextrose (5%) in Lactated Ringer's Injection Dextrose (5%) in Ringer's Injection Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection Lactated Ringer's Injection Potassium Chloride (40 mEq/Liter) in Dextrose (5%) Injection Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection Esmolol is NOT compatible with Sodium Bicarbonate (5%) Injection. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride for Injection Concentrate must be diluted before administration. Care must be taken to ensure there is complete mixing of the potassium chloride with the large volume fluid, particularly if soft of bag type containers are used.

The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the specific condition of each patient.

If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/L, potassium can be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour and in a concentration of up to 40 mEq/L. The 24 hour total dose should not exceed 200 mEq.

If urgent treatment is indicated (serum potassium level less than 2mEq/L and electrocardiographic changes and/or muscle paralysis), potassium chloride may be infused very cautiously at a rate of up to 40 mEq/hour. In such cases, continuous cardiac monitoring is essential. As much as 400 mEq may be administered in a 24 hour period. In critical conditions, potassium chloride may be administered in saline (unless contraindicated) rather than in dextrose containing fluids, as a dextrose may lower serum potassium levels.

Prior to entering a vial, cleanse the rubber closure with a suitable antiseptic agent.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Marcaine

Marcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of MARCAINE should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. MARCAINE is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). In recommended doses, MARCAINE produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations. 0.25%#when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5%#provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential. 0.75%#produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. The duration of anesthesia with MARCAINE is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of MARCAINE up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case. These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. MARCAINE is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of MARCAINE, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of MARCAINE (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.)Use in Dentistry: The 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% MARCAINE with epinephrine). Injections should be made slowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE in dentistry is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use. This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of MARCAINE. Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local infiltration 0.25% (4) up to max up to max - Epidural 0.75% (2,4)0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 10-2010-2010-20 75-15050-10025-50 completemoderate to completepartial to moderate Caudal 0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 15-3015-30 75-15037.5-75 moderate to completemoderate Peripheral nerves 0.5% (4)0.25% (4) 5 to max5 to max 25 to max12.5 to max moderate to completemoderate to complete Retrobulbar (3) 0.75% (4) 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Dental (3) 0.5% w/ epi 1.8-3.6 per site 9-18 per site Epidural (3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi (10-15 micrograms epinephrine) (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Isuprel

Isuprel

ISUPREL injection 1:5000 should generally be started at the lowest recommended dose and the rate of administration gradually increased if necessary while carefully monitoring the patient. The usual route of administration is by intravenous infusion or bolus intravenous injection. In dire emergencies, the drug may be administered by intracardiac injection. If time is not of the utmost importance, initial therapy by intramuscular or subcutaneous injection is preferred.
Recommended dosage for adults with heart block, Adams-Stroke attacks, and cardiac arrest: Route of Administration Preparation of Dilution Initial Dose Subsequent Dose Range * Bolusintravenous injection Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg)to10 mL with Sodium ChlorideInjection, USP, or 5%Dextrose Injection, USP 0.02 mg to 0.06 mg(1 mL to 3 mL of diluted solution) 0.01 mg to 0.2 mg(0.5 mL to 10 mLof diluted solution) Intravenousinfusion Dilute 10 mL (2 mg) in 500 mLof 5% Dextrose Injection, USP 5 mcg/min(1.25 mL of diluted solutionper minute) Intramuscular Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted 0.2 mg (1 mL) 0.02 mg to 1 mg(0.1 mL to 5 mL) Subcutaneous Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted 0.2 mg (1 mL) 0.15 mg to 0.2 mg (0.75 to 1mL) Intracardiac Use Solution 1:5000 undiluted 0.02 mg (0.1 mL *Subsequent dosage and method of administration depend on the ventricular rate and the rapidity with which the cardiac pacemaker can take over when the drug is gradually withdrawn. There are no well-controlled studies in children to establish appropriate dosing; however, the American Heart Association recommends an initial infusion rate of 0.1 mcg/kg/min, with the usual range being 0.1 mcg/kg/min to 1 mcg/kg/min. Recommended dosage for adults with shock and hypoperfusion states: Route of Administration Preparation of Dilution† Infusion Rate †† Intravenous Infusion Dilute 5 mL (1mg) in 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP 0.5 mcg to 5 mcg per minute (0.25 mL to 2.5 mL of diluted solution) †Concentrations up to 10 times greater have been used when limitation of volume is essential. ††Rates over 30 mcg per minute have been used in advanced states of shock. The rate of infusion should be adjusted on the basis of heart rate, central venous pressure, systemic blood pressure, and urine flow. If the heard rate exceeds 110 beats per minute, it may be advisable to decrease or temporarily discontinue the infusion. Recommended dosage for adults with bronchospasm occurring during anesthesia: Routeof Administration Preparation of Dilution Initial Dose Subsequent Dose Bolus intravenousinjection Dilute 1 mL (0.2 mg) to 10 mL with Sodium Chloride Injection,USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP 0.01 mg to 0.02 mg (0.5 mL to 1 mLof diluted solution) The initial dose maybe repeated when necessary. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Such solution should not be used.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

Table I (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required only solutions containing epinephrine should be used, except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Lidocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (i.e., total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.Epidural Anesthesia For an epidural test dose, only the following available specific product of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USPby Hospira is recommended:1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................... 5 mL single-dose ampulsFor epidural anesthesia, only the following available specific products of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP byHospira are recommended:1% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................... 30 mL single-dose ampuls30 mL single-dose vials1.5% with epinephrine 1:200,000.................. 30 mL single-dose ampuls30 mL single-dose vials2% with epinephrine 1:200,000........................ 20 mL single-dose vialsAlthough these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block provided they are employed as single-dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2-3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: As a precaution against the adverse experiences sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2-3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine injection should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10-15 μg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta-blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.Maximum Recommended Dosages Adults: For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum dose of Lidocaine Hydrochloride and Epinephrine Injection, USP should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine, the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg per lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients andnon-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly five minutes between sides. (See also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).Pediatric Population: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for pediatric patients, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For pediatric patients over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75-100 mg (1.5-2 mg/lb). In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.FOR EPIDURAL USE ONLY.Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. Do not use the injection if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.
Table I Recommended Dosages of Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP for Various Anesthetic Procedures in Normal Healthy Adults Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP (without Epinephrine) Procedure Conc. (%) Vol.(mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration PercutaneousIntravenous Regional 5.5 or 1.00.5 1-6010-60 5-30050-300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, e.g. BrachialDentalIntercostalParavetebralPundendal (each side)Paracervical Obstetrical Analgesia (each side) 1.52.01.01.01.01.0 15-201-533-51010 225-30020-1003030-50100100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, e.g. Cervical (stellate ganglion)Lumbar 1.01.0 55-10 5050-100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic Lumbar Analgesia AnesthesiaCaudal Obstetrical Analgesia Surgical Anesthesia 1.01.01.52.01.01.5 20-3025-3015-2010-1520-3015-20 200-300250-300225-300200-300200-300225-300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/ dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. Sterilization, Storage and Technical Procedures: Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidence of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or 70% ethyl alcohol is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and, therefore, are not to be used. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the vial stopper or ampul thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use. Do not autoclave.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage:
Type of Infection Dose Frequency Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hrs. Mild infections caused by susceptible gram + cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hrs. Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hrs. Pneumococcal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hrs Sever, life-threatening infections (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)* 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hrs *In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of Cefazolin Injection, USP per day have been used Perioperative Prophylactic Use To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are: 1. 1 gram IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to start of surgery. 2. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). 3. 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively. It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery. Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Reduced Renal Function Cefazolin Injection, USP may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg % or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3.0 mg % can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg % should be given ½ the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg % or greater should be given ½ the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis: See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY. Pediatric Dosage In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin Injection, USP in these patients is not recommended. Pediatric Dosage Guide Weight 25 mg/kg/day divided into 3 doses 25 mg/kg/day dividedinto 4 doses Lbs Kg Approximate single dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed with dilution of 125 mg/mL Approximate single dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of125 mg/mL 10 4.5 40 mg 0.35 mL 30 mg 0.25 mL 20 9.0 75 mg 0.60 mL 55 mg 0.45 mL 30 13.6 115 mg 0.90 mL 85 mg 0.70 mL 40 18.1 150 mg 1.20 mL 115 mg 0.90 mL 50 22.7 190 mg 1.50 mL 140 mg 1.10 mL Weight 50 mg/kg/daydivided into 3 doses 50 mg/kg/day dividedinto 4 doses Lbs Kg Approximate single dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of 25 mg/mL Approximate single dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of 225 mg/mL 10 4.5 75 mg 0.35 mL 55 mg 0.25 mL 20 9.0 150 mg 0.70 mL 110 mg 0.50 mL 30 13.6 225 mg 1.00 mL 170 mg 0.75 mL 40 18.1 300 mg 1.35 mL 225 mg 1.00 mL 50 22.7 375 mg 1.70 mL 285 mg 1.25 mL In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose. RECONSTITUTIONPreparation of Parenteral Solution Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded. When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, Cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature of for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5 oC or 41 o F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency. Single dose Vial Form IM injection direct (bolus) injection of IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL. Vial Size Amount of diluent Approximateconcentration AppriximateAvailable volume 500 mg 2 mL 225 mg/mL 2.2 mL 1 gram 2.5 mL 330 mg/mL 3 mL Infusion bottles Reconstitute with 50 to 100 mL of Sodium chloride Injection or other IV solution listed under ADMINISTRATION. When adding diluent to vial, allow air to escape by using a small vent needle or by pumping the syringe. SHAKE WELL. Administer with primary IV fluids, as a single dose. ADMINISTRATIONIntramuscular Administration - Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with cefazolin. Intravenous Administration - Direct (bolus) injection: following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below). Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted cefazolin in 50 to 100 mL of one of the following solutions: Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP 5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Lactate Ringer's Injection, USP Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection Ringer's Injection, USP 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP
Marcaine

Marcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of MARCAINE should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. MARCAINE is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).In recommended doses, MARCAINE produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations. 0.25%#when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5%#provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential. 0.75%#produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.The duration of anesthesia with MARCAINE is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of MARCAINE up to225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case. These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. MARCAINE is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of MARCAINE, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of MARCAINE (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.)Use in Dentistry: The 0.5% concentration with epinephrine is recommended for infiltration and block injection in the maxillary and mandibular area when a longer duration of local anesthetic action is desired, such as for oral surgical procedures generally associated with significant postoperative pain. The average dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) per injection site will usually suffice; an occasional second dose of 1.8 mL (9 mg) may be used if necessary to produce adequate anesthesia after making allowance for 2 to 10 minutes onset time. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) The lowest effective dose should be employed and time should be allowed between injections; it is recommended that the total dose for all injection sites, spread out over a single dental sitting, should not ordinarily exceed 90 mg for a healthy adult patient (ten 1.8 mL injections of 0.5% MARCAINE with epinephrine). Injections should be madeslowly and with frequent aspirations. Until further experience is gained, MARCAINE in dentistry is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use. This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Marcaine Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local 0.25%(4) up to up to - Infiltration max. max Epidural 0.75%(2,4) 10-20 75-150 complete 0.5%(4) 10-20 50-100 moderate to complete 0.25%(4) 10-20 25-50 partial to moderate Caudal 0.5%(4) 15-30 75-150 moderate to complete 0.25%(4) 15-30 37.5-75 moderate Peripheral 0.5%(4) 5 to 25 to moderate nerves max. max. to compete 0.25%(4) 5 to 12.5 to moderate max max to complete Retrobulbar(3) 0.75%(4) 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Dental(3) 0.5% 1.8-3.6 9-18 - w/epi per site per site Epidural(3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi (10-15 micrograms epinephrine) (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage Type of Infection Dose Frequency Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hours Mild infections caused by susceptible gram-positive cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hours Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hours Pneumococcal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hours Severe, life-threatening infections (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)* 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hours *In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin per day have been used. Perioperative Prophylactic Use To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are: 1. 1 gram IV or IM administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. 2. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). 3. 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively. It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to the start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., openheart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery. Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Reduced Renal Function Cefazolin may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg % or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3 mg % can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg % should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg % or greater should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Pediatric Dosage In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of cefazolin in these patients is not recommended. Pediatric Dosage Guide Weight 25 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses 25 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg Approximate Single Dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL) needed with dilution of 125mg/mL Approximate Single Dosemg/q6h Fol. (mL) needed with dilution of 125 mg/mL 10 4.5 40 mg 0.35 mL 30 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 75 mg 0.6 mL 55 mg 0.45 mL 30 13.6 115 mg 0.9 mL 85 mg 0.7 mL 40 18.1 150 mg 1.2 mL 115 mg 0.9 mL 50 22.7 190 mg 1.5 mL 140 mg 1.1 mL Pediatric Dosage Guide Weight 50 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses 50 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg Approximate SingleDose mg/q8h Vol. (mL) needed with dilution of 225 mg/mL Approximate single Dose mg/q6h Vol. (mL) needed withdilution of 225 mg/mL 10 4.5 75 mb 0.35 mL 55 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 150 mg 0.7 mL 110 mg 0.5 mL 30 13.6 225 mg 1 mL 170 mg 0.75 mL 40 18.1 300 mg 1.35 mL 225 mg 1 mL 50 22.7 375 mg 1.7 mL 285 mg 1.25 mL In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose. RECONSTITUTION Preparation of Parenteral Solution Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded. When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin for injection USP is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency. Single-Dose Vials For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL. Vial Size Amount of Diluent Approximate Concentration ApproximateAvailable Volume 500 mg 2 mL 225 mg/mL 2.2 mL 1 gram 2.5 mL 330 mg/mL 3 mL ADMINISTRATION Intramuscular Administration Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin for injection USP should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with cefazolin for injection USP. Intravenous AdministrationDirect (bolus) injection Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below). Intermittent or continuous infusion Dilute reconstituted cefazolin for injection USP in 50 to 100 mL of one of the following solutions: Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP 5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection Ringer's Injection, USP 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

The addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP to intravenous infusion is not recommended due to lack of solubility and resultant precipitation. Not to exceed 50 mg per minute, intravenously in adults, and not exceeding 1 - 3 mg/kg/min in neonates. There is a relatively small margin between full therapeutic effect and minimally toxic doses of this drug. The solution is suitable for use as long as it remains free of haziness and precipitate. Upon refrigeration or freezing, a precipitate might form; this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. Only a clear solution should be used. A faint yellow coloration may develop; however, this has no effect on the potency of the solution. In the treatment of status epilepticus, the intravenous route is preferred because of the delay in absorption of phenytoin when administered intramuscularly. Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form. Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Status Epilepticus In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70 kg patient). The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6-8 hours. Recent work in neonates and pediatric patients has shown that absorption of phenytoin is unreliable after oral administration, but a loading dose of 15 - 20 mg/kg of phenytoin intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within thegenerally accepted therapeutic range (10 - 20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1 - 3 mg/kg/min. Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should be injected slowly and directly into a large vein through a large-gauge needle or intravenous catheter. Each injection of intravenous phenytoin should be followed by an injection of sterile saline through the same needle or catheter to avoid local venous irritation due to alkalinity of the solution. Continuous infusion should be avoided; the addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP to intravenous infusion fluids is not recommended because of the likelihood of precipitation. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression. Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage. Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous shortacting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of phenytoin. If administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia, and other appropriate measures should be considered. Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Neurosurgery Prophylactic dosage 100 to 200 mg (2 to 4 mL) intramuscularly at approximately 4-hour intervals during surgery and continued during the postoperative period. When intramuscular administration is required for a patient previously stabilized orally, compensating dosage adjustments are necessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites. If the patient requires more than a week of IM phenytoin, alternative routes should be explored, such as gastric intubation. For time periods less than one week, the patient shifted back from IM administration should receive one half the original oral dose for the same period of time the patient received IM phenytoin. Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of one to two 50 mL vials (44.6 to 100 mEq) may be given initially and continued at a rate of 50 mL (44.6 to 50 mEq) every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), the 4.2% solution is recommended for intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day. Slow administration rates and the 4.2% solution are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight - depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/L at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Glycopyrrolate

Glycopyrrolate

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS)

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Glycopyrrolate Injection may be administered intramuscularly, or intravenously, without dilution, in the following indications.

Adults

PREANESTHETIC MEDICATION

The recommended dose of Glycopyrrolate Injection is 0.004 mg/kg by intramuscular injection, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered.

INTRAOPERATIVE MEDICATION

Glycopyrrolate Injection may be used during surgery to counteract drug-induced or bagal reflexes and their associated arrhythmias (e.g., bradycardia). It should be administered intravenously as single doses of 0.1 mg and repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulation necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

REVERSAL OF NEUROMUSCULAR BLOCKADE

The recommended dose of Glycopyrrolate Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe.
PEPTIC ULCER The usual recommended dose of Glycopyrrolate Injection is 0.1 mg administered at 4-hour intervals, 3 or 4 times daily intravenously or intramuscularly. Where more profound effect is required, 0.2 mg may be given. Some patients may need only a single dose, and frequency of administration should be dictated by patient response up to a maximum of four times daily. Glycopyrrolate Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS-Pediactric Use). Pediatric Patients (see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use) PREANESTHETIC MEDICATION The recommended dose of Glycopyrrolate Injection in pediatric patients is 0.004 mg/kg intramuscularly, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered. INFANTS (1 month to 2 years of age) may require up to 0.009 mg/kg. INTRAOPERATIVE MEDICATION Because of the long duration of action of Glycopyrrolate Injection if used as preanesthetic medication, additional Glycopyrrolate Injection for anticholinergic effect intraoperatively is rarely needed; in the even it is required the recommended pediatric dose is 0.004 mg/kg intravenously, not to exceed 0.1 mg in a single dose which may be repeated as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed. REVERSAL OF NEUROMUSCULAR BLOCKADE The recommended pediatric dose of Glycopyrrolate Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine of 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe. PEPTIC ULCER Glycopyrrolate Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use) Diluent Compatibilities Dextrose 5% and 10% in water, or saline, dextrose 5% in sodium chloride 0.45%, sodium chloride 0.9%, and Ringer's Injection. Diluent Incompatibilities Lacted Ringer's solution Admixture Compatibilities PHYSICAL COMPATIBILITY This list does not constitute an endorsement of the clinical utility or safety of co-administration of glycopyrrolate with these drugs. Glycopyrrolate Injection is compatible for mixing and injection with the following injectable dosage forms: atropine sulfate, USP; Antilirium (physostigmine salicylate); Benadryl (diphenhydramine HCI); codeine phosphate, USP; Emete-Con (benz-quinamide HCI);hydromorphone HCI, USP; Inapsine (droperidol); Levo-Dromoran (levorphanol tartrate); lidocaine, USP; meperidine HCI, USP; Mestinon/Regonol (pyridostigmine bromide); morphine sulfate, USP; Nubaine (nalbuphine HCI); Numorphan (oxymorphone HCI); procaine HCI, Usp; promethazine HCI, USP; Prostigmin (neostigmine methylsulfate, USP); scopolamine HBr, USP; Stadol (butorphanol tartrate); Sublimaze (fentanyl citrate); Tigan (trimethobenzamide HCI); and Vistaril (hydroxyzine HCI). Glycopyrrolate Injection may be administeered via the tubing of a running infusion of normal saline. Admixture Incompatibilities PHYSICAL INCOMPATIBILITY Since the stability of glycopyrrolate is questionable above a pH of 6.0 do not combine Glycopyrrolate Injection in the same syringe with Brevital (methohexital Na); Chloromycetin (chloramphenicol Na succinate); Dramamine (dimenhydrinate); Nembutal (pentobarbital Na); Pentothal (thiopental Na); Seconal (secobarbital Na); sodium bicarbonate (Abbott); Valium (diazepam); Decadron (dexamethasone Na phosphate); or Talwin (pentazocine lactate). These mixtures with result in a pH higher than 6.0 and may result in gas production or precipitation.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of one to two 50 mL syringes (44.6 to 100 mEq) may be given initially and continued at a rate of 50 mL (44.6 to 50 mEq) every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary (as indicated by arterial pH and blood gas monitoring) to reverse the acidosis. Caution should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), the 4.2% solution is recommended for intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day. Slow administration rates at the 4.2% solution are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-to-eight-hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight - depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. In metabolic acidosis associated with shock, therapy should be monitored by measuring blood gases, plasma osmolarity, arterial blood lactate, hemodynamics and cardiac rhythm. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acid-base status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Doxycycline

Doxycycline

Note: Rapid administration is to be avoided. Parenteral therapy is indicated only when oral therapy is not indicated. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. If intravenous therapy is given over prolonged periods of time, thrombophlebitis may result. THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF INTRAVENOUS DOXYCYCLINE (100 TO 200 MG/DAY) DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES (1 TO 2 G/DAY). EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS. Studies to date have indicated that doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of the antibiotic in patients with renal impairment.

Adults The usual dosage of intravenous doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment administered in one or two infusions. Subsequent daily dosage is 100 to 200 mg depending upon the severity of infection, with 200 mg administered in one or two infusions. In the treatment of primary and secondary syphilis, the recommended dosage is 300 mg daily for at least 10 days.In the treatment of inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) the recommended dose is 100 mg of doxycycline, twice a day. Parenteral therapy is only indicated when oral therapy is not indicated and should not be continued over a prolonged period of time. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. Therapy must continue for a total of 60 days.

For Children Above Eight Years of Age The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight on the first day of treatment, administered in one or two infusions. Subsequent daily dosage is 1 to 2 mg/lb of body weight given as one or two infusions, depending on the severity of the infection. For children over 100 pounds the usual adult dose should be used. (See WARNINGS: Pediatric Use). In the treatment of inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) the recommended dose is 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, twice a day in the children weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg). Parenteral therapy is only indicated when oral therapy is not indicated and should not be continued over a prolonged period of time. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. Therapy must continue for a total of 60 days.

General The duration of infusion may vary with the dose (100 to 200 mg per day), but is usually one to four hours. A recommended minimum infusion time for 100 mg of a 0.5 mg/mL solution is one hour. Therapy should be continued for at least 24 to 48 hours after symptoms and fever have subsided. The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage. Intravenous solutions should not be injected intramuscularly or subcutaneously. Caution should be taken to avoid the inadvertent introduction of the intravenous solution into the adjacent soft tissue.

Preparation of Solution To prepare a solution containing 10 mg/mL, the contents of the vial should be reconstituted with 10 mL of Sterile Water for Injection, or any of the ten intravenous infusion solutions listed below. Each 100 mg of doxycycline (i.e., withdraw entire solution from the 100 mg vial) is further diluted with 100 to 1000 mL of the intravenous solutions listed below:

1. 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection2. 5% Dextrose Injection3. Ringer's Injection4. Invert Sugar, 10% in Water5. Lactated Ringer's Injection6. Dextrose 5% in Lactated Ringer's7. Normosol-M® in D5-W (Abbott)8. Normosol-R® in D5-W (Abbott)9. Plasma-Lyte® 56 in 5% Dextrose (Travenol)10. Plasma-Lyte® 148 in 5% Dextrose (Travenol)

This will result in desired concentrations of 0.1 to 1 mg/mL. Concentrations lower than 0.1 mg/mL or higher than 1 mg/mL are not recommended.

Stability Doxycycline is stable for 48 hours in solution when diluted with Sodium Chloride Injection, or 5% Dextrose Injection, to concentrations between 1 mg/mL and 0.1 mg/mL and stored at 25°C. Doxycycline in these solutions is stable under fluorescent light for 48 hours, but must be protected from direct sunlight during storage and infusion. Reconstituted solutions (1 to 0.1 mg/mL) may be stored up to 72 hours prior to start of infusion if refrigerated and protected from sunlight and artificial light. Infusion must then be completed within 12 hours. Solutions must be used within these time periods or discarded. Doxycycline, when diluted with Ringer's Injection, or Invert Sugar, 10% in Water, or Normosol-M® in D5-W (Abbott), or Normosol- R® in D5-W (Abbott), or Plasma-Lyte® 56 in 5% Dextrose (Travenol), or Plasma-Lyte® 148 in 5% Dextrose (Travenol) to a concentration between 1 mg/mL and 0.1 mg/mL, must be completely infused within 12 hours after reconstitution to ensure adequate stability. During infusion, the solution must be protected from direct sunlight. Reconstituted solutions (1 to 0.1 mg/mL) may be stored up to 72 hours prior to start of infusion, if refrigerated and protected from sunlight and artificial light. Infusion must then be completed within 12 hours. Solutions must be used within these time periods or discarded. When diluted with Lactated Ringer's Injection, or Dextrose 5% in Lactated Ringer's, infusion of the solution (ca. 1 mg/mL) or lower concentrations (not less than 0.1 mg/mL) must be completed within six hours after reconstitution to ensure adequate stability. During infusion, the solution must be protected from direct sunlight. Solutions must be used within this time period or discarded. Solutions of doxycycline hyclate at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in Sterile Water for Injection, when frozen immediately after reconstitution are stable for 8 weeks when stored at –20°C. If the product is warmed, care should be taken to avoid heating it after the thawing is complete. Once thawed the solution should not be refrozen. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and 0.9% sodium chloride solutions. If flumazenil is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.
Reversal of Conscious Sedation Adult Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described

(not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).
Pediatric Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.
Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).
Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients
For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.
Safety and Handling
Flumazenil is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and 0.9% sodium chloride solutions. If flumazenil is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.
Reversal of Conscious Sedation Adult Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described

(not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).
Pediatric Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.
Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients
For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).
Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients
For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.
Safety and Handling
Flumazenil is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP is administered by the intravenous route.

In cardiac arrest, a rapid intravenous dose of 200 to 300 mEq of bicarbonate, given as a 7.5% or 8.4% solution is suggested for adults. Cautions should be observed in emergencies where very rapid infusion of large quantities of bicarbonate is indicated. Bicarbonate solutions are hypertonic and may produce an undesirable rise in plasma sodium concentration in the process of correcting the metabolic acidosis. In cardiac arrest, however, the risks from acidosis exceed those of hypernatremia.

In infants (up to two years of age), intravenous administration at a dose not to exceed 8 mEq/kg/day is recommended. Slow administration rates and a solution diluted to 4.2% are recommended in neonates, to guard against the possibility of producing hypernatremia, decreasing cerebrospinal fluid pressure and inducing intracranial hemorrhage.

In less urgent forms of metabolic acidosis, Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP may be added to other intravenous fluids. The amount of bicarbonate to be given to older children and adults over a four-toeight- hour period is approximately 2 to 5 mEq/kg of body weight — depending upon the severity of the acidosis as judged by the lowering of total CO2 content, blood pH and clinical condition of the patient. Bicarbonate therapy should always be planned in a stepwise fashion since the degree of response from a given dose is not precisely predictable. Initially an infusion of 2 to 5 mEq/kg body weight over a period of 4 to 8 hours will produce a measurable improvement in the abnormal acidbase status of the blood. The next step of therapy is dependent upon the clinical response of the patient. If severe symptoms have abated, then the frequency of administration and the size of the dose may be reduced.

In general, it is unwise to attempt full correction of a low total CO2 content during the first 24 hours of therapy, since this may be accompanied by an unrecognized alkalosis because of a delay in the readjustment of ventilation to normal. Owing to this lag, the achievement of total CO2 content of about 20 mEq/liter at the end of the first day of therapy will usually be associated with a normal blood pH. Further modification of the acidosis to completely normal values usually occurs in the presence of normal kidney function when and if the cause of the acidosis can be controlled. Values for total CO2 which are brought to normal or above normal within the first day of therapy are very likely to be associated with grossly alkaline values for blood pH, with ensuing undesired side effects.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

Do not use unless solution is clear and the container or seal is intact. Discard unused portion.
Nalbuphine Hydrochlorid...

Nalbuphine Hydrochloride

The usual recommended adult dose is 10 mg for a 70 kg individual administered subcutaneously, intramuscularly, or intravenously; this dose may be repeated every 3 to 6 hours as necessary. Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain, physical status of the patient, and other medications which the patient may be receiving (see Interaction With Other Central Nervous System Depressants under WARNINGS). In nontolerant individuals, the recommended single maximum dose is 20 mg with a maximum total daily dose of 160 mg. The use of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection as a supplement to balanced anesthesia requires larger doses than those recommended for analgesia. Induction doses of nalbuphine hydrochloride range from 0.3 mg/kg to 3 mg/kg intravenously to be administered over a 10 to 15 minute period with maintenance doses of 0.25 to 0.5 mg/kg in single intravenous administrations as required. The useof nalbuphine hydrochloride injection may be followed by respiratory depression which can be reversed with the opioid antagonist naloxone hydrochloride.Patients Dependent on Opioids: Patients who have been taking opioids chronically may experience withdrawal symptoms upon the administration of nalbuphine hydrochloride injection. If unduly troublesome, opioid withdrawal symptoms can be controlled by the slow intravenous administration of small increments of morphine, until relief occurs. If the previous analgesic wasmorphine, meperidine, codeine, or other opioid with similar duration of activity, one-fourth of the anticipated dose of nalbuphine hydrochloride can be administered initially and the patient observed for signs of withdrawal, i.e., abdominal cramps, nausea and vomiting, lacrimation, rhinorrhea, anxiety, restlessness, elevation of temperature or piloerection. If untoward symptoms do notoccur, progressively larger doses may be tried at appropriate intervals until the desired level of analgesia is obtained with nalbuphine hydrochloride. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Esmolol

Esmolol

Dosing Information:

SUPRAVENTRICULAR TACHYCARDIADosage needs to be titrated, using ventricular rate as the guide.An initial loading dose of 0.5 milligrams/kg (500 micrograms/kg) infused over a minute duration followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.05 milligrams/kg/min (50 micrograms/kg/min) for the next 4 minutes is recommended. This should give a rough guide with respect to the responsiveness of ventricular rate. After the 4 minutes of initial maintenance infusion (total treatment duration being 5 minutes), depending upon the desired ventricular response, the maintenance infusion may be continued at 0.05 mg/kg/min or increased step-wise (e.g. 0.1 mg/kg/min, 0.15 mg/kg/min to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min) with each step being maintained for 4 or more minutes. If more rapid slowing of ventricular response is imperative, the 0.5 mg/kg loading dose infused over a 1 minute period may be repeated, followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.1 mg/kg/min for 4 minutes. Then, depending upon ventricular rate, another (and final) loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg/min infused over a 1 minute period may be administered followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.15 mg/kg/min. If needed, after 4 minutes of the 0.15 mg/kg/min maintenance infusion, the maintenance infusion may be increased to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min. In the absence of loading doses, constant infusion of a single concentration of esmolol reaches pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic steady-state in about 30 minutes. Maintenance infusions (with or without loading doses) may be continued for as long as 24 hours. The following table summarizes the above and assumes that 3 loading doses (the maximum recommended) are infused over 1 minute and incremental maintenance doses are required after each loading dose. There should be no 4th loading dose, but the maintenance dose may be incremented one more time.
Elapsed Time Loading dose (over 1 minute) Maintenance Dose (over 4 minutes) (minutes) Micrograms/kg/min Milligrams/kg/min micrograms/kg/min Milligrams kg/min 0-1 500 0.5 1-5 50 0.05 5-6 500 0.5 6-10 100 0.1 10-11 500 0.5 11-15 150 0.15 15-16 16-20 *200 *0.2 more than 20 Maintenance dose titrated to heart rate or other clinical endpoing.

*As the desired heart rate or endpoint is approached, the loading infusion may be omitted and the maintenance infusion titrated to 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) or downward as appropriate. Maintenance dosages above 200 mcg/kg/min (0.2 mg/kg/min) have not been shown to have significantly increased benefits. The interval between titration steps may be increased. In the treatment of supraventricular tachycardia, responses to esmolol hydrochloride usually (over 95%) occur within the range of 50 to 200 micrograms/kg/min (0.05 to 0.2 milligrams/kg/min). The average effective dosage is approximately 100 micrograms/kg/ min (0.1 milligrams/kg/min) although dosages as low as 25 micrograms/kg/min (0.025 milligrams/kg/min) have been adequate in some patients. Dosages as high as 300 micrograms/kg/min (0.3 milligrams/kg/min) have been used, but these provide little added effect and increase the rate of adverse effects, so doses greater than 200 micrograms/kg/min are not recommended. Dosage of esmolol hydrochloride in supraventricular tachycardia must be individualized by titration in which each step consists of a loading dosage followed by a maintenance dosage. This specific dosage regimen has not been studied intraoperatively and, because of the time required for titration, may not be optimal for intraoperative use. The safety of dosages above 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) has not been studied. In the event of an adverse reaction, the dosage of esmolol hydrochloride may be reduced or discontinued. If a local infusion site reaction develops, an alternate infusion site should be used and caution should be taken to prevent extravasation. The use of butterfly needles should be avoided. Abrupt cessation of esmolol hydrochloride in patients has not been reported to produce the withdrawal effects which may occur with abrupt withdrawal of beta blockers following chronic use in coronary artery disease (CAD) patients. However, caution should still be used in abruptly discontinuing infusions of esmolol hydrochloride in CAD patients. After achieving an adequate control of the heart rate and a stable clinical status in patients with supraventricular tachycardia, transition to alternative antiarrhythmic agents such as propranolol, digoxin, or verapamil, may be accomplished. A recommended guideline for such a transition is given below but the physician should carefully consider the labeling instructions for the alternative agent selected. Alternative Agent Dosage Propranolol hydrochloride 10-20 mg q 4-6 hrs Digoxin 0.125-0.5 mg q 6 hrs (p.o. or i.v.) Verapamil 80 mg q 6 hrs The dosage of esmolol hydrochloride should be reduced as follows: 1. Thirty minutes following the first dose of the alternative agent, reduce the infusion rate of esmolol hydrochloride by one-half (50%). 2. Following the second dose of the alternative agent, monitor the patient’s response and if satisfactory control is maintained for the first hour, discontinue esmolol hydrochloride. The use of infusions of esmolol hydrochloride up to 24 hours has been well documented; in addition, limited data from 24-48 hrs (N=48) indicate that esmolol hydrochloride is well tolerated up to 48 hours. INTRAOPERATIVE AND POSTOPERATIVE TACHYCARDIA AND/OR HYPERTENSION In the intraoperative and postoperative settings it is not always advisable to slowly titrate the dose of esmolol hydrochloride to a therapeutic effect. Therefore, two dosing options are presented: immediate control dosing and a gradual control when the physician has time to titrate. 1. Immediate Control For intraoperative treatment of tachycardia and/or hypertension give an 80 mg (approximately 1 mg/kg) bolus dose over 30 seconds followed by a 150 mcg/kg/min infusion, if necessary. Adjust the infusion rate as required up to 300 mcg/kg/min to maintain desired heart rate and/or blood pressure. 2. Gradual Control For postoperative tachycardia and hypertension, the dosing schedule is the same as that used in supraventricular tachycardia. To initiate treatment, administer a loading dosage infusion of 500 mcg/kg/min of esmolol hydrochloride for one minute followed by a four-minute maintenance infusion of 50 mcg/kg/min. If an adequate therapeutic effect is not observed within five minutes, repeat the same loading dosage and follow with a maintenance infusion increased to 100 mcg/kg/min (see above SUPRAVENTRICULAR TACHYCARDIA). Notes: 1. Higher dosages (250-300 mcg/kg/min) may be required for adequate control of blood pressure than those required for the treatment of atrial fibrillation, flutter and sinus tachycardia. One third of the postoperative hypertensive patients required these higher doses. 2. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Directions for Use of the 10 mL Ready-to-use Vial (10 milligrams/mL) This dosage form is prediluted to provide a ready-to-use, iso-osmotic solution of 10 mg/mL esmolol hydrochloride in sodium chloride recommended for esmolol hydrochloride intravenous administration. It may be used to administer the appropriate esmolol hydrochloride loading dosage infusions by hand-held syringe while the maintenance infusion is being prepared. The 10 mL Ready-to-use Vial esmolol hydrochloride at a concentration of 10 milligrams/mL. When using a 10 milligrams/mL concentration, a loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg infused over 1 minute period of time, for a 70 kg patient is 3.5 mL. Compatibility with Commonly Used Intravenous Fluids Esmolol hydrochloride was tested for compatibility with ten commonly used intravenous fluids at a final concentration of 10 mg Esmolol Hydrochloride per mL. Esmolol hydrochloride was found to be compatible with the following solutions and was stable for at least 24 hours at controlled room temperature or under refrigeration: • Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP • Dextrose (5%) in Lactated Ringer’s Injection • Dextrose (5%) in Ringer’s Injection • Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP • Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP • Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP • Potassium Chloride (40 mEq/liter) in Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP • Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP • Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP Esmolol hydrochloride is NOT compatible with Sodium Bicarbonate (5%) Injection, USP.
Diprivan

Diprivan

Propofol blood concentrations at steady-state are generally proportional to infusion rates, especially in individual patients. Undesirable effects such as cardiorespiratory depression are likely to occur at higher blood concentrations which result from bolus dosing or rapid increases in the infusion rate. An adequate interval (3 to 5 minutes) must be allowed between dose adjustments to allow for and assess the clinical effects.

Shake well before use. Do not use if there is evidence of excessive creaming or aggregation, if large droplets are visible, or if there are other forms of phase separation indicating that the stability of the product has been compromised. Slight creaming, which should disappear after shaking, may be visible upon prolonged standing.

When administering DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion by infusion, syringe or volumetric pumps are recommended to provide controlled infusion rates. When infusing DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion to patients undergoing magnetic resonance imaging, metered control devices may be utilized if mechanical pumps are impractical.

Changes in vital signs indicating a stress response to surgical stimulation or the emergence from anesthesia may be controlled by the administration of 25 mg (2.5 mL) to 50 mg (5 mL) incremental boluses and/or by increasing the infusion rate of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion.

For minor surgical procedures (e.g., body surface) nitrous oxide (60% to 70%) can be combined with a variable rate DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion infusion to provide satisfactory anesthesia. With more stimulating surgical procedures (e.g., intra-abdominal), or if supplementation with nitrous oxide is not provided, administration rate(s) of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion and/or opioids should be increased in order to provide adequate anesthesia.

Infusion rates should always be titrated downward in the absence of clinical signs of light anesthesia until a mild response to surgical stimulation is obtained in order to avoid administration of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion at rates higher than are clinically necessary. Generally, rates of 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min in adults should be achieved during maintenance in order to optimize recovery times.

Other drugs that cause CNS depression (hypnotics/sedatives, inhalational anesthetics, and opioids) can increase CNS depression induced by propofol. Morphine premedication (0.15 mg/kg) with nitrous oxide 67% in oxygen has been shown to decrease the necessary propofol injection maintenance infusion rate and therapeutic blood concentrations when compared to non-narcotic (lorazepam) premedication.
Induction of General Anesthesia
Adult Patients

Most adult patients under 55 years of age and classified as ASA-PS I or II require 2 to 2.5 mg/kg of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion for induction when unpremedicated or when premedicated with oral benzodiazepines or intramuscular opioids. For induction, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be titrated (approximately 40 mg every 10 seconds) against the response of the patient until the clinical signs show the onset of anesthesia. As with other sedative-hypnotic agents, the amount of intravenous opioid and/or benzodiazepine premedication will influence the response of the patient to an induction dose of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion.

Elderly, Debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients

It is important to be familiar and experienced with the intravenous use of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion before treating elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients. Due to the reduced clearance and higher blood concentrations, most of these patients require approximately 1 to 1.5 mg/kg (approximately 20 mg every 10 seconds) of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion for induction of anesthesia according to their condition and responses. A rapid bolus should not be used, as this will increase the likelihood of undesirable cardiorespiratory depression including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and/or oxygen desaturation (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Pediatric Patients

Most patients aged 3 years through 16 years and classified ASA-PS I or II require 2.5 to 3.5 mg/kg of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion for induction when unpremedicated or when lightly premedicated with oral benzodiazepines or intramuscular opioids. Within this dosage range, younger pediatric patients may require higher induction doses than older pediatric patients. As with other sedative‑hypnotic agents, the amount of intravenous opioid and/or benzodiazepine premedication will influence the response of the patient to an induction dose of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion. A lower dosage is recommended for pediatric patients classified as ASA-PS III or IV. Attention should be paid to minimize pain on injection when administering DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion to pediatric patients. Boluses of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion may be administered via small veins if pretreated with lidocaine or via antecubital or larger veins (see PRECAUTIONS, General).

Neurosurgical Patients

Slower induction is recommended using boluses of 20 mg every 10 seconds. Slower boluses or infusions of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion for induction of anesthesia, titrated to clinical responses, will generally result in reduced induction dosage requirements (1 to 2 mg/kg) (see PRECAUTIONS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Cardiac Anesthesia

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion has been well‑studied in patients with coronary artery disease, but experience in patients with hemodynamically significant valvular or congenital heart disease is limited. As with other anesthetic and sedative-hypnotic agents, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion in healthy patients causes a decrease in blood pressure that is secondary to decreases in preload (ventricular filling volume at the end of the diastole) and afterload (arterial resistance at the beginning of the systole). The magnitude of these changes is proportional to the blood and effect site concentrations achieved. These concentrations depend upon the dose and speed of the induction and maintenance infusion rates.

In addition, lower heart rates are observed during maintenance with DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion, possibly due to reduction of the sympathetic activity and/or resetting of the baroreceptor reflexes. Therefore, anticholinergic agents should be administered when increases in vagal tone are anticipated.

As with other anesthetic agents, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion reduces myocardial oxygen consumption. Further studies are needed to confirm and delineate the extent of these effects on the myocardium and the coronary vascular system.

Morphine premedication (0.15 mg/kg) with nitrous oxide 67% in oxygen has been shown to decrease the necessary DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion maintenance infusion rates and therapeutic blood concentrations when compared to non‑narcotic (lorazepam) premedication. The rate of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion administration should be determined based on the patient's premedication and adjusted according to clinical responses.

A rapid bolus induction should be avoided. A slow rate of approximately 20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (0.5 to 1.5 mg/kg) should be used. In order to assure adequate anesthesia, when DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is used as the primary agent, maintenance infusion rates should not be less than 100 mcg/kg/min and should be supplemented with analgesic levels of continuous opioid administration. When an opioid is used as the primary agent, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion maintenance rates should not be less than 50 mcg/kg/min, and care should be taken to ensure amnesia. Higher doses of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion will reduce the opioid requirements (see Table 4). When DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is used as the primary anesthetic, it should not be administered with the high-dose opioid technique as this may increase the likelihood of hypotension (seePRECAUTIONS, Cardiac Anesthesia).

Table 4. Cardiac Anesthesia Techniques
Primary Agent Rate Secondary Agent/Rate(Following Induction with Primary Agent) DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion OPIOIDa /0.05 to 0.075 mcg/kg/min (no bolus) PreindunctionAnxiolysis 25 mcg/kg/min Induction 0.5 to 1.5 mg/kgover 60 sec Maintenance(Titrated to ClinicalResponse) 100 to 150 mcg/kg/min OPIOIDb DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion/50 to 100 mcg/kg/min(no bolus) Induction 25 to 50 mcg/kg Maintenance 0.2 to 0.3 mcg/kg/min
OPIOIDa is defined in terms of fentanyl equivalents, i.e.,

1mcg of fentanyl = 5 mcg of alfentanil (for bolus)

                         = 10 mcg of alfentanil (for maintenance)

                         or

                         = 0.1 mcg of sufentanil

bCare should be taken to ensure amnesia.
Maintenance of General Anesthesia
Adult Patients

In adults, anesthesia can be maintained by administering DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion by infusion or intermittent IV bolus injection. The patient's clinical response will determine the infusion rate or the amount and frequency of incremental injections.

Continuous Infusion

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion 100 to 200 mcg/kg/min administered in a variable rate infusion with 60% to 70% nitrous oxide and oxygen provides anesthesia for patients undergoing general surgery. Maintenance by infusion of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should immediately follow the induction dose in order to provide satisfactory or continuous anesthesia during the induction phase. During this initial period following the induction dose, higher rates of infusion are generally required (150 to 200 mcg/kg/min) for the first 10 to 15 minutes. Infusion rates should subsequently be decreased 30% to 50% during the first half-hour of maintenance. Generally, rates of 50 to 100 mcg/kg/min in adults should be achieved during maintenance in order to optimize recovery times.

Other drugs that cause CNS depression (hypnotics/sedatives, inhalational anesthetics, and opioids) can increase the CNS depression induced by propofol.

Intermittent Bolus

Increments of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion 25 mg (2.5 mL) to 50 mg (5 mL) may be administered with nitrous oxide in adult patients undergoing general surgery. The incremental boluses should be administered when changes in vital signs indicate a response to surgical stimulation or light anesthesia.

Pediatric Patients

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion administered as a variable rate infusion supplemented with nitrous oxide 60% to 70% provides satisfactory anesthesia for most children 2 months of age or older, ASA-PS I or II, undergoing general anesthesia.

In general, for the pediatric population, maintenance by infusion of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion at a rate of 200 to 300 mcg/kg/min should immediately follow the induction dose. Following the first half-hour of maintenance, infusion rates of 125 to 150 mcg/kg/min are typically needed. DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be titrated to achieve the desired clinical effect. Younger pediatric patients may require higher maintenance infusion rates than older pediatric patients. (See Table 2 Clinical Trials.)

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion has been used with a variety of agents commonly used in anesthesia such as atropine, scopolamine, glycopyrrolate, diazepam, depolarizing and nondepolarizing muscle relaxants, and opioid analgesics, as well as with inhalational and regional anesthetic agents.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid bolus doses should not be used, as this will increase cardiorespiratory effects including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and oxygen desaturation.
Monitored Anesthesia Care (MAC) Sedation
Adult Patients

When DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is administered for MAC sedation, rates of administration should be individualized and titrated to clinical response. In most patients, the rates of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion administration will be in the range of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min.

During initiation of MAC sedation, slow infusion or slow injection techniques are preferable over rapid bolus administration. During maintenance of MAC sedation, a variable rate infusion is preferable over intermittent bolus dose administration. In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation (see WARNINGS). A rapid bolus injection can result in undesirable cardiorespiratory depression including hypotension, apnea, airway obstruction, and oxygen desaturation.

Initiation of MAC Sedation

For initiation of MAC sedation, either an infusion or a slow injection method may be utilized while closely monitoring cardiorespiratory function. With the infusion method, sedation may be initiated by infusing DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion at 100 to 150 mcg/kg/min (6 to 9 mg/kg/h) for a period of 3 to 5 minutes and titrating to the desired clinical effect while closely monitoring respiratory function. With the slow injection method for initiation, patients will require approximately 0.5 mg/kg administered over 3 to 5 minutes and titrated to clinical responses. When DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is administered slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, most patients will be adequately sedated, and the peak drug effect can be achieved while minimizing undesirable cardiorespiratory effects occurring at high plasma levels.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation (see WARNINGS). The rate of administration should be over 3 to 5 minutes and the dosage of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be reduced to approximately 80% of the usual adult dosage in these patients according to their condition, responses, and changes in vital signs (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Maintenance of MAC Sedation

For maintenance of sedation, a variable rate infusion method is preferable over an intermittent bolus dose method. With the variable rate infusion method, patients will generally require maintenance rates of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min (1.5 to 4.5 mg/kg/h) during the first 10 to 15 minutes of sedation maintenance. Infusion rates should subsequently be decreased over time to 25 to 50 mcg/kg/min and adjusted to clinical responses. In titrating to clinical effect, allow approximately 2 minutes for onset of peak drug effect.

Infusion rates should always be titrated downward in the absence of clinical signs of light sedation until mild responses to stimulation are obtained in order to avoid sedative administration of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion at rates higher than are clinically necessary.

If the intermittent bolus dose method is used, increments of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion 10 mg (1 mL) or 20 mg (2 mL) can be administered and titrated to desired clinical effect. With the intermittent bolus method of sedation maintenance, there is increased potential for respiratory depression, transient increases in sedation depth, and prolongation of recovery.

In the elderly, debilitated, or ASA-PS III or IV patients, rapid (single or repeated) bolus dose administration should not be used for MAC sedation (see WARNINGS). The rate of administration and the dosage of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be reduced to approximately 80% of the usual adult dosage in these patients according to their condition, responses, and changes in vital signs (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion can be administered as the sole agent for maintenance of MAC sedation during surgical/diagnostic procedures. When DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion sedation is supplemented with opioid and/or benzodiazepine medications, these agents increase the sedative and respiratory effects of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion and may also result in a slower recovery profile (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).
ICU Sedation
(See WARNINGS andDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Handling Procedures)

Abrupt discontinuation of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion prior to weaning or for daily evaluation of sedation levels should be avoided. This may result in rapid awakening with associated anxiety, agitation, and resistance to mechanical ventilation. Infusions of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be adjusted to assure a minimal level of sedation is maintained throughout the weaning process and when assessing the level of sedation (see PRECAUTIONS).

Adult Patients

For intubated, mechanically ventilated adult patients, Intensive Care Unit (ICU) sedation should be initiated slowly with a continuous infusion in order to titrate to desired clinical effect and minimize hypotension (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Most adult ICU patients recovering from the effects of general anesthesia or deep sedation will require maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) individualized and titrated to clinical response (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). With medical ICU patients or patients who have recovered from the effects of general anesthesia or deep sedation, the rate of administration of 50 mcg/kg/min or higher may be required to achieve adequate sedation. These higher rates of administration may increase the likelihood of patients developing hypotension. Administration should not exceed 4 mg/kg/hour unless the benefits outweigh the risks (see WARNINGS).

Dosage and rate of administration should be individualized and titrated to the desired effect, according to clinically relevant factors including the patient’s underlying medical problems, preinduction and concomitant medications, age, ASA-PS classification, and level of debilitation of the patient. The elderly, debilitated, and ASA-PS III or IV patients may have exaggerated hemodynamic and respiratory responses to rapid bolus doses (see WARNINGS).

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be individualized according to the patient's condition and response, blood lipid profile, and vital signs (see PRECAUTIONS, Intensive Care Unit Sedation). For intubated, mechanically ventilated adult patients, Intensive Care Unit (ICU) sedation should be initiated slowly with a continuous infusion in order to titrate to desired clinical effect and minimize hypotension. When indicated, initiation of sedation should begin at 5 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/h). The infusion rate should be increased by increments of 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 0.6 mg/kg/h) until the desired level of sedation is achieved. A minimum period of 5 minutes between adjustments should be allowed for onset of peak drug effect. Most adult patients require maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) or higher. Administration should not exceed 4 mg/kg/hour unless the benefits outweigh the risks (see WARNINGS. Dosages of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be reduced in patients who have received large dosages of narcotics. Conversely, the DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion dosage requirement may be reduced by adequate management of pain with analgesic agents. As with other sedative medications, there is interpatient variability in dosage requirements, and these requirements may change with time (see SUMMARY OF DOSAGE GUIDLINES). Evaluation of level of sedation and assessment of cns function should be carried out daily throughout maintenance to determine the minimum dose of DIPRIVAN required for sedation (see Clinical Trials, Intensive Care Unit (ICU). Bolus administration of 10 or 20 mg should only be used to rapidly increase depth of sedation in patients where hypotension is not likely to occur. Patients with compromised myocardial function, intravascular volume depletion, or abnormally low vascular tone (e.g., sepsis) may be more susceptible to hypotension (see PRECAUTIONS).

SUMMARY OF DOSAGE GUIDELINES:

Dosages and rates of administration in the following table should be individualized and titrated to clinical response. Safety and dosing requirements for induction of anesthesia in pediatric patients have only been established for children 3 years of age or older. Safety and dosing requirements for the maintenance of anesthesia have only been established for children 2 months of age and older.

For complete dosage information, see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION
INDICATION DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION Induction of General Anethesia Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age:40 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (2 to 2.5 mg/kg).Elderly, Debilitated, or ASA-PS III of IV Patients:20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (1 to 1.5 mg/kg)Cardiac Anesthesia:20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (0.5 to 1.5 mg/kg)Neurosurgical Patients:20 mg every 10 seconds until induction onset (1 to 2 mg/kg)Pediatric Patients-healthy, from 3 years to 16 years of age:2.5 to 3.5 mg/kg administered over 20 to 30 seconds.(see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and CLINICALPHARMACOLOGY, Pediatrics) Maintenance of General Anesthesia InfusionHealthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age:100 to 200 mcg/kg/min (6 to 12 mg/kg/h).Elderly, Debilitated, ASA-PS III or IV Patients:50-100 mcg/kg/min (3 to 6 mg/kg/h).Cardiac Anesthesia: Most patients require:Primary DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion with Secondary Opioid-100 to 150 mcg/kg/min.Low-Dose DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion with Primary Opioid-50 to 100 mcg/kg/min(see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Table 4)Neurosurgical Patients:100 to 200 mcg/kg/min (6 to 12 mg/kg/h)Pediatric Patients-healthy, from 2 months of age to 16 years of age:125 to 300 mcg/kg/min (7.5 to 18 mg/kg/h)Following the first half hour of maintenance, if clinical signs of lightanesthesia are not present, the infusion rate should be decreased.(see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use and CLINICALPHARMACOLOGY, Pediatrics) Maintenance of General Anesthesia Intermittent BolusHealthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age:Increments of 20 to 50 mg as needed. Initiation of MAC Sedation Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years Of Age:Slow infusion or slow injection techniques are recommended to avoid apneaor hypotension. Most patients require an infusion of 100 to 150 mcg/kg/min(6 to 9 mg/kg/h) for 3 to 5 minutes or a slow injection of 0.5 mg/kg over 3to 5 minutes followed immediately by a maintenance infusion.Elderly, Debilitate, Neurosurgical, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients:Most patients require dosages similar to healthy adults.Rapid boluses are to be avoided (see WARNINGS) Maintenance of MAC Sedation Healthy Adults Less Than 55 Years of Age:A variable rate infusin technique is preferable over an intermittent bolustechnique. Most patients require and infusion of 25 to 75 mcg/kg/min(1.5 to 4.5 mg/kg/h) or incremental bolus doses of 10 mg or 20 mg.In Elderly, Debilitated, Neurosurgical, or ASA-PS III or IV Patients: Most patients require 80% of the usual adult dose. A rapid (single orrepeated) bolus dose should not be used (see WARNINGS) Initiations and Maintenance of ICU Sedation in Intubated, Mechanically Ventilated Adult Patients- Because of the residual effects of previous anesthetic or sedative agents, in most patients the initial infusion should be 5 mdg/kg/min(0.3 mg/kg/h) for at least 5 minutes. Subsequent increments of 5 to 10 mcg/kg/min (0.3 to 0.6 mg/kg/h) over 5 to 10 minutes may be used untildesired clinical effect is achieved. Maintenance rates of 5 to 50 mcg/kg/min(0.3 to 3 mg/kg/h) or higher may be required. Administration should not exceed 4 mg/kg/hour unless the benefits outweigh the risks (seeWARNINGS).Evaluation of clinical effect and assessment of CNS function should becarried out daily throughout maintenance to determine the minimumdose of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion required for sedation.The tubing and any unused portions of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsionshould be discarded after 12 hours because DIPRIVAN InjectableEmulsion contains no preservatives and is capable of supporting growth of microorganisms (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).
Administration with Lidocaine

If lidocaine is to be administered to minimize pain on injection of DIPRIVAN, it is recommended that it be administered prior to DIPRIVAN administration or that it be added to DIPRIVAN immediately before administration and in quantities not exceeding 20 mg lidocaine/200 mg DIPRIVAN.

Compatibility and Stability

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should not be mixed with other therapeutic agents prior to administration.

Dilution Prior to Administration

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is provided as a ready-to-use formulation. However, should dilution be necessary, it should only be diluted with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and it should not be diluted to a concentration less than 2 mg/mL because it is an emulsion. In diluted form it has been shown to be more stable when in contact with glass than with plastic (95% potency after 2 hours of running infusion in plastic).

Administration with Other Fluids

Compatibility of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion with the coadministration of blood/serum/plasma has not been established (see WARNINGS). When administered using a y-type infusion set, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion has been shown to be compatible with the following intravenous fluids.

- 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

- Lactated Ringers Injection, USP

- Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection

- 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

- 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP
Handling Procedures
General

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Clinical experience with the use of in-line filters and DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion during anesthesia or ICU/MAC sedation is limited. DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should only be administered through a filter with a pore size of 5 micron or greater unless it has been demonstrated that the filter does not restrict the flow of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion and/or cause the breakdown of the emulsion. Filters should be used with caution and where clinically appropriate. Continuous monitoring is necessary due to the potential for restricted flow and/or breakdown of the emulsion.

Do not use if there is evidence of separation of the phases of the emulsion.

Rare cases of self-administration of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion by health care professionals have been reported, including some fatalities (see DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDANCE).

Strict aseptic technique must always be maintained during handling. DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is a single-use parenteral product which contains 0.005% disodium edetate to inhibit the rate of growth of microogranisms, up to 12 hours, in the even of accidental extrinsic contamination. however, DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion can still support the growth of microorganisms as it is not an antimicrobially preserved product under USP standards. Accordingly, strict aseptic technique must still be adhered to. Do not use if contamination is suspected. Discard unused portions as directed within the required time limits (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Handling Procedures). There have been reports in which the failure to use aseptic technique when handling DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion was associated with microbial contamination of the product and with fever, infection/sepsis, other life-threatening illness, and/or death.

Diprivan, with EDTA inhibits microbial growth for up to 12 hours, as demonstrated by test data for representative USP microorganisms.

Guidelines for Aseptic Technique for General Anesthesia/MAC Sedation

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be prepared for use just prior to initiation of each individual anesthetic/sedative procedure. The vial syringe rubber stopper should be disinfected using 70% isopropyl alcohol. DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be drawn into sterile syringes immediately after vials are opened. When withdrawing DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion from vials, a sterile vent spike should be used. The syringe(s) should be labeled with appropriate information including the date and time the vial was opened. Administration should commence promptly and be completed within 12 hours after the vials have been opened.

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be prepared for single‑patient use only. Any unused portions of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion, reservoirs, dedicated administration tubing and/or solutions containing DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion must be discarded at the end of the anesthetic procedure or at 12 hours, whichever occurs sooner. The IV line should be flushed every 12 hours and at the end of the anesthetic procedure to remove residual DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion.

Guidelines for Aseptic Technique for ICU Sedation

DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion should be prepared for single-patient use only. When DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is administered directly from the vial, strict aseptic techniques must be followed. The vial rubber stopper should be disinfected using 70% isopropyl alcohol. A sterile vent spike and sterile tubing must be used for administration of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion. As with other lipid emulsions, the number of IV line manipulations should be minimized. Administration should commence promptly and must be completed within 12 hours after the vial has been spiked. The tubing and any unused portions of DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion must be discarded after 12 hours.

If DIPRIVAN Injectable Emulsion is transferred to a syringe or other container prior to administration, the handling procedures for General anesthesia/MAC sedation should be followed, and the product should be discarded and administration lines changed after 12 hours.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual dose of atropine sulfate is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested dosages for pediatric patients are as follows:
7-16 lbs 0.1 mg 17-24 lbs 0.15 mg 24-40 lbs. 0.2 mg 40-65 lbs. 0.3 mg 65-90 lbs. 0.4 mg Over 90 lbs. 0.4 to 0.6 mg Table of Dosage Equivalents Atropine sulfate Solution (mL required) mg required 1 mg per mL 0.4 mg per mL 1 1 0.80 0.80 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.50 0.40 0.40 1 0.30 0.30 0.75 0.25 0.25 0.63 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.18 0.18 0.45 0.15 0.15 0.38 0.12 0.12 0.30 0.10 0.10 0.25 These doses may be exceeded in certain cases. The hypotonic radiography of the gastrointestinal tract, the usual adult dose is 1 mg intramuscularly. Adults suspected of contact with organic phosphorous insecticides of the parathion type should be given atropine sulfate 0.8 mg intramuscularly. If an atropine effect is not apparent wihin 30 minutes or if definite symptoms of the poisoning occur (nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, pupillary constriction, pulmonary edema, fasciculations of eyelids and tongue, jerky ocular movements and excessive sweating, salivation and bronchial secretion), atropine sulfate 2 mg should be given intramuscularly at hourly intervals until signs of atropinization are observed. Up to 2 or 3 times of this dose (4 to 6 mg) may be required in severe cases. Perenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

The addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP to intravenous infusion is not recommended due to lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.

Not to exceed 50 mg per minute, intravenously in adults, and not exceeding 1 - 3 mg/kg/min in neonates. There is a relatively small margin between full therapeutic effect and minimally toxic doses of this drug.

The solution is suitable for use as long as it remains free of haziness and precipitate. Upon refrigeration or freezing, a precipitate might form; this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. Only a clear solution should be used. A faint yellow coloration may develop; however, this has no effect on the potency of the solution.

In the treatment of status epilepticus, the intravenous route is preferred because of the delay in absorption of phenytoin when administered intramuscularly.

Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Status Epilepticus

In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70 kg patient). The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6-8 hours.

Recent work in neonates and pediatric patients has shown that absorption of phenytoin is unreliable after oral administration, but a loading dose of 15 - 20 mg/kg of phenytoin intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10 - 20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1 - 3 mg/kg/min.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP should be injected slowly and directly into a large vein through a large-gauge needle or intravenous catheter. Each injection of intravenous phenytoin should be followed by an injection of sterile saline through the same needle or catheter to avoid local venous irritation due to alkalinity of the solution. Continuous infusion should be avoided; the addition of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP to intravenous infusion fluids is not recommended because of the likelihood of precipitation.

Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression. Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage.

Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous short-acting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of phenytoin.

If administration of Phenytoin Sodium Injection, USP does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia, and other appropriate measures should be considered.

Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Neurosurgery

Prophylactic dosage 100 to 200 mg (2 to 4 mL) intramuscularly at approximately 4-hour intervals during surgery and continued during the postoperative period. When intramuscular administration is required for a patient previously stabilized orally, compensating dosage adjustments are necessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites.

If the patient requires more than a week of IM phenytoin, alternative routes should be explored, such as gastric intubation. For time periods less than one week, the patient shifted back from IM administration should receive one half the original oral dose for the same period of time the patient received IM phenytoin. Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Magnesium Sulfate

Magnesium Sulfate

Dosage of magnesium sulfate must be carefully adjusted according to individual requirements and response, and administration of the drug should be discontinued as soon as the desired effect is obtained. Both intravenous and intramuscular administration are appropriate. Intramuscular administration of the undiluted 50% solution results in therapeutic plasma levels in 60 minutes, whereas I.V. doses will provide a therapeutic level almost immediately. The rate of I.V. injection should generally not exceed 150 mg/minute (1.5 mL of a 10% concentration or its equivalent), except in severe eclampsia with seizures (see below). Solutions for intravenous infusion must be diluted to a concentration of 20% or less prior to administration. The diluents commonly used are 5% Dextrose Injection, USP and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Deep intramuscular injection of the undiluted (50%) solution is appropriate for adults, but the solution should be diluted to a 20% or less concentration prior to such injection in children.

In Magnesium Deficiency In the treatment of mild magnesium deficiency, the usual adult dose is 1 g, equivalent to 8.12 mEq of magnesium (2 mL of the 50% solution) injected intramuscularly every six hours for four doses (equivalent to a total of 32.5 mEq of magnesium per 24 hours). For severe hypomagnesemia, as much as 250 mg (approximately 2 mEq) per kg of body weight (0.5 mL of the 50% solution) may be given intramuscularly within a period of four hours if necessary. Alternatively, 5 g, (approximately 40 mEq) can be added to one liter of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP for slow intravenous infusion over a three-hour period. In the treatment of deficiency states, caution must be observed to prevent exceeding the renal excretory capacity.

In Hyperalimentation In total parenteral nutrition, maintenance requirements for magnesium are not precisely known. The maintenance dose used in adults ranges from 8 to 24 mEq (1 to 3 g) daily; for infants, the range is 2 to 10 mEq (0.25 to 1.25 g) daily.

In Eclampsia In severe pre-eclampsia or eclampsia, the total initial dose is 10 to 14 g of magnesium sulfate. Intravenously, a dose of 4 to 5 g in 250 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP may be infused. Simultaneously, intramuscular doses of up to 10 g (5 g or 10 mL of the undiluted 50% solution in each buttock) are given. Alternatively, the initial intravenous dose of 4 g may be given by diluting the 50% solution to a 10 or 20% concentration; the diluted fluid (40 mL of a 10% solution or 20 mL of a 20% solution) may then be injected intravenously over a period of three to four minutes. Subsequently, 4 to 5 g (8 to 10 mL of the 50% solution) are injected intramuscularly into alternate buttocks every four hours, depending on the continuing presence of the patellar reflex and adequate respiratory function. Alternatively, after the initial I.V. dose, some clinicians administer 1 to 2 g/hour by constant I.V. infusion. Therapy should continue until paroxysms cease. A serum magnesium level of 6 mg/100 mL is considered optimal for control of seizures. A total daily (24 hr) dose of 30 to 40 g should not be exceeded. In the presence of severe renal insufficiency, the maximum dosage of magnesium sulfate is 20 grams/48 hours and frequent serum magnesium concentrations must be obtained.

Other Uses In counteracting the muscle-stimulating effects of barium poisoning, the usual dose of magnesium sulfate is 1 to 2 g given I.V. For controlling seizures associated with epilepsy, glomerulonephritis or hypothyroidism, the usual adult dose is 1 g administered I.M.or I.V. In paroxysmal atrial tachycardia, magnesium should be used only if simpler measures have failed and there is no evidence of myocardial damage. The usual dose is 3 to 4 g (30 to 40 mL of a 10% solution) administered I.V. over 30 seconds with extreme caution. For reduction of cerebral edema, 2.5 g (25 mL of a 10% solution) is given I.V.

Incompatibilities Magnesium sulfate in solution may result in a precipitate formation when mixed with solutions containing:
Alcohol (in high concentrations) Alkali carbonates and bicarbonates Alkali hydroxides Arsenates Barium Calcium Clindimycin phosphate Heavy Metals Hydrocortisone sodium succinate Phosphates Polymixin B sulfate Procaine hydrochloride Salicylates Strontium Tartrates The potential incompatibility will often be influenced by the changes in the concentration of reactants and the pH of the solutions. It has been reported that magnesium may reduce the antibiotic activity of streptomycin, tetracycline and tobramycin when given together. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Infed

Infed

Oral iron should be discontinued prior to administration of INFeD.

Dosage:I. Iron Deficiency Anemia: Periodic hematologic determination (hemoglobin and hematocrit) is a simple and accurate technique for monitoring hematological response, and should be used as a guide in therapy. It should be recognized that iron storage may lag behind the appearance of normal blood morphology. Serum iron, total iron binding capacity (TIBC) and percent saturation of transferrin are other important tests for detecting and monitoring the iron deficient state. After administration of iron dextran complex, evidence of a therapeutic response can be seen in a few days as an increase in the reticulocyte count. Although serum ferritin is usually a good guide to body iron stores, the correlation of body iron stores and serum ferritin may not bevalid in patients on chronic renal dialysis who are also receiving iron dextran complex. Although there are significant variations in body build and weight distribution among males and females, the accompanying table and formula represent a convenient means for estimating the total iron required. This total iron requirement reflects the amount of iron needed to restore hemoglobin concentration to normal or near normal levels plus an additional allowance to provide adequate replenishment of iron stores in most individuals with moderately or severely reduced levels of hemoglobin. It should be remembered that iron deficiency anemia will not appear until essentially all iron stores have been depleted. Therapy, thus, should aim at not only replenishment of hemoglobin iron but iron stores as well. Factors contributing to the formula are shown below.

mg blood iron = mL blood x g hemoglobin x mg iron lb body weight lb body weight mL blood g hemoglobin

1. Blood volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 mL/kg of body weight2. Normal hemoglobin (males and females)over 15 kg (33 lbs) . . . . . . . . . . . .14.8 g/dl15 kg (33 lbs) or less . . . . . . . . . .12.0 g/dl3. Iron content of hemoglobin . . . . . 0.34%4. Hemoglobin deficit5. WeightBased on the above factors, individuals with normal hemoglobin levels will have approximately 33 mg of blood iron per kilogram of body weight (15 mg/lb).Note: The table and accompanying formula are applicable for dosage determinations only in patients with iron deficiency anemia; they are not to be used for dosage determinations in patients requiring iron replacement for blood loss.TOTAL INFeD REQUIREMENT FOR HEMOGLOBIN RESTORATION AND IRON STORES REPLACEMENT*
Patient LeanBody Weight Milliliter Requirement of INFeD Based on Observed Hemoglobin of kg lb 3(g/dl) 4(g/dl) 5(g/dl) 6(g/dl) 7(g/dl) 8(g/dl) 9(g/dl) 10(g/dl) 5 11 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 10 22 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 15 33 10 9 9 8 7 7 6 5 20 44 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 25 55 20 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 30 66 23 22 21 19 18 17 15 14 35 77 27 26 24 23 21 20 18 17 40 88 31 29 28 26 24 22 21 19 45 99 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 50 110 39 37 35 32 30 28 26 24 55 121 43 41 38 36 33 31 28 26 60 132 47 44 42 39 36 34 31 28 65 143 51 48 45 42 39 36 34 31 70 154 55 52 49 45 42 39 36 33 75 165 59 55 52 49 45 42 39 35 80 176 63 59 55 52 48 45 41 38 85 187 66 63 59 55 51 48 44 40 90 198 70 66 62 52 54 50 46 42 95 209 74 70 66 62 57 53 49 45 100 220 78 74 69 65 60 56 52 47 105 231 82 77 73 68 63 59 54 50 110 242 86 81 76 71 67 62 57 52 115 253 90 85 80 75 70 64 59 54 120 264 94 88 83 78 73 67 62 57 *Table values were calculated based on a normal adult hemoglobin of 14.8 g/dl for weights greater than 15 kg (33 lbs) and a hemoglobin of 12.0 g/dl for weights less than or equal to 15 kg (33 lbs). The total amount of INFeD in mL required to treat the anemia and replenish iron stores may be approximated as follows: Adults and Children over 15 kg (33 lbs): See Dosage Table. Alternatively the total dose may be calculated: Dose (mL) = 0.0442 (Desired Hb - Observed Hb) x LBW + (0.26 x LBW) Based on: Desired Hb = the target Hb in g/dl. Observed Hb = the patient’s current hemoglobin in g/dl. LBW = Lean body weight in kg. A patient’s lean body weight (or actual body weight if less than lean body weight) should be utilized when determining dosage. For males: LBW = 50 kg + 2.3 kg for each inch of patient’s height over 5 feet For females: LBW = 45.5 kg + 2.3 kg for each inch of patient’s height over 5 feet To calculate a patient's weight in kg when lbs are known: patient's weight in kilograms = weight in kilograms 2.2 Children 5 - 15 kg (11 - 33 lbs): See Dosage Table. INFeD should not normally be given in the first four months of life. (See PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use.) Alternatively the total dose may be calculated: Dose (mL) = 0.0442 (Desired Hb - Observed Hb) x W + (0.26 x W) Based on: Desired Hb = the target Hb in g/dl. (Normal Hb for Children 15 kg or less is 12 g/dl) W = Weight in kg. To calculate a patient's weight in kg when lbs are known: patient's weight in kilograms = weight in kilograms 2.2 II. Iron Replacement for Blood Loss: Some individuals sustain blood losses on an intermittent or repetitive basis. Such blood losses may occur periodically in patients with hemorrhagic diatheses (familial telangiectasia; hemophilia; gastrointestinal bleeding) and on a repetitive basis from procedures such as renal hemodialysis. Iron therapy in these patients should be directed toward replacement of the equivalent amount of iron represented in the blood loss. The table and formula described under I. Iron Deficiency Anemia are not applicable for simple iron replacement values. Quantitative estimates of the individual’s periodic blood loss and hematocrit during the bleeding episode provide a convenient method for the calculation of the required iron dose. The formula shown below is based on the approximation that 1 mL of normocytic, normochromic red cells contains 1 mg of elemental iron: Replacement iron (in mg) = Blood loss (in mL) x hematocrit Example: Blood loss of 500 mL with 20% hematocrit Replacement Iron = 500 x 0.20 = 100 mg INFeD dose = 100 mg = 2 mL 50 Administration: The total amount of INFeD required for the treatment of iron deficiency anemia or iron replacement for blood loss is determined from the table or appropriate formula. (See Dosage). I. Intravenous Injection - PRIOR TO THE FIRST INTRAVENOUS INFeD THERAPEUTIC DOSE, ADMINISTER AN INTRAVENOUS TEST DOSE OF 0.5 ML. ADMINISTER THE TEST DOSE AT A GRADUAL RATE OVER AT LEAST 30 SECONDS. Although anaphylactic reactions known to occur following INFeD administration are usually evident within a few minutes, or sooner, it is recommended that a period of an hour or longer elapse before the remainder of the initial therapeutic dose is given. Individual doses of 2 mL or less may be given on a daily basis until the calculated total amount required has been reached. INFeD is given undiluted at a slow gradual rate not to exceed 50 mg (1 mL) per minute. 2. Intramuscular Injection - PRIOR TO THE FIRST INTRAMUSCULAR INFeD THERAPEUTIC DOSE, ADMINISTER AN INTRAMUSCULAR TEST DOSE OF 0.5 ML. (See BOXED WARNING and PRECAUTIONS.) The test dose should be administered in the buttock using the same technique as described in the last paragraph of this section. Although anaphylactic reactions known to occur following INFeD administration are usually evident within a few minutes or sooner, it is recommended that at least an hour or longer elapse before the remainder of the initial therapeutic dose is given. If no adverse reactions are observed, INFeD can be given according to the following schedule until the calculated total amount required has been reached. Each day’s dose should ordinarily not exceed 0.5 mL (25 mg of iron) for infants under 5 kg (11 lbs); 1.0 mL (50 mg of iron) for children under 10 kg (22 lbs); and 2.0 mL (100 mg of iron) for other patients. INFeD should be injected only into the muscle mass of the upper outer quadrant of the buttock - never into the arm or other exposed areas - and should be injected deeply, with a 2-inch or 3-inch 19 or 20 gauge needle. If the patient is standing, he/she should be bearing his/her weight on the leg opposite the injection site, or if in bed, he/she should be in the lateral position with injection site uppermost. To avoid injection or leakage into the subcutaneous tissue, a Z-track technique (displacement of the skin laterally prior to injection) is recommended. NOTE: Do not mix INFeD with other medications or add to parenteral nutrition solutions for intravenous infusion. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever the solution and container permit.
Dexamethasone Sodium Ph...

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate

Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection, 4 mg/mL-For intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intralesional, and soft tissue injection.

Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection can be given directly from the vial, or it can be added to Sodium Chloride Injection or Dextrose Injection and administered by intravenous drip.

Solutions used for intravenous administration or further dilution of this product should be preservative free when used in the neonate, especially the premature infant.

When it is mixed with an infusion solution, sterile precautions should be observed. Since infusion solutions generally do not contain preservatives, mixtures should be used within 24 hours.

DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Intravenous and Intramuscular Injection:

The initial dosage of dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection varies from 0.5 to 9mg a day depending on the disease being treated. In less severe diseases doses lower than 0.5 mg may suffice, while in severe diseases doses higher than 9 mg may be required.

The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until the patient's response is satisfactory. If a satisfactory clinical response does not occur after a reasonable period of time, discontinue dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection and transfer the patient to other therapy.

After a favorable initial response, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial dosage in small amounts to the lowest dosage that maintains an adequate clinical response.

Patients should be observed closely for signs that might require dosage adjustment, including changes in clinical status resulting from remissions or exacerbations of the disease, individuals drug responsiveness, and the effect of stress (e.g., surgery, infection, trauma). During stress it may be necessary to increase dosage temporarily.

If the drug is to be stopped after more than a few days of treatment, it usually should be withdrawn gradually.

When the intravenous route of administration is used, dosage usually should be the same as the oral dosage. In certain overwhelming, acute, life threatening situations, however, administration in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages. The slower rate of absorption by intramuscular administration should be recognized.

Shock

There is a tendency in current medical practice to use high (pharmacologic) doses of corticosteroids for the treatment of unresponsive shock. The following dosages of dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection have been suggested by various authors:

Author Dosage Cavanagh 3 mg/kg of body weight per 24 hours by constant intravenous infusion after an initial intravenous injection of 20 mg Schumer 1 mg/kg of body weight as a single intravenous injection Dietzman 2 to 6 mg/kg of body weight as a single intravenous injection Frank 40 mg initially followed by repeat intravenous injection every 4 to 6 hours while shock persists Oaks 40 mg initially followed by repeat intravenous injection every 2 to 6 hours while shock persists Administration of high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient's condition has stabilized and usually not longer than 48 to 72 hours. Although adverse reactions associated with high dose, short term corticosteroid therapy are uncommon, peptic ulceration may occur. Cerebral Edema Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection is generally administered initially in a dosage of 10 mg intravenously followed by four mg every six hours intramuscularly until the symptoms of cerebral edema subside. Response is usually noted within 12 to 24 hours and dosage may be reduced after two to four days and gradually discontinued over a period of five to seven days. For palliative management of patients with recurrent of inoperable brain tumors, maintenance therapy with two mg two or three times a day may be effective. Acute Allergic Disorders In acute, self-limited allergic disorders or acute exacerbations of chronic allergic disorders, the following dosage schedule combining parenteral and oral therapy is suggested: Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection, 4 mg/mL: first day, 1 or 2 mL (4 or 8 mg), intramuscularly. Dexamethasone tablets, 0.75 mg: second and third days, 4 tablets in two divided doses each day; fourth day, 2 tablets in two divided doses; fifth and sixth days, 1 tablet each day; seventh day, no treatment; eighth day, follow-up visit. This schedule is designed to ensure adequate therapy during acute episodes, while minimizing the risk of overdosage in chronic cases. Intra-articular, Intralesional and Soft Tissue Injection: Intra-articular, intrlesional, and soft tissue injections are generally employed when the affected joints or areas are limited to one or two sites. Dosage and frequency of injection varies depending on the condition and the site of injection. The usual dose is from 0.2 to 6 mg. The frequency usually ranges from once every three to five days to once every two to three weeks. Frequent intra-articular injection may result in damage to joint tissues. Some of the usual single doses are: Site of Injection Amount of Dexamethasone Phosphate (mg) Large Joints (e.g., Knee) 2 to 4 Small Joints (e.g., Interphalangeal, Temporomandibular) 0.8 to 1 Bursae 2 to 3 Tendon Sheaths 0.4 to 1 Soft Tissue Infiltration 2 to 6 Ganglia 1 to 2 Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection is particularly recommended for use in conjunction with one of the less soluble, longer-acting steroids for intra-articular and soft tissue injection. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever the solution and container permit.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.
Bacterial Meningitis
Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.
Septicemia
Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
DIRECTIONS FOR USE
Use only freshly prepared solutions. Intramuscular and intravenous injections should be administered within one hour after preparation since the potency may decrease significantly after this period.

For Intramuscular Use– Dissolve contents of a vial with the amount of Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, listed in the table below:
NDC 36000 LabelClaim RecommendedAmount ofDiluent WithdrawableVolume Concentration(in mg/mL) 070-10 250 mg 1 mL 1 mL 250 mg 071-10 500 mg 1.8 mL 2 mL 250 mg 072-10 1 gram 3.5 mL 4 mL 250 mg 073-10 2 grams 6.8 mL 8 mL 250 mg
While Ampicillin for Injection, USP, 1 gram and 2 grams, are primarily for intravenous use, they may be administered intramusculary when the 250 mg or 500 mg vials are unavailable. In such instances, dissolve in 3.5 or 6.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, respectively. The resulting solution will provide a concentration of 250 mg per mL.

Ampicillin for Injection, USP 125 mg, is intended primarily for pediatric use. It also serves as a convenient dosage form when small parenteral doses of the antibiotic are required.

For Direct Intravenous Use– Add 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP to the 250, and 500 mg vials and administer slowly over a 3- to 5- minute period. Ampicillin for Injection, USP, 1 gram or 2 grams, may also be given by direct Intravenous administration. Dissolve in 7.4 or 14.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, respectively, and administer slowly over at least 10 to 15 minutes. CAUTION: More rapid administration may result in convulsive seizures.

For Administration by Intravenous Drip– Reconstitute as directed above ( For Direct Intravenous Use) prior to diluting with Intravenous Solution. Stability studies on ampicillin sodium at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activitiy at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated.
Room Temperature (25° C) Diluent Concentrations StabilityPeriods Sterile Water for Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 5% Dextrose in Water 10 to 20 mg/mL 1 hour 5% Dextrose in Water up to 2 mg/mL 2 hours 5% Dextrose in 0.45% NaCl up to 2 mg/mL 2 hours Lactated Ringer's Solution up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours Refrigerated (4° C) Diluent Concentrations StabilityPeriods Sterile Water for Injection 30 mg/mL 48 hours Sterile Water for Injection up to 20 mg/mL 72 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection 30 mg/mL 24 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection up to 20 mg/mL 48 hours Lactated Ringer's Solution up to 30 mg/mL 24 hours 5% Dextrose in Water up to 20 mg/mL 1 hour 5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl up to 10 mg/mL 1 hour
Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection, USP. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.
Bacterial Meningitis
Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.
Septicemia
Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
DIRECTIONS FOR USE
Use only freshly prepared solutions. Intramuscular and intravenous injections should be administered within one hour after preparation since the potency may decrease significantly after this period.

For Intramuscular Use– Dissolve contents of a vial with the amount of Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, listed in the table below:
NDC 36000 LabelClaim RecommendedAmount ofDiluent WithdrawableVolume Concentration(in mg/mL) 070-10 250 mg 1 mL 1 mL 250 mg 071-10 500 mg 1.8 mL 2 mL 250 mg 072-10 1 gram 3.5 mL 4 mL 250 mg 073-10 2 grams 6.8 mL 8 mL 250 mg
While Ampicillin for Injection, USP, 1 gram and 2 grams, are primarily for intravenous use, they may be administered intramusculary when the 250 mg or 500 mg vials are unavailable. In such instances, dissolve in 3.5 or 6.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, respectively. The resulting solution will provide a concentration of 250 mg per mL.

Ampicillin for Injection, USP 125 mg, is intended primarily for pediatric use. It also serves as a convenient dosage form when small parenteral doses of the antibiotic are required.

For Direct Intravenous Use– Add 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP to the 250, and 500 mg vials and administer slowly over a 3- to 5- minute period. Ampicillin for Injection, USP, 1 gram or 2 grams, may also be given by direct Intravenous administration. Dissolve in 7.4 or 14.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, USP, respectively, and administer slowly over at least 10 to 15 minutes. CAUTION: More rapid administration may result in convulsive seizures.

For Administration by Intravenous Drip– Reconstitute as directed above ( For Direct Intravenous Use) prior to diluting with Intravenous Solution. Stability studies on ampicillin sodium at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activitiy at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated.
Room Temperature (25° C) Diluent Concentrations StabilityPeriods Sterile Water for Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 5% Dextrose in Water 10 to 20 mg/mL 1 hour 5% Dextrose in Water up to 2 mg/mL 2 hours 5% Dextrose in 0.45% NaCl up to 2 mg/mL 2 hours Lactated Ringer's Solution up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours Refrigerated (4° C) Diluent Concentrations StabilityPeriods Sterile Water for Injection 30 mg/mL 48 hours Sterile Water for Injection up to 20 mg/mL 72 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection 30 mg/mL 24 hours 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection up to 20 mg/mL 48 hours Lactated Ringer's Solution up to 30 mg/mL 24 hours 5% Dextrose in Water up to 20 mg/mL 1 hour 5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl up to 10 mg/mL 1 hour
Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection, USP. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). The 1 mL vial must not be confused with a “catheter lock flush” vial or other 1 mL vial of inappropriate strength. Confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength prior to administration of the drug.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient's coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn 4 to 6 hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.
Converting to Oral Anticoagulant
When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.
Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose Heparin
Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
METHOD OF ADMINISTRATION FREQUENCY RECOMMENDED DOSE[based on 150 lb (68 kg) patient] Deep Subcutaneous (Intrafat) Injection Initial Dose 5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously A different site should be used for each injection to prevent the development of massive hematoma Every 8 hoursorEvery 12 hours 8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution Intermittent Intravenous Injection Initial Dose 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Every 4 to 6 hours 5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Intravenous Infusion Initial Dose 5,000 units by IV injection Continuous 20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or in any compatible solution) for infusion Pediatric Use
Follow recommendations of appropriate pediatric reference texts. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline:

Initial Dose

50 units/kg (IV, drip)

Maintenance Dose

100 units/kg (IV, drip) every 4 hours, or 20,000 units/m2/24 hours continuously
Geriatric Use
Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.
Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels
Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units per kilogram is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.
Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism
A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.
Extracorporeal Dialysis
Follow equipment manufacturers' operating directions carefully.
Blood Transfusion
Addition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units per 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.
Laboratory Samples
Addition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within 2 hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for varioustypes of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefreesolutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases wherevasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumesand concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia anddegree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases thelowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for childrenand for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume andconcentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection willdecrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increasethe segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a moreprofound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quitelow, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directlyproportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should beused.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerveblock, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicatedconcentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space,a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volumerequired for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may havedisplaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning ofunintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transientpage 7 of 27“epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor,palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beatsper minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoringcan detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administrationof each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, whenfeasible, fractional doses should be administered.In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitableresuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinalfluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGESAdultsFor normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg(3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used withoutepinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommendedthat the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommendeddosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is usedfor non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients andnon-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutesbetween sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults.ChildrenIt is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For childrenover 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by thechild’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg(1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) arerecommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children.In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Insome cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the requiredfinal concentration.NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration wheneverthe solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains aprecipitate.Table 1: Recommended Dosages
Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Procedure Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 30 Pudendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 50 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300
*Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome).THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES ANDCONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for varioustypes of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefreesolutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases wherevasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumesand concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia anddegree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases thelowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for childrenand for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume andconcentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection willdecrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increasethe segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a moreprofound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quitelow, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directlyproportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should beused.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerveblock, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicatedconcentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space,a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volumerequired for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may havedisplaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning ofunintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient
“epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES Adults For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Table 1: Recommended Dosages Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertevral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Pudendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrine-free solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.

The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.

For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should be used.
Epidural Anesthesia
For epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:

1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™

1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions

1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions

1:200,000

1.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™

1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™

1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions

1:200,000

2% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™

2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions

1:200,000

Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.

In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).
Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block
As a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered.

In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES Adults
For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.

The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).

For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults.
Children
It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children.

In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.

Table 1: Recommended Dosages

Procedure

Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride)

Injection (without epinephrine)

Conc (%)

Vol (mL)

Total Dose (mg)

Infiltration

Percutaneous

0.5 or 1

1 to 60

5 to 300

Intravenous regional

0.5

10 to 60

50 to 300

Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg,

Brachial

1.5

15 to 20

225 to 300

Dental

2

1 to 5

20 to 100

Intercostal

1

3

30

Paravertebral

1

3 to 5

30 to 50

Pudendal (each side)

1

10

100

Paracervical

Obstetrical analgesia

(each side)

1

10

100

Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg,

Cervical (stellate ganglion)

1

5

50

Lumbar

1

5 to 10

50 to 100

Central Neural Blocks

Epidural*

Thoracic

1

20 to 30

200 to 300

Lumbar

Analgesia

1

25 to 30

250 to 300

Anesthesia

1.5

15 to 20

225 to 300

2

10 to 15

200 to 300

Caudal

Obstetrical analgesia

1

20 to 30

200 to 300

Surgical anesthesia

1.5

15 to 20

225 to 300

*Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome).

THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.
STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURES
Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or ethyl alcohol (70%) is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and therefore are not to be used.

Dosage forms listed as Xylocaine-MPF indicate single dose solutions that are Methyl Paraben Free (MPF).
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for varioustypes of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefreesolutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases wherevasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumesand concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia anddegree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases thelowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for childrenand for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume andconcentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection willdecrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increasethe segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a moreprofound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quitelow, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directlyproportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should beused.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerveblock, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicatedconcentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space,a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volumerequired for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may havedisplaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning ofunintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient
“epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES Adults For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Table 1: Recommended Dosages Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Prudendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.
Nesacaine

Nesacaine

Chloroprocaine may be administered as a single injection or continuously through an indwelling catheter. As with all localanesthetics, the dose administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the vascularity of the tissues, the depth of anesthesia anddegree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallestdose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be used. Dosage should be reduced for children, elderly and
debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The maximum single recommended doses of chloroprocaine in adults are: without epinephrine, 11 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 800 mg; with epinephrine (1:200,000), 14 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 1000 mg. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Nesacaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: In order to guard against adverse experiences sometimes noted following unintended penetration of the subarachnoid space, the following procedure modifications are recommended: 1. Use an adequate test dose (3 mL of Nesacaine-MPF 3% Injection or 5 mL of Nesacaine-MPF 2% Injection) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose. 2. Avoid the rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection through the catheter. Consider fractional doses, when feasible. 3. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. As a guide for some routine procedures, suggested doses are given below: 1. Infiltration and Peripheral Nerve Block: NESACAINE or NESACAINE-MPF (chloroprocaine HCl Injection, USP) Anesthetic Procedure Solution Concentration% Volume (mL) Total Dose (mg) Mandibular 2 2-3 40-60 Infraorbital 2 0.5-1 10-20 Brachial plexus 2 30-40 600-800 Digital (without epinephrine) 1 3-4 30-40 Pudendal 2 10 each side 400 Paracervical (see also PRECAUTIONS) 1 3 per each of 4sites up to 120 2. Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: NESACAINE-MPF INJECTION. For caudal anesthesia, the initial dose is 15 to 25 mL of a 2% or 3% solution. Repeated doses may be given at 40 to 60 minute intervals. For lumbar epidural anesthesia, 2 to 2.5 mL per segment of a 2% or 3% solution can be used. The usual total volume of Nesacaine-MPF Injection is from 15 to 25 mL. Repeated doses 2 to 6 mL less than the original dose may be given at 40 to 50 minute intervals. The above dosages are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. Maximum dosages of all local anesthetics must be individualized after evaluating the size and physical condition of the patient and the rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Pediatric Dosage: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight and should not exceed 11 mg/kg (5 mg/lb). For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs (23 kg), the dose of chloroprocaine HCl without epinephrine would be 250 mg. Concentrations of 0.5–1% are suggested for infiltration and 1–1.5% for nerve block. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Some of the lower concentrations for use in infants and smaller children are not available in prepackaged containers; it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with the amount of 0.9% sodium chloride injection necessary to obtain the required final concentration of chloroprocaine injection. Preparation of Epinephrine Injections—To prepare a 1:200,000 epinephrine-chloroprocaine HCl injection, add 0.1 mL of a 1 to 1000 Epinephrine Injection USP to 20 mL of Nesacaine-MPF Injection. Chloroprocaine is incompatible with caustic alkalis and their carbonates, soaps, silver salts, iodine and iodides. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever injection and container permit. As with other anesthetics having a free aromatic amino group, Nesacaine and Nesacaine-MPF Injections are slightly photosensitive and may become discolored after prolonged exposure to light. It is recommended that these vials be stored in the original outer containers, protected from direct sunlight. Discolored injection should not be administered. If exposed to low temperatures, Nesacaine and Nesacaine-MPF Injections may deposit crystals of chloroprocaine HCl which will redissolve with shaking when returned to room temperature. The product should not be used if it contains undissolved (eg, particulate) material.
Sensorcaine

Sensorcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of thetissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the durationof anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required toproduce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Sensorcaine should be reduced for young, elderly and/or debilitatedpatients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should beavoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible.For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Sensorcaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).).In recommended doses, Sensorcaine (bupivacaine HCl) produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differsamong the three concentrations.0.25%—when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operationsin which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset ofaction may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions.0.5%—provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in whichcomplete muscle relaxation is essential.0.75%—produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete musclerelaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.The duration of anesthesia with Sensorcaine is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient.Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as theusual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Sensorcaine up to225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualizationof each case.These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses up to 400 mg have beenreported. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may beprolonged by the addition of epinephrine.The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. Thesedosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained Sensorcaine is not recommended forpediatric patients younger than 12 years. Sensorcaine is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommendedfor intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural AnesthesiaDuring epidural administration of Sensorcaine, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. Inobstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution notexceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containingepinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single dose ampules and single dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; themultiple dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlocksSee PRECAUTIONS.Unused portions of solutions in single dose containers should be discarded, since this product form contains no preservatives.TABLE 1. DOSAGE RECOMMENDATIONS —SENSORCAINE (bupivacaine HCl) INJECTIONS
Each Dose Each Dose Type of Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Motor Block (1) Local Infiltration 0.25% (4) up to max. up to max. Epidural 0.75% (2,4) 10 to 20 75 to 150 complete 0.5% (4) 10 to 20 50 to 100 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 10 to 20 25 to 50 partial to moderate Caudal 0.5% (4) 15 to 30 75 to 150 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 15 to 30 37.5 to 75 moderate Peripheral Nerves 0.5% (4) 5 to max. 25 to max. moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 5 to max. 12.5 to max. moderate to complete Retrobulbar (3) 0.75% (4) 2 to 4 15 to 30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20 to 50 50 to 125 Epidural (3) 0.5% 2 to 3 10 to 15 Test Dose w/epi 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 1 With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. 2 For single dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetric anesthesia. 3 See PRECAUTIONS. 4 Solutions with or without epinephrine. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.
Sensorcaine

Sensorcaine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of thetissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the durationof anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required toproduce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Sensorcaine should be reduced for young, elderly and/or debilitatedpatients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should beavoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible.For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Sensorcaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).).In recommended doses, Sensorcaine (bupivacaine HCl) produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differsamong the three concentrations.0.25%—when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operationsin which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset ofaction may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions.0.5%—provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in whichcomplete muscle relaxation is essential.0.75%—produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete musclerelaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.The duration of anesthesia with Sensorcaine is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient.Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as theusual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Sensorcaine up to225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualizationof each case.These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses up to 400 mg have beenreported. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may beprolonged by the addition of epinephrine.The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. Thesedosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained Sensorcaine is not recommended forpediatric patients younger than 12 years. Sensorcaine is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommendedfor intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural AnesthesiaDuring epidural administration of Sensorcaine, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. Inobstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution notexceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containingepinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single dose ampules and single dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; themultiple dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlocksSee PRECAUTIONS.Unused portions of solutions in single dose containers should be discarded, since this product form contains no preservatives.TABLE 1. DOSAGE RECOMMENDATIONS —SENSORCAINE (bupivacaine HCl) INJECTIONS
Each Dose Each Dose Type of Block Conc (mL) (mg) Motor Block (1) Local Infiltration 0.25% (4) up to max. up to max. _ Epidural 0.75% (2,4) 10 to 20 75 to 150 complete 0.5% (4) 10 to 20 50 to 100 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 10 to 20 25 to 50 partial to moderate Caudal 0.5% (4) 15 to 30 75 to 150 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 15 to 30 37.5 to 75 moderate Peripheral Nerves 0.5% (4) 5 to max. 25 to max. moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 5 to max. 12.5 to max. moderate to complete Retrobulbar (3) 0.75% (4) 2 to 4 15 to 30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20 to 50 50 to 125 _ Epidural (3) 0.5% 2 to 3 10 to 15 _ Test Dose w/epi 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 1 With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. 2 For single dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetric anesthesia. 3 See PRECAUTIONS. 4 Solutions with or without epinephrine. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. HOW SUPPLIED SOLUTIONS OF SENSORCAINE (BUPIVACAINE HYDROCHLORIDE) SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR THE PRODUCTION OF SPINAL ANESTHESIA (SUBARACHNOID BLOCK) BECAUSE OF INSUFFICIENT DATA TO SUPPORT SUCH USE. Sensorcaine-MPF (methylparaben free) is available in the following forms: With Epinephrine: Product No. NDC No. Strength Size 460837 63323-468-37 0.25% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460817 63323-468-17 0.25% 10 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460217 63323-462-17 0.5% 10 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460237 63323-462-37 0.5% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460231 63323-462-31 0.5% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in 5. 461037 63323-460-37 0.75% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. Without Epinephrine: Product No. NDC No. Strength Size 460417 63323-464-17 0.25% 10 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460433* 63323-464-33 0.25% 30 mL ampules packaged in 5. 460437 63323-464-37 0.25% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460431 63323-464-31 0.25% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in 5. 460617 63323-466-17 0.5% 10 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460637 63323-466-37 0.5% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460631 63323-466-31 0.5% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in 5. 460633* 63323-466-33 0.5% 30 mL ampules packaged in 5. 470217 63323-472-17 0.75% 10 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 470237 63323-472-37 0.75% 30 mL Single Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 470233* 63323-472-33 0.75% 30 mL ampules packaged in 5. Sensorcaine (preserved with methylparaben) is available in the following forms: With Epinephrine: Product No. NDC No. Strength Size 460157 63323-461-57 0.25% 50 mL Multiple Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460357 63323-463-57 0.5% 50 mL Multiple Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25 Without Epinephrine: Product No. NDC No. Strength Size 460557 63323-465-57 0.25% 50 mL Multiple Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. 460757 63323-467-57 0.5% 50 mL Multiple Dose Vials packaged in trays of 25. * Products manufactured for APP Pharmaceuticals, LLC. Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc.), should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection since they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of the container surface is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or ethyl alcohol (70%) is recommended. It is recommended that chemical disinfection be accomplished by wiping the ampule or vial stopper thoroughly with cotton or gauze that has been moistened with the recommended alcohol just prior to use. Solutions should be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Solutions containing epinephrine should be protected from light. All trademarks are the property of APP Pharmaceuticals, LLC. APP APP Pharmaceuticals, LLC Schaumburg, IL 60173 451106D/Revised: September 2010
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for varioustypes of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefreesolutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases wherevasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics followingarthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumesand concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia anddegree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases thelowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for childrenand for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume andconcentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection willdecrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increasethe segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a moreprofound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quitelow, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directlyproportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should beused.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerveblock, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicatedconcentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space,a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volumerequired for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may havedisplaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning ofunintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient

“epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor,palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beatsper minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoringcan detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administrationof each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, whenfeasible, fractional doses should be administered.In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitableresuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinalfluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGESAdultsFor normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg(3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used withoutepinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommendedthat the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommendeddosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is usedfor non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia.The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients andnon-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutesbetween sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS).For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults.ChildrenIt is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For childrenover 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by thechild’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg(1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) arerecommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children.In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Insome cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the requiredfinal concentration.NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration wheneverthe solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains aprecipitate.

Table 1: Recommended Dosages
Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Pudendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURES Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or ethyl alcohol (70%) is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and therefore are not to be used. Dosage forms listed as Xylocaine-MPF indicate single dose solutions that are Methyl Paraben Free (MPF).
Sensorcaine Mpf

Sensorcaine Mpf

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Sensorcaine should be reduced for young, elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Sensorcaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION). In recommended doses, Sensorcaine (bupivacaine HCl) produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations. 0.25%—when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5%—provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential. 0.75%—produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. The duration of anesthesia with Sensorcaine is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Sensorcaine up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case. These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses up to 400 mg have been reported. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained Sensorcaine is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Sensorcaine is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block). Use in Epidural Anesthesia During epidural administration of Sensorcaine, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single dose ampules and single dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures. Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks See PRECAUTIONS. Unused portions of solutions in single dose containers should be discarded, since this product form contains no preservatives. TABLE 1. DOSAGE RECOMMENDATIONS — SENSORCAINE (bupivacaine HCl) INJECTIONS Each Dose Type of Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Motor Block (1) Local Infiltration 0.25% (4) up to max. up to max. _ Epidural 0.75% (2,4) 10 to 20 75 to 150 complete 0.5% (4) 10 to 20 50 to 100 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 10 to 20 25 to 50 partial to moderate Caudal 0.5% (4) 15 to 30 75 to 150 moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 15 to 30 37.5 to 75 moderate Peripheral Nerves 0.5% (4) 5 to max. 25 to max. moderate to complete 0.25% (4) 5 to max. 12.5 to max. moderate to complete Retrobulbar (3) 0.75% (4) 2 to 4 15 to 30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20 to 50 50 to 125 _ Epidural (3) 0.5% 2 to 3 10 to 15 _ Test Dose w/epi 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 10 to 15 mcg epinephrine (see PRECAUTIONS) 1 With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. 2 For single dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetric anesthesia. 3 See PRECAUTIONS. 4 Solutions with or without epinephrine. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The dosage of Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 23.4%, as an additive in parenteral fluid therapy is predicated on specific requirements of the patient after necessary clinical and laboratory information is considered and correlated. The appropriate volume is then withdrawn for proper dilution. Having determined the milliequivalents of sodium chloride to be added, divide by four to calculate the numbers of milliliters (mL) of sodium chloride to be used. Withdraw this volume aseptically and transfer the additive solution into appropriate intravenous solutions such as 5% Dextrose Injection. The properly diluted solutions may be given intravenously.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Terbutaline Sulfate

Terbutaline Sulfate

Terbutaline Sulfate Injection, USP should be used only for subcutaneous administration and not intravenous infusion. Sterility and accurate dosing cannot be assured if the vials are not used in accordance with DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION.Discard unused portion after single patient use.The usual subcutaneous dose of Terbutaline Sulfate Injection, USP is 0.25 mg injected into the lateral deltoid area. If significant clinical improvement does not occur within 15 to 30 minutes, a second dose of 0.25 mg may be administered. If the patient then fails to respond within another 15 to 30 minutes, other therapeutic measures should be considered. The total dose within 4 hours should not exceed 0.5 mg.Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefree solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should be used.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered.
In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter. MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES Adults For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Table 1: Recommended Dosages Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Pudendal 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURES Disinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or ethyl alcohol (70%) is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and therefore are not to be used. Dosage forms listed as Xylocaine-MPF indicate single dose solutions that are Methyl Paraben Free (MPF).
Calcium Chloride

Calcium Chloride

The usual adult dose of this preparation varies from 5 to 10 mL at intervals of 1 to 3 days. In cardiac resuscitation, the usual dose is 2 to 4 mL injected into the ventricular cavity. Care should be taken to avoid injection into the cardiac muscle. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate Injection, USP may be administered subcutaneously, intramuscularlyor intravenously. The average adult dose is 0.5 mg (5 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution), range 0.4 to0.6 mg (4 to 6 mL). As an antisialogogue it is usually injected intramuscularly prior to induction ofanesthesia. This produces only minimal blocking of vagal activity. In children, the dosage rangesfrom 0.1 mg (2 mL of a 0.05 mg solution) in the newborn to 0.6 mg (6 mL of a 0.1 mg/mLsolution) in a child age 12 years, injected subcutaneously 30 minutes before surgery. Duringsurgery, the drug is given intravenously when reduction in pulse rate and cessation of cardiac actionare due to increased vagal activity; however, if the anesthetic is cyclopropane, doses less than0.4 mg should be used and should be given slowly to avoid the possible production of ventriculararrhythmia. Usual doses are used to reduce severe bradycardia and syncope associated withhyperactive carotid sinus reflex. For bradyarrhythmias the usual intravenous adult dosage rangesfrom 0.4 to 1 mg (4 to 10 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) every one to two hours as needed; largerdoses up to a maximum of 2 mg may be required. In children, intravenous dosage ranges from0.01 to 0.03 mg (0.2 to 0.6 mL of a 0.05 mg/mL solution) per kg of body weight. Atropine is also aspecific antidote for cardiovascular collapse resulting from injudicious administration of cholineester. When cardiac arrest has occurred, external cardiac massage or other method of resuscitationis required to distribute the drug after intravenous injection.In anticholinesterase poisoning from exposure to insecticides, large doses of at least 2 to 3 mg(20 to 30 mL of a 0.1 mg/mL solution) should be administered parenterally and repeated until signsof atropine intoxication appear. In the “rapid” type of mushroom poisoning, atropine should begiven in doses sufficient to control parasympathomimetic signs before coma and cardiovascularcollapse supervene.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discolorationprior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Hydroxyzine

Hydroxyzine

The recommended dosages for hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution are:
For adult psychiatric and emotional emergencies, including acute alcoholism IM: 50-100 mg stat., and q. 4-6h., p.r.n. Nausea and vomiting excluding nausea and vomiting of pregnancy Adults: 25-100 mg IMChildren: 0.5mg/lb body weight IM Pre- and postoperative adjunctive medication. Adults: 25-100 mg IM Children: 0.5mg/lb body weight IM Pre- and postpartum adjunctive therapy 25-100 mg IM As with all potent medications, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient's response to therapy. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OF THE ADMINISTRATION AND SITE OF SELECTION SEE PRECAUTIONS SECTION. NOTE: Hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution may be administered without further dilution. Patients may be started on intramuscular therapy when indicated. They should be maintained on oral therapy whenever this route is practicable. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Hydroxyzine

Hydroxyzine

The recommended dosages for hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution are:
For adult psychiatric and emotional emergencies, including acute alcholism IM: 50-100 mg stat., and q. 4-6h., p.r.n. Nausea and vomiting excluding nausea and vomiting of pregnancy Adults:25-200 mg IMChildren: 0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre- and postoperative adjunctive medication Adults:25-200 mg IM Children: 0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre-and postpartum adjunctive therapy 25-100 mg IM As with all potent medications, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient's response to therapy. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OF THE ADMINISTRATION AND SITE OF SELECTION SEE PRECAUTIONS SECTION. NOTE: Hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution may be administered without further dilution. Patients may be started on intramuscular therapy when indicated. They should be maintained on oral therapy whenever this route is practicable. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Hydroxyzine

Hydroxyzine

The recommended dosages for hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution are:
For adult psychiatric and emotional emergencies, including acute alcoholism IM: 50-100 mg stat., and q. 4-6 hy., p.r.n. Nausea and vomiting excluding nausea and vomiting of pregnancey Adults: 25-100 mg IMChildren: 0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre-and postoperative adjunctive medication Adults: 25-100 mg IM Children: 0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre-and postpartum adjunctive therapy 25-100 mg IM As with all potent medications, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient's response to therapy. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OF THE ADMINISTRATION AND SITE OF SELECTION SEE PRECAUTIONS SECTION. NOTE: Hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution may be administered without further dilution. Patients may be started on intramuscular therapy when indicated. They should be maintained on oral therapy whenever this route is practicable. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefree solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease.The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a more profound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected.For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should be used.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent.In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGES Adults For normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults. Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the required final concentration. NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Table 1: Recommended Dosages Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Prudental 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 *Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome). THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED.
Hydroxyzine

Hydroxyzine

The recommended dosages for hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution are:
For adult psychiatric and emotional emergencies, including acute alcoholism: IM: 50-100 mg sta., and q. 406h., p.r.n. Nausea and vomiting excluding nausea and vomiting of pregnancy Adults: 25-100 mg IMChildren:0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre- and postoperative adjunctive medication Adults: 25-100 mg IM Children:0.5 mg/lb body weight IM Pre- and postpartum adjunctive therapy 25-100 mg IM As with all potent medications, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient's response to therapy. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OF THE ADMINISTRATION AND SITE OF SELECTION SEE PRECAUTIONS SECTION. NOTE: Hydroxyzine hydrochloride intramuscular solution may be administered without further dilution. Patients may be started on intramuscular therapy when indicated. They should be maintained on oral therapy whenever this route is practicable. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Thiamine Hydrochloride

Thiamine Hydrochloride

“Wet” beriberi with myocardial failure must be treated as an emergency cardiac condition, and thiamine must be administered slowly by the IV route in this situation (see WARNINGS).

In the treatment of beriberi, 10 to 20 mg of thiamine hydrochloride are given IM three times daily for as long as two weeks. (See WARNINGS regarding repeated injection of thiamine.) An oral therapeutic multivitamin preparation containing 5 to 10 mg thiamine, administered daily for one month, is recommended to achieve body tissue saturation.

Infantile beriberi that is mild may respond to oral therapy, but if collapse occurs, doses of 25 mg may cautiously be given IV.

Poor dietary habits should be corrected and an abundant and well-balanced dietary intake should be prescribed.

Patients with neuritis of pregnancy in whom vomiting is severe enough to preclude adequate oral therapy should receive 5 to 10 mg of thiamine hydrochloride IM daily.

In the treatment of Wernicke-Korsakoff syndrome, thiamine hydrochloride has been administered IV in an initial dose of 100 mg, followed by IM doses of 50 to 100 mg daily until the patient is consuming a regular, balanced diet. (See WARNINGS regarding repeated injections of thiamine.)

Patients with marginal thiamine status to whom dextrose is being administered should receive 100 mg thiamine hydrochloride in each of the first few liters of IV fluid to avoid precipitating heart failure.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Phenylephrine Hydrochlo...

Phenylephrine Hydrochloride

Phenylephrine hydrochloride is generally injected subcutaneously, intramuscularly, slowly intravenously, or in dilute solution as a continuous intravenous infusion. In patients with paroxysmal supraventricular tachycardia and, if indicated, in case of emergency, phenylephrine hydrochloride is administered directly intravenously. The dose should be adjusted according to the pressor response.
Dosage Calculations Use Dose Required Phenylephrine HCl Injection 1% 10 mg 1 mL 5 mg 0.5 mL 1 mg 0.1 mL For convenience in intermittent intravenous administration, dilute 1 mL phenylephrine hydrochloride 1% with 9 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, to yield 0.1% phenylephrine hydrochloride. Use Diluted Dose Required Phenylephrine HCI Injection 0.1% 0.1 mg 0.1 mL 0.2 mg 0.2 mL 0.5 mg 0.5 mL Mild or Moderate Hypotension Subcutaneously or lntramuscularly: Usual dose, from 2 mg to 5 mg. Range, from 1 mg to 10 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 5 mg. Intravenously: Usual dose, 0.2 mg. Range, from 0.1 mg to 0.5 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg. Injections should not be repeated more often than every 10 to 15 minutes. A 5 mg intramuscular dose should raise blood pressure for one to two hours. A 0.5 mg intravenous dose should elevate the pressure for about 15 minutes. Severe Hypotension and Shock – Including Drug-Related Hypotension Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intra-aortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, phenylephrine hydrochloride can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement. Hypotension and occasionally severe shock may result from overdosage or idiosyncrasy following the administration of certain drugs, especially adrenergic and ganglionic blocking agents, rauwolfia and veratrum alkaloids, and phenothiazine tranquilizers. Patients who receive a phenothiazine derivative as preoperative medication are especially susceptible to these reactions. As an adjunct in the management of such episodes, phenylephrine hydrochloride is a suitable agent for restoring blood pressure. Higher initial and maintenance doses of phenylephrine hydrochloride are required in patients with persistent or untreated severe hypotension or shock. Hypotension produced by powerful peripheral adrenergic blocking agents, chlorpromazine, or pheochromocytomectomy may also require more intensive therapy. Continuous Infusion – Add 10 mg of the drug (1 mL of 1 percent solution) to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, USP, or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (providing a 1:50,000 solution). To raise the blood pressure rapidly, start the infusion at about 100 μg to 180 μg per minute (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 100 to 180 drops per minute). When the blood pressure is stabilized (at a low normal level for the individual) a maintenance rate of 40 μg to 60 μg per minute usually suffices (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 40 to 60 drops per minute). If the drop size of the infusion system varies from the 20 drops per mL, the dose must be adjusted accordingly. If a prompt initial pressor response is not obtained, additional increments of phenylephrine hydrochloride (10 mg or more) are added to the infusion bottle. The rate of flow is then adjusted until the desired blood pressure level is obtained. (In some cases, a more potent vasopressor, such as norepinephrine bitartrate, may be required.) Hypertension should be avoided. The blood pressure should be checked frequently. Headache and/or bradycardia may indicate hypertension. Arrhythmias are rare. Spinal Anesthesia – Hypotension Routine parenteral use of phenylephrine hydrochloride has been recommended for the prophylaxis and treatment of hypotension during spinal anesthesia. It is best administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly three or four minutes before injection of the spinal anesthetic. The total requirement for high anesthetic levels is usually 3 mg, and for lower levels, 2 mg. For hypotensive emergencies during spinal anesthesia, phenylephrine hydrochloride may be injected intravenously, using an initial dose of 0.2 mg. Any subsequent dose should not exceed the previous dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg and no more than 0.5 mg should be administered in a single dose. To combat hypotension during spinal anesthesia in children, a dose of 0.5 mg to 1 mg per 25 pounds body weight, administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly, is recommended. Prolongation of Spinal Anesthesia The addition of 2 mg to 5 mg of phenylephrine hydrochloride to the anesthetic solution increases the duration of motor block by as much as approximately 50 percent without any increase in the incidence of complications such as nausea, vomiting, or blood pressure disturbances. Vasoconstrictor for Regional Analgesia Concentrations about ten times those employed when epinephrine is used as a vasoconstrictor are recommended. The optimum strength is 1:20,000 (made by adding 1 mg of phenylephrine hydrochloride to every 20 mL of local anesthetic solution). Some pressor responses can be expected when 2 mg or more are injected. Paroxysmal Supraventricular Tachycardia Rapid intravenous injection (within 20 to 30 seconds) is recommended; the initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg, and subsequent doses, which are determined by the initial blood pressure response, should not exceed the preceding dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg, and should never exceed 1 mg.
Calcium Gluconate

Calcium Gluconate

Calcium Gluconate should be administered intravenously either directly or by infusion. The dose is dependent upon the individual requirements of the patient. Calcium Gluconate may also be administered by intermittent infusion at a rate not exceeding 200 mg/min, or by continuous infusion.

DIRECTIONS FOR DISPENSING FROM 100 mL PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE - NOT FOR DIRECT INFUSION.

The 100 mL Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a Pharmacy Admixture Service only. The 100 mL Pharmacy Bulk Package should be suspended (inverted) by its IV hang label in a laminar flow hood or biological safety cabinet. Prior to entering a Pharmacy Bulk Package remove the flip-off seal and cleanse the rubber closure with a suitable antiseptic agent. Entry into the Pharmacy Bulk Package must be made with a sterile transfer set or other sterile dispensing device and the contents dispensed in aliquots using aseptic technique. Use of a syringe needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. ANY UNUSED PORTION MUST BE DISCARDED WITHIN 4 HOURS AFTER INITIAL ENTRY. The date and the time initially opened should be recorded in the space provided on the Pharmacy Bulk Package label.

USUAL DOSAGE:

Adults:      500 mg - 2 grams (5-20mL)

Children:   200-500 mg (2-5 mL)

Infants:      not more than 200 mg (not more than 2 mL)
Dopamine

Dopamine

WARNING: This is a potent drug: It must be diluted before administration to patient.Suggested Dilution: Transfer contents of one or more ampuls or vials by aseptic technique to either 250 mL or 500 mL of one of the following sterile intravenous solutions:

1. Sodium Chloride Injection, USP2. Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP

3. Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP

4. 5% Dextrose in 0.45% Sodium Chloride Solution

5. Dextrose (5%) in Lactated Ringer's Solution

6. Sodium Lactate (# Molar) Injection, USP

7. Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

DOPAMINE has been found to be stable for a minimum of 24 hours after dilution in the sterile intravenous solutions listed above. However, as with all intravenous admixtures, dilution should be made just prior to administration. Do NOT add DOPAMINE Injection to Sodium Bicarbonate or other alkaline intravenous solutions, since the drug is inactivated in alkaline solution. Mixing of dopamine with alteplase in the same container should be avoided as visible particulate matter has been observed. It is recommended that dopamine not be added to amphotericin B solutions because amphotericin B is physically unstable in dopamine-containing solutions.Rate of Administration: DOPAMINE, after dilution, is administered intravenously through a suitable intravenous catheter or needle. An i.v. drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential for controlling the rate of flow in drops/minute. Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic and/or renal response with DOPAMINE. In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized. Administration rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/minute have safely been used in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution.

Suggested Regimen:

1. When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or pulmonary wedge pressure is 14-18 mm Hg.

2. Begin administration of diluted solution at doses of 2-5 mcg/kg/minute DOPAMINE in patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion.In more seriously ill patients, begin administration of diluted solution at doses of 5 mcg/kg/minute DOPAMINE and increase gradually, using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/minute increments, up to 20 to 50 mcg/kg/minute as needed. If doses of DOPAMINE in excess of 50 mcg/kg/minute are required, it is suggested that urine output be checked frequently. Should the urine flow begin to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of DOPAMINE dosage should be considered. Multiclinic trials have shown that more than 50% of the patients were satisfactorily maintained on doses of DOPAMINE less than 20 mcg/kg/minute. In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures or urine flow, additional increments of DOPAMINE may be employed in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion.

3. Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of the blood volume, augmentation of myocardial contractility, and distribution of peripheral perfusion. Dosage of DOPAMINE should be adjusted according to the patient's response, with particular attention to diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of newdysrhythmias as indices for decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage.

4. As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of administration so as to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of drug.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the tehnique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catheterization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.

For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures.

Lubrication for endotracheal intubation Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect.

MAXIMUM DOSAGE No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.

Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75–100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Dopamine Hydrochloride

Dopamine Hydrochloride

WARNING: This is a potent drug: It must be diluted before administration to patient.Suggested Dilution: Transfer contents of one or more ampuls or vials by aseptic technique to either 250 mL or 500 mL of one of the following sterile intravenous solutions:

1. Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

2. Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP

3. Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP

4. 5% Dextrose in 0.45% Sodium Chloride Solution

5. Dextrose (5%) in Lactated Ringer's Solution

6. Sodium Lactate (# Molar) Injection, USP

7. Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

DOPAMINE has been found to be stable for a minimum of 24 hours after dilution in the sterile intravenous solutions listed above. However, as with all intravenous admixtures, dilution should be made just prior to administration. Do NOT add DOPAMINE Injection to Sodium Bicarbonate or other alkaline intravenous solutions, since the drug is inactivated inalkaline solution. Mixing of dopamine with alteplase in the same container should be avoided as visible particulate matter has been observed. It is recommended that dopamine not be added to amphotericin B solutions because amphotericin B is physically unstable in dopamine-containing solutions.

Rate of Administration: DOPAMINE, after dilution, is administered intravenously through a suitable intravenous catheter or needle. An i.v. drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential for controlling the rate of flow in drops/minute. Each patient must be individually titrated to the desired hemodynamic and/or renal response with DOPAMINE. In titrating to the desired increase in systolic blood pressure, the optimum dosage rate for renal response may be exceeded, thus necessitating a reduction in rate after the hemodynamic condition is stabilized. Administration rates greater than 50 mcg/kg/minute have safely been used in advanced circulatory decompensation states. If unnecessary fluid expansion is of concern, adjustment of drug concentration may be preferred over increasing the flow rate of a less concentrated dilution.

Suggested Regimen:

1. When appropriate, increase blood volume with whole blood or plasma until central venous pressure is 10 to 15 cm H2O or    pulmonary wedge pressure is 14-18 mm Hg.

2. Begin administration of diluted solution at doses of 2-5 mcg/kg/minute DOPAMINE in patients who are likely to respond to modest increments of heart force and renal perfusion.    In more seriously ill patients, begin administration of diluted solution at doses of 5 mcg/kg/minute DOPAMINE and increase gradually, using 5 to 10 mcg/kg/minute increments, up to 20     to 50 mcg/kg/minute as needed. If doses of DOPAMINE in excess of 50 mcg/kg/minute are required, it is suggested that urine output be checked frequently. Should the urine flow begin     to decrease in the absence of hypotension, reduction of DOPAMINE dosage should be considered. Multiclinic trials have shown that more than 50% of the patients were satisfactorily         maintained on doses of DOPAMINE less than 20 mcg/kg/minute. In patients who do not respond to these doses with adequate arterial pressures or urine flow, additional increments of         DOPAMINE may be employed in an effort to produce an appropriate arterial pressure and central perfusion.

3. Treatment of all patients requires constant evaluation of therapy in terms of the blood volume, augmentation of myocardial contractility, and distribution of peripheral perfusion. Dosage of     DOPAMINE should be adjusted according to the patient's response, with particular attention to diminution of established urine flow rate, increasing tachycardia or development of new    dysrhythmias as indices for decreasing or temporarily suspending the dosage.

4. As with all potent intravenously administered drugs, care should be taken to control the rate of administration so as to avoid inadvertent administration of a bolus of drug. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the tehnique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catheterization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.

For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures.

Lubrication for endotracheal intubation Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect.

MAXIMUM DOSAGE No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.

Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75–100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil injection is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and normal saline solutions. If flumazenil injection is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil injection should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil injection should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation:

Adult Patients:

For the reversal of sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possiblility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric Patients:

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients:

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients:

For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil injection. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil injection, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil injection, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil injection is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and Handling:

Flumazenil injection is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when perparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration, and it is recommended in emergency situations. Since the duration of action of some narcotics may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance and repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% or Dextrose Injection 5%. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient's response. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high-molecular-weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

USAGE IN ADULTS Narcotic Overdose—Known or Suspected An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at 2 to 3 minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of narcotic-induced or partial narcotic-induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.Postoperative Narcotic Depression For the partial reversal of narcotic depression following the use of narcotics during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone hydrochloride should be titrated according to the patients response. Naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal—i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating, or circulatory stress.Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one- to two-hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short- or longacting) and time interval since last administration of narcotic. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.USAGE IN CHILDREN Narcotic Overdose—Known or Suspected The usual initial dose in children is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, naloxone may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, naloxone hydrochloride injection can be diluted with sterile water for injection.Postoperative Narcotic Depression Follow the recommendations and cautions under "Adult Postoperative Depression." For the initial reversal of respiratory depression naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two- to three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.USAGE IN NEONATES When using naloxone hydrochloride injection in Neonates a product containing 0.02 mg/mL should be used.

Narcotic-Induced Depression The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative narcotic depression.
Sodium Chloride

Sodium Chloride

The volume of the preparation to be used for diluting or dissolving any drug for injection, is dependent on the vehicle concentration, dose and route of administration as recommended by the manufacturer. This parenteral should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Adults:Single Direct Intravenous Injection (bolus): ONLY THE 5 mL, 50 MG or 100 MG DOSAGE SIZES should be used for direct intravenous injection. The usual dose is 50 to 100 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.70 to 1.4 mg/kg; 0.32 to 0.63 mg/lb) administered intravenously under ECG monitoring. This dose may be administered at the rate of approximately 25 to 50 mg/min (0.35 to 0.70 mg/kg/min; 0.16 to 0.32 mg/lb/min). Sufficient time should be allowed to enable a slow circulation to carry the drug to the site of action. If the initial injection of 50 to 100 mg does not produce a desired response, a second dose may be injected after five minutes. NO MORE THAN 200 TO 300 MG OF LIDOCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED DURING A ONE HOUR PERIOD.Continuous Intravenous Infusion: Following bolus administration, intravenous infusions of lidocaine hydrochloride may be initiated at the rate of 1 to 4 mg/min of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.014 to 0.057 mg/kg/min; 0.006 to 0.026 mg/lb/min). The rate of intravenous infusions should be reassessed as soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stable or at the earliest signs of toxicity. It should rarely be necessary to continue intravenous infusions of lidocaine for prolonged periods. Solutions for intravenous infusion may be prepared by the addition of one gram (or two grams) of lidocaine hydrochloride to one liter of 5% dextrose in water using aseptic technique. Approximately a 0.1% (or 0.2%) solution will result from this procedure; that is, each milliliter will contain approximately 1 mg (or 2 mg) of lidocaine hydrochloride. In those cases in which fluid restriction is medically appropriate, a more concentrated solution may be prepared. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP has been found to be chemically stable for 24 hours after dilution in 5% dextrose in water. However, as with all intravenous admixtures, dilution of the solution should be made just prior to its administration. When administering lidocaine hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use aprecision volume control I.V. set.Pediatric: Controlled clinical studies in the pediatric population to establish dosing schedules have not been conducted. The American Heart Association’s Standards and Guidelines recommends a bolus dose of 1 mg/kg, and an infusion rate of between 20-50 mg/kg/min for prolonged therapy. When drug clearance is reduced, as in patients with shock, congestive heart failure or cardiac arrest, the infusion rate should not exceed 20 mg/kg/min.NOTE: Regarding Prolonged Infusions: There are data that indicate the half-life may be 3 hours or longer following infusions of greater than 24 hours in duration. Do not use if solution is discolored or cloudy. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Adults:Single Direct Intravenous Injection (bolus): ONLY THE 5 mL, 50 MG or 100 MG DOSAGE SIZES should be used for direct intravenous injection. The usual dose is 50 to 100 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.70 to 1.4 mg/kg; 0.32 to 0.63 mg/lb) administered intravenously under ECG monitoring. This dose may be administered at the rate of approximately 25 to 50 mg/min (0.35 to 0.70 mg/ kg/min; 0.16 to 0.32 mg/lb/min). Sufficient time should be allowed to enable a slow circulation to carry the drug to the site of action. If the initial injection of 50 to 100 mg does not produce a desired response, a second dose may be injected after five minutes. NO MORE THAN 200 TO 300 MG OF LIDOCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED DURING A ONE HOUR PERIOD.

Continuous Intravenous Infusion: Following bolus administration, intravenous infusions of lidocaine hydrochloride may be initiated at the rate of 1 to 4 mg/min of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.014 to 0.057 mg/kg/min; 0.006 to 0.026 mg/lb/min). The rate of intravenous infusions should be reassessed as soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stable or at the earliest signs of toxicity. It should rarely be necessary to continue intravenous infusions of lidocaine for prolonged periods. Solutions for intravenous infusion may be prepared by the addition of one gram (or two grams) of lidocaine hydrochloride to one liter of 5% dextrose in water using aseptic technique. Approximately a 0.1% (or 0.2%) solution will result from this procedure; that is, each milliliter will contain approximately 1 mg (or 2 mg) of lidocaine hydrochloride. In those cases in which fluid restriction is medically appropriate, a more concentrated solution may be prepared. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP has been found to be chemically stable for 24 hours after dilution in 5% dextrose in water. However, as with all intravenous admixtures, dilution of the solution should be made just prior to its administration. When administering lidocaine hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use a precision volume control I.V. set.

Pediatric: Controlled clinical studies in the pediatric population to establish dosing schedules have not been conducted. The American Heart Association’s Standards and Guidelines recommends a bolus dose of 1 mg/kg, and an infusion rate of between 20-50 mg/kg/ min for prolonged therapy. When drug clearance is reduced, as in patients with shock, congestive heart failure or cardiac arrest, the infusion rate should not exceed 20 mg/kg/min.

NOTE: Regarding Prolonged Infusions: There are data that indicate the half-life may be 3 hours or longer following infusions of greater than 24 hours in duration. Do not use if solution is discolored or cloudy. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride

Adults:Single Direct Intravenous Injection (bolus): ONLY THE 5 mL, 50 MG or 100 MG DOSAGE SIZES should be used for direct intravenous injection. The usual dose is 50 to 100 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.70 to 1.4 mg/kg; 0.32 to 0.63 mg/lb) administered intravenously under ECG monitoring. This dose may be administered at the rate of approximately 25 to 50 mg/min (0.35 to 0.70 mg/kg/min; 0.16 to 0.32 mg/lb/min). Sufficient time should be allowed to enable a slow circulation to carry the drug to the site of action. If the initial injection of 50 to 100 mg does not produce a desired response, a second dose may be injected after five minutes. NO MORE THAN 200 TO 300 MG OF LIDOCAINE HYDROCHLORIDE SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED DURING A ONE HOUR PERIOD.Continuous Intravenous Infusion: Following bolus administration, intravenous infusions of lidocaine hydrochloride may be initiated at the rate of 1 to 4 mg/min of lidocaine hydrochloride (0.014 to 0.057 mg/kg/min; 0.006 to 0.026 mg/lb/min). The rate of intravenous infusions should be reassessed as soon as the patient’s basic cardiac rhythm appears to be stable or at the earliest signs of toxicity. It should rarely be necessary to continue intravenous infusions of lidocaine for prolonged periods. Solutions for intravenous infusion may be prepared by the addition of one gram (or two grams) of lidocaine hydrochloride to one liter of 5% dextrose in water using aseptic technique. Approximately a 0.1% (or 0.2%) solution will result from this procedure; that is, each milliliter will contain approximately 1 mg (or 2 mg) of lidocaine hydrochloride. In those cases in which fluid restriction is medically appropriate, a more concentrated solution may be prepared. Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection, USP has been found to be chemically stable for 24 hours after dilution in 5% dextrose in water. However, as with all intravenous admixtures, dilution of the solution should be made just prior to its administration. When administering lidocaine hydrochloride (or any potent medication) by continuous intravenous infusion, it is advisable to use aprecision volume control I.V. set.Pediatric: Controlled clinical studies in the pediatric population to establish dosing schedules have not been conducted. The American Heart Association’s Standards and Guidelines recommends a bolus dose of 1 mg/kg, and an infusion rate of between 20-50 mg/kg/min for prolonged therapy. When drug clearance is reduced, as in patients with shock, congestive heart failure or cardiac arrest, the infusion rate should not exceed 20 mg/kg/min.NOTE: Regarding Prolonged Infusions: There are data that indicate the half-life may be 3 hours or longer following infusions of greater than 24 hours in duration. Do not use if solution is discolored or cloudy. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Dipyridamole

Dipyridamole

The dose of intravenous Dipyridamole Injection as an adjunct to thallium myocardial perfusion imaging should be adjusted according to the weight of the patient. The recommended dose is 0.142 mg/kg/min (0.57 mg/kg total) infused over 4 minutes. Although the maximum tolerated dose has not been determined, clinical experience suggests that a total dose beyond 60 mg is not needed for any patient.Prior to intravenous administration, Dipyridamole Injection should be diluted in at least a 1:2 ratio with sodium chloride injection 0.45%, sodium chloride injection 0.9% or dextrose injection 5% for a total volume of approximately 20 to 50 mL. Infusion of undiluted dipyridamole may cause local irritation. Thallium-201 should be injected within 5 minutes following the 4-minute infusion of dipyridamole. Do not mix Dipyridamole Injection with other drugs in the same syringe or infusion container.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Aminophylline

Aminophylline

General Considerations: The steady-state serum theophylline concentration is a function of the infusion rate and the rate of theophylline clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance. For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects. When theophylline is used as an acute bronchodilator, the goal of obtaining a therapeutic serum concentration is best accomplished with an intravenous loading dose. Because of rapid distribution into body fluids, the serum concentration (C) obtained from an initial loading dose (LD) is related primarily to the volume of distribution (V), the apparent space into which the drug diffuses:C = LD/VIf a mean volume of distribution of about 0.5 L/kg is assumed (actual range is 0.3 to 0.7 L/kg), each mg/kg (ideal body weight) of theophylline administered as a loading dose over 30 minutes results in an average 2 mcg/mL increase in serum theophylline concentration. Therefore, in a patient who has received no theophylline in the previous 24 hours, a loading dose of intravenous theophylline of 4.6 mg/kg (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline), calculated on the basis of ideal body weight and administered over 30 minutes, on average, will produce a maximum post-distribution serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 6-16 mcg/mL. When a loading dose becomes necessary in the patient who has already received theophylline, estimation of the serum concentration based upon the history is unreliable, and an immediate serum level determination is indicated. The loading dose can then be determined as follows:D = (Desired C - Measured C) (V)where D is the loading dose, C is the serum theophylline concentration, and V is the volume of distribution. The mean volume of distribution can be assumed to be 0.5 L/kg and the desired serum concentration should be conservative (e.g., 10 mcg/mL) to allow for the variability in the volume of distribution. A loading dose should not be given before obtaining a serum theophylline concentration if the patient has received any theophylline in the previous 24 hours. A serum concentration obtained 30 minutes after an intravenous loading dose, when distribution is complete, can be used to assess the need for and size of subsequent loading doses, if clinically indicated, and for guidance of continuing therapy. Once a serum concentration of 10 to 15 mcg/mL has been achieved with the use of a loading dose(s), a constant intravenous infusion is started. The rate of administration is based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters for the population and calculated to achieve a target serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL (see Table V). For example, in non-smoking adults, initiation of a constant intravenous theophylline infusion of 0.4 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline) at the completion of the loading dose, on average, will result in a steady-state concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 7-26 mcg/mL. The mean and range of steady-state serum concentrations are similar when the average child (age 1 to 9 years) is given a loading dose of 4.6 mg/kg theophylline (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline) followed by a constant intravenous infusion of 0.8 mg/kg/hr (1.0 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline). Since there is large interpatient variability in theophylline clearance, serum concentrations will rise or fall when the patient’s clearance is significantly different from the mean population value used to calculate the initial infusion rate. Therefore, a second serum concentration should be obtained one expected half-life after starting the constant infusion (e.g., approximately 4 hours for children age 1 to 9 and 8 hours for nonsmoking adults; See Table I for the expected half-life in additional patient populations) to determine if the concentration is accumulating or declining from the post loading dose level. If the level is declining as a result of a higher than average clearance, an additional loading dose can be administered and/or the infusion rate increased. In contrast, if the second sample demonstrates a higher level, accumulation of the drug can be assumed, and the infusion rate should be decreased before the concentration exceeds 20 mcg/mL. An additional sample is obtained 12 to 24 hours later to determine if further adjustments are required and then at 24-hour intervals to adjust for changes, if they occur. This empiric method, based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters, will prevent large fluctuations in serum concentration during the most critical period of the patient’s course.In patients with cor pulmonale, cardiac decompensation, or liver dysfunction, or in those taking drugs that markedly reduce theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine), the initial theophylline infusion rate should not exceed 17 mg/hr (21 mg/hr as aminophylline) unless serum concentrations can be monitored at 24-hour intervals. In these patients, 5 days may be required before steady-state is reached.Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.Table V contains initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for final theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.

Table V. Initial Theophylline Infusion Rates Following an Appropriate Loading Dose.

Patient population                        Age                     Theophylline infusion rate

                                                                            (mg/kg/hr)*†

Neonates                              Postnatal age up to 24 days      1 mg/kg q12h/‡

                                           Postnatal age beyond 24 days    1.5 mg/kg q12h/‡

Infants                                 6-52 weeks old                           mg/kg/hr=(0.008)(age in weeks) +

                                                                                              0.21

Young Children                     1-9 years                                    0.8

Older Children                     9-12 years                                    0.7

Adolescents                        12-16 years                                    0.7

(cigarette or marijuana smokers)

Adolescents (nonsmokers)   12-16 years                                 0.5§

Adults                                    16-60 years                               0.4§

(otherwise healthy nonsmokers)

Elderly                                    greater than 60 years               0.3 ı

Cardiac decompensation,                                                       0.2 ı

cor pulmonale, liver

dysfunction, sepsis with

multiorgan failure,

or shock

*To achieve a target concentration of 10 mcg/mL Aminophylline=theophylline/0.8. Use ideal body weight for obese patients.

†Lower initial dosage may be required for patients receiving other drugs that decrease theophylline clearance(e.g., cimetidine).

‡To achieve a target concentration of 7.5 mcg/mL for neonatal apnea.

§Not to exceed 900 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.

ıNot to exceed 400mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose.

Table VI. Final Disage Adjustment Guided by Serum Theophylline Concentration

Peak Serum                                                       Dosage Adjustment

Concentration

less than 9.9 mcg/mL      If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase

                                     infusion rate about 25%. Recheck serum contration after 12 hours in

                                     children and 24 hours in adults for further dosage adjustment.

10 to 14.9 mcg/mL       If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain infusion

                                    rate and recheck serum concentration at 24 hour intervals.¶ If symptoms are

                                     not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional

                                  medications(s) to treatment regimen.

15-19.9 mcg/mL       Consider 10% decrease in infusion rate to provide greater margin of safety

                              even if current dosage is tolerated.¶

20-24.9 mcg/mL       Decrease infusion rate by 25% even if no adverse effects are present.

                                 Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in

                                  adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

25-30mcg/mL            Stop infusion for 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults and decrease

                                  subsequent infusion rate at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present.

                                  Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24 hours in

                                  adults to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, stop infusion and

                                  consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for

                                  Chronic overdosage).

greater than 30 mcg/mL   Stop the infustion and treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for

                                     chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease

                                        infusion rate by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 12 hours

                                        in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment.

¶Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g. sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS).
Intravenous Admixture Incompatibility: Although there have been reports of aminophylline precipitating in acidic media, these reports do not apply to the dilute solutions found in intravenous infusions. Aminophylline injection should not be mixed in a syringe with other drugs but should be added separately to the intravenous solution. When an intravenous solution containing aminophylline is given “piggyback”, the intravenous system already in place should be turned off while the aminophylline is infused if there is a potential problem with admixture incompatibility. Because of the alkalinity of aminophylline containing solutions, drugs known to be alkali labile should be avoided in admixtures. These include epinephrine HCl, norepinephrine bitartrate, isoproterenol HCl and penicillin G potassium. It is suggested that specialized literature be consulted before preparing admixtures with aminophylline and other drugs. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion. Do not use if crystals have separated from solution.
Aminophylline

Aminophylline

General Considerations: The steady-state serum theophylline concentration is a function of the infusion rate and the rate of theophylline clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance. For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects. When theophylline is used as an acute bronchodilator, the goal of obtaining a therapeutic serum concentration is best accomplished with an intravenous loading dose. Because of rapid distribution into body fluids, the serum concentration (C) obtained from an initialloading dose (LD) is related primarily to the volume of distribution (V), the apparent space into which the drug diffuses: C = LD/VIf a mean volume of distribution of about 0.5 L/kg is assumed (actual range is 0.3 to 0.7 L/kg), each mg/kg (ideal body weight) of theophylline administered as a loading dose over 30 minutes results in an average 2 mcg/mL increase in serum theophylline concentration. Therefore, in a patient who has received no theophylline in the previous 24 hours, a loading dose of intravenous theophylline of 4.6 mg/kg (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline), calculated on the basis of ideal body weight and administered over 30 minutes, on average, will produce a maximum post-distribution serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 6-16 mcg/mL. When a loading dose becomes necessary in the patient who has already received theophylline, estimation of the serum concentration based upon the history is unreliable, and an immediate serum level determination is indicated. The loading dose can then be determined as follows:D = (Desired C - Measured C) (V)where D is the loading dose, C is the serum theophylline concentration, and V is the volume of distribution. The mean volume of distribution can be assumed to be 0.5 L/kg and the desired serum concentration should be conservative (e.g., 10 mcg/mL) to allow for the variability in the volume of distribution. A loading dose should not be given before obtaining a serum theophylline concentration if the patient has received any theophylline in the previous 24 hours. A serum concentration obtained 30 minutes after an intravenous loading dose, when distribution is complete, can be used to assess the need for and size of subsequent loading doses, if clinically indicated, and for guidance of continuing therapy. Once a serumconcentration of 10 to 15 mcg/mL has been achieved with the use of a loading dose(s), a constant intravenous infusion is started. The rate of administration is based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters for the population and calculated to achieve a target serum concentration of 10 mcg/mL (see Table V). For example, in non-smoking adults, initiation of a constant intravenous theophylline infusion of 0.4 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline) at the completion of the loading dose, on average, will result in a steadystate concentration of 10 mcg/mL with a range of 7-26 mcg/mL. The mean and range of steady-state serum concentrations are similar when the average child (age 1 to 9 years) is given a loading dose of 4.6 mg/kg theophylline (5.7 mg/kg as aminophylline) followed by a constant intravenous infusion of 0.8 mg/kg/hr (1.0 mg/kg/hr as aminophylline). Since there is large interpatient variability intheophylline clearance, serum concentrations will rise or fall when the patient’s clearance is significantly different from the mean population value used to calculate the initial infusion rate. Therefore, a second serum concentration should be obtained one expected half-life after starting the constant infusion (e.g., approximately 4 hours for children age 1 to 9 and 8 hours for nonsmoking adults; See Table I for the expected half-life in additional patient populations) to determine if the concentration is accumulating or declining from the post loading dose level. If the level is declining as a result of a higher than average clearance, an additional loading dose can be administered and/or the infusion rate increased. In contrast, if the second sample demonstrates a higher level, accumulation of the drug can be assumed, and the infusion rate should be decreased before the concentration exceeds 20 mcg/mL. An additional sampleis obtained 12 to 24 hours later to determine if further adjustments are required and then at 24-hour intervals to adjust for changes, if they occur. This empiric method, based upon mean pharmacokinetic parameters, will prevent large fluctuations in serum concentration during the most critical period of the patient’s course. In patients with cor pulmonale, cardiac decompensation, or liver dysfunction, or in those taking drugs that markedly reduce theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine), the initial theophylline infusion rate should not exceed 17 mg/hr (21 mg/hr as aminophylline) unless serum concentrations can be monitored at 24-hour intervals. In these patients, 5 days may be required before steady-state is reached.Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight. Table V contains initial theophylline infusion rates following an appropriate loading dose recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for final theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
Table V. Initial Theophylline Infusion Rates Following an Appropriate Loading Dose. Patient population Age Theophylline infusion rate (mg/kg/hr)*† Neonates Postnatal age up to 24 daysPostnatal age beyond 24 days 1 mg/kg q 12h/‡1.5 mg/kg q12 h/‡ Infants 6-52 weeks old mg/kg/hr=(0.008) (age in weeks) + 0.21 Young children 1-9 years 0.8 Older children 9-12 years 0.7 Adolescents(cigarette or marijuanasmokers) 12-16 years 0.7 Adolescents (nonsmokers) 12-16 years 0.5 § Adults(otherwise healthynonsmokers) 16-60 years 0.4§ Elderly greater than 60 years 0.3# Cardiac decompensation, cor pulmonale, liverdysfunction, sepsis withmultiorgan failure, or shock 0.2# * To achieve a target concentration of 10 mcg/mL Aminophylline=theophylline/0.8. Use ideal body weight for obese patients. † Lower initial dosage may be required for patients receiving other drugs that decrease theophylline clearance (e.g., cimetidine). ‡ To achieve a target concentration of 7.5 mcg/mL for neonatal apnea. § Not to exceed 900 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose. # Not to exceed 400 mg/day, unless serum levels indicate the need for a larger dose. Table VI. Final Dosage Adjustment Guided by Serum Theophylline Concentration Peak SerumConcentration Dosage Adjustment less than 9.9 mdg/mL If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated,increase infusion rate about 25%. Recheck serum concentrationafter 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adults for further dosageadjustment. 10 to 14.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated,maintain infusion rate and recheck serum concentration at 24 hourintervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage istolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatmentregimen. 15 - 19.9 mcg/mL Consider 10% decrease in infusion rate to provide greater marginof safety even if current dosage is tolerated.¶ 20 - 24.9 mcg/mL Decrease infusion rate by 25% even if no adverse effects arepresent. Recheck serum concentration after 12 hours in childrenand 24 hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment. 25 - 3- mcg/mL Stop infusion for 12 hours in children and 24 hours in adultsand decrease subsequent infusion rate at least 25% even if noadverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 12hours in children and 24 hours in adults to guide further dosageadjustment. If symptomatic, stop infusion and consider whetheroverdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronicoverdosage). greater than 30 mcg/mL Stop the infusion and treat overdose as indicated (seerecommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline issubsequently resumed, decrease infusion rate by at least 50% andrecheck serum concentration after 12 hours in children and 24hours in adults to guide further dosage adjustment. ¶ Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g., sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS). Intravenous Admixture Incompatibility: Although there have been reports of aminophylline precipitating in acidic media, these reports do not apply to the dilute solutions found in intravenous infusions. Aminophylline injection should not be mixed in a syringe with other drugs but should be added separately to the intravenous solution. When an intravenous solution containing aminophylline is given “piggyback”, the intravenous system already in place should be turned off while the aminophylline is infused if there is a potential problem with admixture incompatibility. Because of the alkalinity of aminophylline containing solutions, drugs known to be alkali labile should be avoided in admixtures. These include epinephrine HCl, norepinephrine bitartrate, isoproterenol HCl and penicillin G potassium. It is suggested that specialized literature be consulted before preparing admixtures with aminophylline and other drugs. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not administer unless solution is clear and container is undamaged. Discard unused portion. Do not use if crystals have separated from solution.
Talwin

Talwin

Adults, Excluding Patients in Labor: The recommended single parenteral dose is 30 mg by intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenous route. This may be repeated every 3 to 4 hours. Doses in excess of 30 mg intravenously or 60 mg intramuscularly or subcutaneously are not recommended. Total daily dosage should not exceed 360 mg. Elderly patients may be more sensitive to the analgesic effects of TALWIN than younger patients. Elderly patients generally should be started on low doses of TALWIN and observed closely. The subcutaneous route of administration should be used only when necessary because of possible severe tissue damage at injection sites (see WARNINGS). When frequent injections are needed, the drug should be administered intramuscularly. In addition, constant rotation of injection sites (e.g., the upper outer quadrants of the buttocks, mid-lateral aspects of the thighs, and the deltoid areas) isessential.Patients in Labor: A single, intramuscular 30 mg dose has been most commonly administered. An intravenous 20 mg dose has given adequate pain relief to some patients in labor when contractions become regular, and this dose may be given two or three times at two to three-hour intervals, as needed.Pediatric Patients Excluding Patients Less Than One Year Old: The recommended single parenteral dose as premedication for sedation is 0.5 mg/kg by intramuscular route.CAUTION: TALWIN should not be mixed in the same syringe with soluble barbiturates because precipitation will occur.
Glycopyrrolate

Glycopyrrolate

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (See PRECAUTIONS)Glycopyrrolate injection may be administered intramuscularly, or intravenously, without dilution, in the following indications:Adults:Preanesthetic Medication: The recommended dose of glycopyrrolate injection is 0.004 mg/kg by intramuscular injection, given30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative areadministered.Intraoperative Medication:Glycopyrrolate injection may be used during surgery to counteract drug-induced or vagal reflexes and their associated arrhythmias(e.g., bradycardia). It should be administered intravenously as single doses of 0.1 mg and repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulationsnecessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

Reversal of Neuromuscular Blockade:The recommended dose of glycopyrrolate injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order tominimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may bemixed in the same syringe.Peptic Ulcer:The usual recommended dose of glycopyrrolate injection is 0.1 mg administered at 4-hour intervals, 3 or 4 times daily intravenouslyor intramuscularly. Where more profound effect is required, 0.2 mg may be given. Some patients may need only a single dose, andfrequency of administration should be dictated by patient response up to a maximum of four times daily.Glycopyrrolate injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcers in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS-PediatricUse).Pediatric Patients(see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use)Preanesthetic Medication: The recommended dose of glycopyrrolate injection in pediatric patients is 0.004 mg/kg intramuscularly,given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedativeare administered.Infants:(1 month to 2 years of age) may require up to 0.009 mg/kg.lntraoperative Medication:Because of the long duration of action of glycopyrrolate injection if used as preanesthetic medication, additional glycopyrrolateinjection for anticholinergic effect intraoperatively is rarely needed; in the event it is required the recommended pediatric dose is 0.004mg/kg intravenously, not to exceed 0.1 mg in a single dose which may be repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usualattempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correctparasympathetic imbalance should be performed.Reversal of Neuromuscular Blockade:The recommended pediatric dose of glycopyrrolate injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. Inorder to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection andmay be mixed in the same syringe.Peptic Ulcer:Glycopyrrolate injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS-PediatricUse).NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration wheneversolution and container permit.DILUENT COMPATIBILITIESDextrose 5% and 10% in water, or saline, dextrose 5% in sodium chloride 0.45%, sodium chloride 0.9%, and Ringer's Injection.DILUENT INCOMPATIBILITIESLactated Ringer's solutionADMIXTURE COMPATIBILITIESPhysical Compatibility: This list does not constitute an endorsement of the clinical utility or safety of coadministration ofglycopyrrolate with these drugs. Glycopyrrolate injection is compatible for mixing and injection with the following injectabledosage forms: atropine sulfate, USP; Antilirium® (physostigmine salicylate); Benadryl® (diphenhydramine HCl); codeinephosphate, USP; Emete-Con® (benz-quinamide HCl); hydromorphone HCl, USP; Inapsine® (droperidol); Levo-Dromoran®(levorphanol tartrate); lidocaine, USP; meperidine HCl, USP; Mestinon®/Regonol® (pyridostigmine bromide); morphine sulfate,USP; Nubain® (nalbuphine HCl); Numorphan® (oxymorphone HCl); procaine HCl, USP; promethazine HCl, USP; Prostigmin®(neostigmine methylsulfate, USP); scopolamine HBr, USP; Stadol® (butorphanol tartrate); Sublimaze® (fentanyl citrate); Tigan®(trimethobenzamide HCl); and Vistaril® (hydroxyzine HCl). Glycopyrrolate injection may be administered via the tubing of a runninginfusion of normal saline.ADMIXTURE INCOMPATIBILITIESPhysical Incompatibility: Since the stability of glycopyrrolate is questionable above a pH of 6.0 do not combine glycopyrrolateinjection in the same syringe with Brevital® (methohexital Na); Chloromycetin® (chloramphenicol Na succinate); Dramamine®

(dimenhydrinate); Nembutal® (pentobarbital Na); Pentothal® (thiopental Na); Seconal® (secobarbital Na); sodium bicarbonate(Abbott); Valium® (diazepam); Decadron® (dexamethasone Na phosphate); or Talwin® (pentazocine lactate). These mixtures willresult in a pH higher than 6.0 and may result in gas production or precipitation.
Infant Dextrose

Infant Dextrose

When possible, glucose concentrations of greater than 12% should be administered by central vein to reduce the risk for phlebitis and thrombosis. 25% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection. The dosage and constant infusion rate of intravenous dextrose must be selected with caution, particularly in neonates and low birthweight infants, because of the increased risk of hyperglycemia/ hypoglycemia. In the neonate, an injection of 250 to 500 mg (1 to 2 mL)/kg/dose (5 to 10 mL of 25% dextrose in a 5 kg infant) is recommended to control acute symptomatic hypoglycemia (tremors, convulsions,etc.). Larger or repeated single doses (up to 10 or 12 mL of 25% dextrose) may be required in severe cases or older infants. A specimen for blood glucose determination should be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaiting pretreatment test results. Subsequent continuous intravenous infusion of 10% dextrose injection may be needed to stabilize blood glucose levels. Further treatment should be guided by evaluation of the underlying disorder. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Dextrose

Dextrose

For peripheral vein administration: Injection of the solution should be made slowly. The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight/hour. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused ata rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr. In insulin-induced hypoglycemia, intravenous injection of 10 to 25 grams of dextrose (20 to 50 mL of 50% dextrose) is usually adequate. Repeated doses and supportive treatment may be required in severe cases. A specimen for blood glucose determination should be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaiting pretreatment test results.

For central venous administration: For total parenteral nutrition 50% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture with amino acid solutions via an indwelling catheter with the tip positioned in a large central vein, preferably the superior vena cava, or (b) after dilution with sterile water for injection. Dosage should be adjusted to meet individual patient requirements. Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation. The maximum rate of dextrose administration which does not result in glycosuria is the same as cited above. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Dextrose

Dextrose

For peripheral vein administration: Injection of the solution should be made slowly. The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight/hour. About 95% of the dextrose is retained when infused ata rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr. In insulin-induced hypoglycemia, intravenous injection of 10 to 25 grams of dextrose (20 to 50 mL of 50% dextrose) is usually adequate. Repeated doses and supportive treatment may be required in severe cases. A specimen for blood glucose determination should be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaiting pretreatment test results.

For central venous administration: For total parenteral nutrition 50% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture with amino acid solutions via an indwelling catheter with the tip positioned in a large central vein, preferably the superior vena cava, or (b) After dilution with sterile water for injection. Dosage should be adjusted to meet individual patient requirements.Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyte concentrations and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants such evaluation. The maximum rate of dextrose administration which does not result in glycosuria is the same as cited above. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Bupivacaine Hydrochlori...

Bupivacaine Hydrochloride

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).In recommended doses, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations.0.25%# when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5% # provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential.0.75% # produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. The duration of anesthesia with Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case.These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.) Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use. This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 1. Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local Infiltration 0.25%(4) up to max. up to max. - Epidural 0.75%(2,4)0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 10-2010-2010-20 75-15050-10025-50 completemoderate to completepartial to complete Caudal 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 15-3015-30 75-15037.5-75 moderate to completemoderate Peripheral nerves 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 5 to max.5 to max. 25 to max.12.5 to max. moderate to completemoderate to complete Retrobulbar(3) 0.75%(4) 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Epidural(3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi 10-15 micrograms epinephrine) (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Dextrose

Dextrose

For peripheral vein administration:Injection of the solution should be made slowly.The maximum rate at which dextrose can be infused without producing glycosuria is 0.5 g/kg of body weight/hour. About 95% of thedextrose is retained when infused ata rate of 0.8 g/kg/hr.In insulin-induced hypoglycemia, intravenous injection of 10 to 25 grams of dextrose (20 to 50 mL of 50% dextrose) is usuallyadequate. Repeated doses and supportive treatment may be required in severe cases. A specimen for blood glucose determinationshould be taken before injecting the dextrose. In such emergencies, dextrose should be administered promptly without awaitingpretreatment test results.For central venous administration:For total parenteral nutrition 50% Dextrose Injection, USP is administered by slow intravenous infusion (a) after admixture withamino acid solutions via an indwelling catheter with the tip positioned in a large central vein, preferably the superior vena cava, or (b)after dilution with sterile water for injection. Dosage should be adjusted to meet individual patient requirements.Clinical evaluation and periodic laboratory determinations are necessary to monitor changes in fluid balance, electrolyteconcentrations and acid-base balance during prolonged parenteral therapy or whenever the condition of the patient warrants suchevaluation.The maximum rate of dextrose administration which does not result in glycosuria is the same as cited above.Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, wheneversolution and container permit. See CONTRAINDICATIONS.
Bupivacaine Hydrochlori...

Bupivacaine Hydrochloride

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).In recommended doses, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations. 0.25%# when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions. 0.5% # provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential. 0.75% # produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. The duration of anesthesia with Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case. These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by theaddition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not recommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block).Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures.Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular or subarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.) Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use.This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

Table 1.
Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local infiltration 0.25%(4) up to max. up to max. - Epidural 0.75%(2,4)0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 10-2010-2010-20 75-15050-10025-50 completemoderate to completepartial to complete Caudal 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 15-3015-30 75-15037.5-75 moderate to completemoderate Peripheral nerves 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 5 to max.5 to max. 25 to max.12.5 to max. moderate to completemoderate to complete Retrobulbar(3) 0.75%(4) 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Epidural(3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi (10-15 micrograms epinephrine (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the tehnique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catheterization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.

For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures.

Lubrication for endotracheal intubation Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect.

MAXIMUM DOSAGE No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.

Children It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75–100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Gentamicin

Gentamicin

Gentamicin Sulfate Injection, USP may be given intramuscularly or by intravenous infusion. The patient’s pretreatment body weight should be obtained for calculation of correct dosage. The dosage of aminoglycosides in obese patients should be based on an estimate of the lean body mass. It is desirable to limit the duration of treatment with aminoglycosides to short term.

Patients with Normal Renal FunctionAdults: The recommended dosage of gentamicin sulfate for patients with serious infections and normal renal function is 3 mg/kg/ day, administered in three equal doses every eight hours (Table 1). For patients with life-threatening infections, dosages up to 5 mg/ kg/day may be administered in three or four equal doses. The dosage should be reduced to 3 mg/kg/day as soon as clinically indicated (Table 1). It is desirable to measure both peak and trough serum concentrations of gentamicin to determine the adequacy and safety of the dosage. When such measurements are feasible, they should be carried out periodically during therapy to assure adequate but not excessive drug levels. For example, the peak concentration (at 30 to 60 minutes after intramuscular injection) is expected to be in the range of 4 to 6 mcg/mL. When monitoring peak concentrations after intramuscular or intravenous administration, dosage should be adjusted so that prolonged levels above 12 mcg/mL are avoided. When monitoring trough concentrations (just prior to the next dose), dosage should be adjusted so that levels above 2 mcg/mL are avoided. Determination of the adequacy of a serum level for a particular patient must take into consideration the susceptibility of the causative organism, the severity of the infection, and the status of the patient’s host-defense mechanisms. In patients with extensive burns, altered pharmacokinetics may result in reduced serum concentrations of aminoglycosides. In such patients treated with gentamicin, measurement of serum concentrations is recommended as a basis for dosage adjustment.

Children: 6 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (2 to 2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).Infants and Neonates: 7.5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 8 hours).Premature or Full-Term Neonates One Week of Age or Less: 5 mg/kg/day (2.5 mg/kg administered every 12 hours).NOTE: For further information concerning the use of gentamicin in infants and children, see pediatric gentamicin sulfate injection product information.The usual duration of treatment for all patients is seven to ten days. In difficult and complicated infections, a longer course of therapy may be necessary. In such cases monitoring of renal, auditory, and vestibular functions is recommended, since toxicity is more apt to occur with treatment extended for more than ten days. Dosage should be reduced if clinically indicated.

For Intravenous AdministrationThe intravenous administration of gentamicin may be particularly useful for treating patients with bacterial septicemia or those in shock. It may also be the preferred route of administration for some patients with congestive heart failure, hematologic disorders, severe burns, or those with reduced muscle mass. For intermittent intravenous administration in adults, a single-dose of gentamicin sulfate may be diluted in 50 to 200 mL of sterile isotonic saline solution or in a sterile solution of 5% dextrose in water, in infants and children, the volume of diluent should be less. The solution may be infused over a period of one-half to two hours. The recommended dosage for intravenous and intramuscular administration is identical. Gentamicin sulfate should not be physically premixed with other drugs, but should be administered separately in accordance with the recommended route of administration and dosage schedule.

Patients with Impaired Renal FunctionDosage must be adjusted in patients with impaired renal function to assure therapeutically adequate, but not excessive blood levels. Whenever possible, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be monitored. One method of dosage adjustment is to increase the interval between administration of the usual doses. Since the serum creatinine concentration has a high correlation with the serum half-life of gentamicin, this laboratory test may provide guidance for adjustment of the interval between doses. The interval between doses (in hours) may be approximated by multiplying the serum creatinine level (mg/100 mL) by 8. For example, a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 60 mg (1 mg/kg) every 16 hours (2 x 8). In patients with serious systemic infections and renal impairment, it may be desirable to administer the antibiotic more frequently but in reduced dosage. In such patients, serum concentrations of gentamicin should be measured so that adequate, but not excessive levels result. A peak and trough concentration measured intermittently during therapy will provide optimal guidance for adjusting dosage. After the usual initial dose, a rough guide for determining reduced dosage at eight-hour intervals is to divide the normally recommended dose by the serum creatinine level (Table 2). For example, after an initial dose of 60 mg (1 mg/kg), a patient weighing 60 kg with a serum creatinine level of 2.0 mg/100 mL could be given 30 mg every eight hours (60 ÷ 2). It should be noted that the status of renal function may be changing over the course of the infectious process. It is important to recognize that deteriorating renal function may require a greater reduction in dosage than that specified in the above guidelines for patients with stable renal impairment.

In adults with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis, the amount of gentamicin removed from the blood may vary depending upon several factors including the dialysis method used. An eight-hour hemodialysis may reduce serum concentrations of gentamicin by approximately 50%. The recommended dose at the end of each dialysis period is 1 to 1.7 mg/kg depending upon the severity of infection. In children, a dose of 2 mg/kg may be administered. The above dosage schedules are not intended as rigid recommendations but are provided as guides to dosage when the measurement of gentamicin serum levels is not feasible. A variety of methods are available to measure gentamicin concentrations in body fluids; these include microbiologic, enzymatic and radioimmunoassay techniques. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate Injection, USP in the Ansyr Syringe is intended for intravenous use, but may be administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Its use usually requires titration, using heart rate, PR interval, blood pressure and/or patient’s symptoms as a guide for having reached an appropriate dose.

Adults

Initial single doses in adults vary from around 0.5 mg to 1 mg (5-10 mL of the 0.1 mg/mL solution for antisialagogue and other antivagal effects, to 2 to 3 mg (20-30 mL) of the 0.1 mg/mL solution) as an antidote for organophosporous or muscarinic mushroom poisoning. When used as an antidote, the 2 to 3 mg dose should be repeated no less often than every 20 to 30 minutes until the signs of poisoning are sufficiently lessened or signs of atropine poisoning (see ADVERSE REACTIONS and OVERDOSAGE) occur.

When the recurrent use of atropine is essential in patients with coronary artery disease, the total dose should be restricted to 2 to 3 mg (maximum 0.03 to 0.04 mg/kg) to avoid the detrimental effects of atropine-induced tachycardia on myocardial oxygen demand. For patients with bradyasystolic cardiac arrest, a 1 mg dose of atropine is administered intravenously and is repeated every 3-5 minutes if asystole persists. Three milligrams (0.04 mg/kg) given I.V. is a fully vagolytic dose in most patients. The administration of this dose of atropine should be reserved for patients with bradyasystolic cardiac arrest. Administration of less than 0.5 mg can produce a paradoxical bradycardia because of the central or peripheral parasympathomimetic effects of low doses in adults.

Endotracheal administration of atropine can be used in patients without I.V. access. The recommended adult dose of atropine for endotracheal administration is 1 to 2 mg diluted to a total not to exceed 10 mL of sterile water or normal saline.

Titration intervals of one or two hours are recommended in circumstances that are not life-threatening.

Pediatrics

Dosing information in pediatric populations has not been well studied. Usage history of initial dose has been in the range of 0.01 to 0.03 mg/kg body weight.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and/or discoloration prior to administration (see PRECAUTIONS).
Cortrosyn

Cortrosyn

CORTROSYN™ (cosyntropin) for Injection may be administered intramuscularly or as a direct intravenous injection when used as a rapid screening test of adrenal function. It may also be given as an intravenous infusion over a 4 to 8 hour period to provide a greater stimulus to the adrenal glands. Doses of CORTROSYN™ 0.25 to 0.75 mg have been used in clinical studies and a maximal response noted with the smallest dose.A suggested method for a rapid screening test of adrenal function has been described by Wood and Associates (1). A control blood sample of 6 to 7 mL is collected in a heparinized tube. Reconstitute 0.25 mg of CORTROSYN™ with 1mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP and inject intramuscularly. The reconstituted drug product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to injection. Reconstituted CORTROSYN™ should not be retained. In the pediatric population, aged 2 years or less, a dose of 0.125 mg will often suffice. A second blood sample is collected exactly 30 minutes later. Both blood samples should be refrigerated until sent to the laboratory for determination of the plasma cortisol response by some appropriate method. If it is not possible to send them to the laboratory or perform the fluorimetric procedure within 12 hours, then the plasma should be separated and refrigerated or frozen according to need.Two alternative methods of administration are intravenous injection and infusion. CORTROSYN™ can be injected intravenously in 2 to 5 mL of saline over a 2-minute period. When given as an intravenous infusion: CORTROSYN™, 0.25 mg may be added to glucose or saline solutions and given at the rate of approximately 40 micrograms per hour over a 6-hour period. It should not be added to blood or plasma as it is apt to be inactivated by enzymes. Adrenal response may be measured in the usual manner by determining page 3 of 3 urinary steroid excretion before and after treatment or by measuring plasma cortisol levels before and at the end of the infusion. The latter is preferable because the urinary steroid excretion does not always accurately reflect the adrenal or plasma cortisol response to ACTH.The usual normal response in most cases is an approximate doubling of the basal level, provided that the basal level does not exceed the normal range. Patients receiving cortisone, hydrocortisone or spironolactone should omit their pre-test doses on the day selected for testing. Patients taking inadvertent doses of cortisone or hydrocortisone on the test day and patients taking spironolactone or women taking drugs which contain estrogen may exhibit abnormally high basal plasma cortisol levels.A paradoxical response may be noted in the cortisone or hydrocortisone group as seen in a decrease in plasma cortisol values following a stimulating dose of CORTROSYN™.In the spironolactone or estrogen group only a normal incremental response is to be expected. Many patients with normal adrenal function, however, do not respond to the expected degree so that the following criteria have been established to denote a normal response:

1. The control plasma cortisol level should exceed 5 micrograms/100 mL.2. The 30-minute level should show an increment of at least 7 micrograms/100 mL above the basal level.3. The 30-minute level should exceed 18 micrograms/100 mL. Comparable figures have been reported by Greig and co-workers (2).

Plasma cortisol levels usually peak about 45 to 60 minutes after an injection of CORTROSYN™ and some prefer the 60-minute interval for testing for this reason. While it is true that the 60-minute values are usually higher than the 30-minute values, the difference may not be significant enough in most cases to outweigh the disadvantage of a longer testing period. If the 60-minute test period is used, the criterion for a normal response is an approximate doubling of the basal plasma cortisol value.In patients with a raised plasma bilirubin or in patients where the plasma contains free hemoglobin, falsely high fluorescence measurements will result. The test may be performed at any time during the day but because of the physiological diurnal variation of plasma cortisol the criteria listed by Wood cannot apply. It has been shown that basal plasma cortisol levels and the post CORTROSYN™ increment exhibit diurnal changes. However, the 30-minute plasma cortisol level remains unchanged throughout the day so that only this single criterion should be used (3).Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.Reconstituted CORTROSYN™ should not be retained.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues. Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae: Adults: Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required. In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.The doses for the preceding infections may be given by intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis. Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous infusion therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia. Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days. Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
DIRECTIONS FOR USE:Use only freshly prepared solutions. Intramuscular and intravenous injections should be administered within on hour after preparation, since the potency may decrease significantly after this period. For Intramuscular Use Dissolve contents of vial with the amount of Sterile Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection listed in the table below. NDC No. Label Claim Amount ofDiluent to be Added (mL) ApproximateAvailableVolume (mL) ApproximateConcentration(in mg/mL) 63323-387-10 250 mg 0.9 1 250 63323-388-10 500 mg 1.7 2 250 63323-389-10 1 g 3.4 4 250 63323-399-23 2 g 6.8 8 250 While ampicillin for injection 1 g and 2 g vials are primarily for intravenous use, the contents may be administered intramuscularly when the 250 mg or 500 mg vials are unavailable. In such instances, dissolve in 3.4 or 6.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection respectively. The resulting solution will provide a concentration of 250 mg per mL. For Direct Intravenous Use Add 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection to the 250 and 500 mg vials and administer slowly over a 3 to 5 minute period. Ampicillin for Injection, 1 g or 2 g, may also be given by direct intravenous administration. Dissolve in 7.4 or 14.8 mL Sterile Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, respectively, and administer slowly over at least 10 to 15 minutes. CAUTION: More rapid administration may result in convulsive seizures. For Administration by Intravenous Drip Reconstitute as direct above ( For Direct Intravenous Use) prior to diluting with intravenous solution. Stability studies on ampicillin at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicated the drug will lose less than 10% activity at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated. Room Temperature (25 C) Diluent Concentrations Stability Periods Sterile Water for Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 5% Dextrose in Water 10 to 20 mg/mL 2 hours 5% Dextrose in Water up to 2 mg/mL 4 hours 5% Dextrose and 0.45 NaCl Inj. up to 2 mg/mL 4 hours 10% Invert Sugar in Water up to 2 mg/mL 4 hours Lactated Ringer's Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours Refrigerated (4 C) Diluent Concentrations Stability Periods Sterile Water for Injection 30 mg/mL 48 hours Sterile Water for Injection up to 20 mg/mL 72 hours Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% 30 mg/mL 48 hours Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% up to 20 mg/mL 72 hours Lactated Ringer's Injection up to 30 mg/mL 24 hours M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection up to 30 mg/mL 8 hours 5% Dextrose in Water up to 20 mg/mL 4 hours 5% Dextrose and 0.45 NaCl Inj. up to 10 mg/mL 4 hours 10% Invert Sugar up to 20 mg/mL 3 hours Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Heparin Lock Flush

Heparin Lock Flush

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency. (See PRECAUTIONS.) Heparin Lock Flush Solution, USP 10 or 100 USP Units/mL, is injected as a single dose into an intravenous injection device using a volume of solution equivalent to that of the indwelling venipuncture device. A single dose should be injected following venipuncture when the indwelling device is not to be used immediately. After each useof the indwelling venipuncture device for injection or infusion of medication, or withdrawal of blood samples, another dose should be injected to restore the effectiveness of the heparin lock. The amount of heparin solution is sufficient to prevent clotting within the lumen of indwelling venipuncture devices (usually not holding more than 0.2 to 0.3 mL) for up to twenty-four hours. When the indwelling device is used to administer a drug which is incompatible with heparin, the entire heparin lock set should be flushed with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP before and after the medication is administered. Following the second flush, another dose of heparin solution should be injected to restore the effectiveness of the heparin lock. When the indwelling device is used for repeated withdrawal of blood samples for laboratory analyses and the presence of heparin or saline is likely to interfere with or alter results of the desired blood tests, the in situ heparin flush solution should be cleared from the device by aspirating and discarding 1 mL before the desired blood sample is drawn. (See PRECAUTIONS.)
Methylene Blue

Methylene Blue

0.1 to 0.2 mL per kg body weight (0.045 to 0.09 mL per pound body weight). Inject Methylene Blue intravenously very slowly over a period of several minutes.

Methylene blue must be injected intravenously very slowly over a period of several minutes to prevent local high concentration of the compound from producing additional methemoglobin. Do not exceed recommended dosage.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.

Store at 20 degrees-25 degrees C (68 degrees-77 degrees F); excursions permitted to 15 degrees-30 degrees C (59 degrees-86 degrees F) (See USP Controlled Room Temperature).
Dobutamine Hydrochlorid...

Dobutamine Hydrochloride

Note Do not add dobutamine to 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection or to any other strongly alkaline solution. Because of potential physicalincompatibilities, it is recommended that dobutamine not be mixed with other drugs in the same solution. Dobutamine should not beused in conjunction with other agents or diluents containing both sodium bisulfite and ethanol.

Preparation and Stability At the time of administration, dobutamine must be further diluted in an IV container to at least a 50 mL solution using one of thefollowing intravenous solutions as a diluent: 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextroseand 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 10% Dextrose Injection, Isolyte® M with 5% Dextrose Injection, Lactated Ringer’s Injection,5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, Normosol®-M in D5-W, 20% Osmitrol® in Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium ChlorideInjection, or Sodium Lactate Injection. Intravenous solutions should be used within 24 hours.

Recommended Dosage Infusion of dobutamine should be started at a low rate (0.5 to 1 mcg/kg/min) and titrated at intervals of a few minutes, guided by thepatient’s response, including systemic blood pressure, urine flow, frequency of ectopic activity, heart rate and (whenever possible)measurements of cardiac output, central venous pressure, and/or pulmonary capillary wedge pressure. In reported trials, the optimalinfusion rates have varied from patient to patient, usually 2 to 20 mcg/kg/min but sometimes slightly outside of this range. On rareoccasions, infusion rates up to 40 mcg/kg/min have been required to obtain the desired effect. Rates of infusion (mL/h) for dobutamineconcentrations of 500 mcg/mL, 1000 mcg/mL, and 2000 mcg/mL necessary to attain various delivery rates of dobutamine (mcg/kg/min) for patients of different weights are given in Table 1.

Table 1 Dobutamine Injection USP Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 500 mcg/mL concentration
Drug Delivery RAte Patient Body Weight (kg) (mcg/kg/min) 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0.5 0.3 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6 6.6 1 0.6 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6 7.2 8.4 9.6 10.8 12 13.2 2.5 1.5 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 5 3 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 7.5 4.5 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 10 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 12.5 7.5 15 300 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 15 9 18 36 54 72 90 108 126 144 162 180 198 17.5 10.5 21 42 63 84 105 126 147 168 189 210 231 20 12 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240 264 Dobutamine Injection USP Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 1000 mcg/mL concentration Drug Delivery Rate Patient Body Weight (kg) (mcg/kg/min) 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0.5 0.1 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3 3.3 1 0.3 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6 6.6 2.5 0.7 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 15 16.5 5 1.5 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 7.5 2.2 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27 31.5 36 40.5 45 49.5 10 3 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 12.5 3.7 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 15 4.5 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 17.5 5.2 10.5 21 31.5 42 52.5 63 73.5 84 94.5 105 115.5 20 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 Dobutamine Injection USP Infusion Rate (mL/h) for 2000 mcg/mL concentration Drug Delivery Rate Patient Body Weight (kg) (mcg/kg/min) 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 0.5 0.07 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.9 1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 1 0.1 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3 3.3 2.5 0.4 0.7 1.5 2 3 4 4.5 5 6 7 7.5 8 5 0.7 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 10.5 12 13.5 15 16.5 7.5 1.1 2.2 4.5 7 9 11 13.5 16 18 20 22.5 25 10 1.4 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 12.5 1.9 3.7 7 11 15 19 22.5 26 30 34 37.5 41 15 2.2 4.5 9 13.5 18 22.5 27 31.5 36 40.5 45 49.5 17.5 2.6 5.2 10.5 15.7 21 26.2 31.5 36.7 42 47.2 52.5 57.7 20 3 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 Concentrations of up to 5,000 mcg/mL have been administered to humans (250 mg/50 mL). The final volume administered should be determined by the fluid requirements of the patient. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Robinul

Robinul

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS) Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.ROBINUL Injection may be administered intramuscularly, or intravenously, without dilution, in the following indications.

Adults

Preanesthetic MedicationThe recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.004 mg/kg by intramuscular injection, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered.

Intraoperative MedicationROBINUL Injection may be used during surgery to counteract drug-induced or vagal reflexes and their associated arrhythmias (e.g., bradycardia). It should be administered intravenously as single doses of 0.1 mg and repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

Reversal of Neuromuscular BlockadeThe recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe.

Peptic UlcerThe usual recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.1 mg administered at 4-hour intervals, 3 or 4 times daily intravenously or intramuscularly. Where more profound effect is required, 0.2 mg may be given. Some patients may need only a single dose, and frequency of administration should be dictated by patient response up to a maximum of four times daily.

ROBINUL Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (seePRECAUTIONS– Pediatric Use).

Pediatric Patients (seePRECAUTIONS– Pediatric Use)

Preanesthetic MedicationThe recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection in pediatric patients is 0.004 mg/kg intramuscularly, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered.

Infants(1 month to 2 years of age) may require up to 0.009 mg/kg.

Intraoperative MedicationBecause of the long duration of action of ROBINUL Injection if used as preanesthetic medication, additional ROBINUL Injection for anticholinergic effect intraoperatively is rarely needed; in the event it is required the recommended pediatric dose is 0.004 mg/ kg intravenously, not to exceed 0.1 mg in a single dose which may be repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

Reversal of Neuromuscular BlockadeThe recommended pediatric dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe.Peptic UlcerROBINUL Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (seePRECAUTIONS– Pediatric Use).

Diluent Compatibilities Dextrose 5% and 10% in water, or saline, dextrose 5% in sodium chloride 0.45%, sodium chloride 0.9%, and Ringer’s Injection.

Diluent Incompatibilities Lactated Ringer’s solution

Admixture Compatibilities

Physical CompatibilityThis list does not constitute an endorsement of the clinical utility or safety of co-administration of ROBINUL with these drugs. ROBINUL Injection is compatible for mixing and injection with the following injectable dosage forms: atropine sulfate, USP; Antilirium® (physostigmine salicylate); Benadryl® (diphenhydramine HCl); codeine phosphate, USP; Emete-Con® (benz-quinamideHCl); hydromorphone HCl, USP; Inapsine® (droperidol); Levo-Dromoran® (levorphanol tartrate); lidocaine, USP; meperidine HCl, USP; Mestinon®/Regonol® (pyridostigmine bromide); morphine sulfate, USP; Nubain® (nalbuphine HCl); Numorphan® (oxymorphone HCl); procaine HCl, USP; promethazine HCl, USP; Prostigmin® (neostigmine methylsulfate, USP); scopolamine HBr, USP; Stadol® (butorphanol tartrate); Sublimaze® (fentanyl citrate); Tigan® (trimethobenzamide HCl); and Vistaril® (hydroxyzine HCl). ROBINUL Injection may be administered via the tubing of a running infusion of normal saline.

Admixture Incompatibilities

Physical IncompatibilitySince the stability of glycopyrrolate is questionable above a pH of 6.0 do not combine ROBINUL Injection in the same syringe with Brevital® (methohexital Na); Chloromycetin® (chloramphenicol Na succinate); Dramamine® (dimenhydrinate); Nembutal® (pentobarbital Na); Pentothal® (thiopental Na); Seconal® (secobarbital Na); sodium bicarbonate (Abbott); Valium® (diazepam); Decadron® (dexamethasone Na phosphate); or Talwin® (pentazocine lactate). These mixtures will result in a pH higher than 6.0 and may result in gas production or precipitation.
Calcium Chloride

Calcium Chloride

10% Calcium Chloride Injection, USP is administered only by slow intravenous injection (not to exceed 1 mL/min), preferably in a central or deep vein. The usual precautions for intravenous therapy should be observed. If time permits, the solution should be warmed to body temperature. The injection should be halted if the patient complains of any discomfort; it may be resumed when symptoms disappear. Following injection, the patient should remain recumbent for a short time. The usual adult dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 200 mg to 1 g (2-10 mL) at intervals of 1 to 3 days depending on the response of the patient and/or results of serum ionized calcium determinations. Repeated injections may be required because of rapidexcretion of calcium. The pediatric dosage in hypocalcemic disorders ranges from 2.7 to 5.0 mg/kg hydrated calcium chloride (or 0.136 to 0.252 mEq elemental calcium per kg, or 0.027 to 0.05 mL of 10% Calcium Chloride Injection per kg). No data from clinical trials is available about repeated dosages, though textbook references recommend repeat dosages q 4 to 6 hours.Caution: 10% Calcium Chloride Injection consists of 1 gram of calcium chloride in a 10 mL syringe, or 100 mg/mL. This concentration represents 27 mg or 1.4 mEq of elemental calcium per mL. Thus, one 10 mL syringe provides 270 mg of elemental calcium. The dosage recommendation in various references is given either as amount of calcium chloride or amount of elemental calcium, and often it is not specified. Ionized calcium concentrations should be measured, to assist in dosage adjustment. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS. To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken by hand.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage Type of Infection Dose Frequency Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hrs Mild infections caused by susceptible gram-positive cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hours Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hours Pneumococcal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hours Severe, life-threatening infection (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)* 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hours * In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of Cefazonlin for Injection per day have been used. Perioperative Prophylactic Use To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, the recommended doses are: a. 1 gram IV or IM administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. b. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). c. 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively. It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to the start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) Cefazolin for Injection be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of Cefazolin for Injection may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery. Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Reduced Renal Function Cefazolin for Injection may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg% or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3 mg% can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg% should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg% or greater should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis: see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY. Pediatric Dosage In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for Injection in these patients is not recommended. Pediatric Dosage Guide 25 mg/kg/day 25 mg/kg/day Weight Divided into 3 Doses Divided into 4 Doses Approximate Vol (mL) Approximate Vol. (mL) Single Dose Needed with Single Dose Needed with lbs kg 125 mg/mL 125 mg/mL 10 4.5 40 mg 0.35 mL 30 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 75 mg 0.6 mL 55 mg 0.45 mL 30 13.6 115 mg 0.9 mL 85 mg 0.7 mL 40 18.1 150 mg 1.2 mL 115 mg 0.9 mL 50 22.7 190 mg 1.5 mL 140 mg 1.1 mL 50 mg/kg/day 50 mg/kg/day Weight Divided Into 3 Doses Divided into 4 Doses Approximate Vol. (mL) Approximate Vol. (mL) Single Dose Needed with Single Dose Needed with (mg/q8 h) Dilution of (mg/q6 h) Dilution of lbs kg 225 mg/mL 225 mg/mL 10 4.5 75 mg 0.35 mL 55 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 150 mg 0.7 mL 110 mg 0.5 mL 30 13.6 225 mg 1 mL 170 mg 0.75 mL 40 18.1 300 mg 1.35 mL 225 mg 1 mL 50 22.7 375 mg 1.7 mL 285 mg 1.25 mL In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose. RECONSTITUTION Preparation of Parenteral Solution Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded. When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency. Single-Dose Vials For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL. Vial Size Amount of Diluent Approximate Concentration Approximate Available Volume 500 mg 2 mL 225 mg/mL 2.2 mL 1 gram 2.5 mL 330 mg/mL 3 mL ADMINISTRATION Intramuscular Administration Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin for Injection should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with Cefazolin for Injection. Intravenous Administration Direct (bolus) injection: Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below). Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted Cefazolin for Injection in 50 to 100 mL of 1 of the following solutions: Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP 5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP Ringer’s Injection, USP 5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

THE COMBINED DURATION OF USE OF KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION AND KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE TABLET IS NOT TO EXCEED 5 DAYS. THE USE OF KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE TABLETS IS ONLY INDICATED AS CONTINUATION THERAPY TO KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTIONKetorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose, on a regular or prn schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS - Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days. When administering ketorolac tromethamine the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only.IM Dosing:• Patients less than 65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg.• Patients greater than or equal to 65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.

IV Dosing:• Patients less than 65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg.• Patients greater than or equal to 65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM):• Patients less than 65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 120 mg.• For patients greater than or equal to 65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Ketorolac tromethamine should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.
Doxy 100

Doxy 100

NOTE: Rapid administration is to be avoided. Parenteral therapy is indicated only when oral therapy is not indicated. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. If intravenous therapy is given over prolonged periods of time, thrombophlebitis may result.

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE FOR INJECTION (100 TO 200 MG/DAY) DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES (1 TO 2 G/DAY). EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Studies to date have indicated that doxycycline hyclate at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of the antibiotic in patients with renal impairment.

Adults

The usual dosage of doxycycline for injection is 200 mg on the first day of treatment administered in one or two infusions. Subsequent daily dosage is 100 to 200 mg depending upon the severity of infection, with 200 mg administered in one or two infusions.

In the treatment of primary and secondary syphilis, the recommended dosage is 300 mg daily for at least 10 days.

In the treatment of inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) the recommended dose is 100 mg of doxycycline, twice a day. Parenteral therapy is only indicated when oral therapy is not indicated and should not be continued over a prolonged period of time. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. Therapy must continue for a total of 60 days.

For Children Above Eight Years of Age

The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight on the first day of treatment, administered in one or two infusions. Subsequent daily dosage is 1 to 2 mg/lb of body weight given as one or two infusions, depending on the severity of the infection. For children over 100 pounds the usual adult dose should be used (see WARNINGS-Usage in Children)

In the treatment of inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) the recommended dose is 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, twice a day in children weighting less than 100 lb (45 kg). Parenteral therapy is only indicated when oral therapy is not indicated and should not be continued over a prolonged period of time. Oral therapy should be instituted as soon as possible. Therapy must continued for a total of 60 days.

General

The duration of infusion may vary with the dose (100 to 200 mg/day), but is usually one to four hours. A recommended minimum infusion time for 100 mg of a 0.5 mg/mL solution is one hour. Therapy should be continued for at least 24 to 48 hours after symptoms and fever have subsided. The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

Intravenous solutions should not be injected intramuscularly or subcutaneously. caution should be taken to avoid the inadvertent introduction of the intravenous solution into the adjacent soft tissue.

PREPARATION OF SOLUTION:

To prepare a solution containing 10 mg/mL, the contents of the vial should be reconstituted with 10 mL (for the 100 mg/vial container) or 20 mL (for the 200 mg/vial container) of Sterile Water for Injection or any of the 10 intravenous infusion solutions listed below. Each 100 mg of doxycycline for injection (i.e., withdraw entire solution from the 100 mg vial) is further diluted with 100 mL to 1000 mL of the intravenous solutions listed below. Each 200 mg of doxycycline for injection (i.e., withdraw entire solution from the 200 mg vial) is further diluted with 200 mL to 2000mL of the following intravenous solutions:

1. Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

2. 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

3. Ringer's Injection, USP

4. Invert Sugar, 10% in Water

5. Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

6. Dextrose 5% in Lactated Ringer's

7. Normosol-M in D5-W (Abbott)

8. Normosol-R in D5-W (Abbott)

9. Plasma-Lyte 56 in 5% Dextrose (Baxter)

10. Plasma-Lyte 148 in 5% Dextrose (Baxter)

This will result in desired concentrations of 0.1 to 1 mg/mL. Concentrations lower than 0.1 mg/mL or higher than 1 mg/mL are not recommended.

Stability

Doxycycline is stable for 48 hours in solution when diluted with Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, to concentrations between 1 mg/mL and 0.1 mg/mL and stored at 25 degrees C. Doxycycline in these solutions is stable under fluorescent light for 48 hours, but must be protected from direct sunlight during storage and infusion. Reconstituted solutions (1 to 0.1 mg/mL) may be stored up to 72 hours prior to start of infusion if refrigerated and protected from sunlight and artificial light. Infusion must then be completed within 12 hours. Solutions must be used within these periods or discarded.

Doxycycline, when diluted with Ringer's Injection, USP, or Invert Sugar, 10% in Water, to a concentration between 1 mg/mL and 0.1 mg/mL, must be completely infused within 12 hours after reconstitution to ensure adequate stability. During infusion, the solution must be protected from direct sunlight. Reconstituted solutions (1 to 0.1 mg/mL) may be stored up to 72 hours prior to start of infusion if refrigerated and protected from sunlight and artificial light. infusion must then be completed within 12 hours. Solutions must be used within these time periods or discarded.

Diluted solutions (0.1 to 1 mg/mL) prepared using Normosol-M in D5-W (Abbott); Normosol-R in D5-W (Abbott); plasma-Lyte 56 in 5% Dextrose (Baxter); or Plasma-Lyte 148 in 5% Dextrose (Baxter) may also be stored up to 12 hours prior to start of infusion, if refrigerated and protected from sunlight and artificial light. The infusion must be completed within 12 hours. Solutions must be used within these time periods or discarded.

When diluted with Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP, or Dextrose 5% in Lactated Ringer's, infusion of the solution (ca. 1 mg/mL) or lower concentrations (not less than 0.1 mg/mL) must be completed within six hours after reconstitution to ensure adequate stability. During infusion, the solution must be protected from direct sunlight. Solutions must be used within this time period or discarded.

Solutions of doxycycline for injection, at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in Sterile Water for Injection, when frozen immediately after reconstitution are stable for eight weeks when stored at - 20 degrees C. If the product is warmed, care should be taken to avoid heating it after the thawing is complete. Once thawed the solution should not be refrozen.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Bupivacaine Hydrochlori...

Bupivacaine Hydrochloride And Epinephrine

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered. Dosages of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride should be reduced for elderly and/or debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should be used when feasible. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks. There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).In recommended doses, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride produces complete sensory block, but the effect on motor function differs among the three concentrations.0.25%# when used for caudal, epidural, or peripheral nerve block, produces incomplete motor block. Should be used for operations in which muscle relaxation is not important, or when another means of providing muscle relaxation is used concurrently. Onset of action may be slower than with the 0.5% or 0.75% solutions.0.5% # provides motor blockade for caudal, epidural, or nerve block, but muscle relaxation may be inadequate for operations in which complete muscle relaxation is essential.0.75% # produces complete motor block. Most useful for epidural block in abdominal operations requiring complete muscle relaxation, and for retrobulbar anesthesia. Not for obstetrical anesthesia.The duration of anesthesia with Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is such that for most indications, a single dose is sufficient. Maximum dosage limit must be individualized in each case after evaluating the size and physical status of the patient, as well as the usual rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site. Most experience to date is with single doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride up to 225 mg with epinephrine 1:200,000 and 175 mg without epinephrine; more or less drug may be used depending on individualization of each case.These doses may be repeated up to once every three hours. In clinical studies to date, total daily doses have been up to 400 mg. Until further experience is gained, this dose should not be exceeded in 24 hours. The duration of anesthetic effect may be prolonged by the addition of epinephrine. The dosages in Table 1 have generally proved satisfactory and are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. These dosages should be reduced for elderly or debilitated patients. Until further experience is gained, Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is notrecommended for pediatric patients younger than 12 years. Bupivacaine Hydrochloride is contraindicated for obstetrical paracervical blocks, and is not recommended for intravenous regional anesthesia (Bier Block). Use in Epidural Anesthesia: During epidural administration of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride, 0.5% and 0.75% solutions should be administered in incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL with sufficient time between doses to detect toxic manifestations of unintentional intravascular or intrathecal injection. In obstetrics, only the 0.5% and 0.25% concentrations should be used; incremental doses of 3 mL to 5 mL of the 0.5% solution not exceeding 50 mg to 100 mg at any dosing interval are recommended. Repeat doses should be preceded by a test dose containing epinephrine if not contraindicated. Use only the single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials for caudal or epidural anesthesia; the multiple-dose vials contain a preservative and therefore should not be used for these procedures. Test Dose for Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Blocks: The Test Dose of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride (0.5% bupivacaine with 1:200,000 epinephrine in a 3 mL ampul) is recommended for use as a test dose when clinical conditions permit prior to caudal and lumbar epidural blocks. This may serve as a warning of unintended intravascular or subarachnoid injection. (See PRECAUTIONS.) The pulse rate and other signs should be monitored carefully immediately following each test dose administration to detect possible intravascular injection, and adequate time for onset of spinal block should be allotted to detect possible intrathecal injection. An intravascular orsubarachnoid injection is still possible even if results of the test dose are negative. The test dose itself may produce a systemic toxic reaction, high spinal or cardiovascular effects from the epinephrine. (See WARNINGS and OVERDOSAGE.) Unused portions of solution not containing preservatives, i.e., those supplied in single-dose ampuls and single-dose vials, should be discarded following initial use. This product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

Table 1.
Recommended Concentrations and Doses of Bupivacaine Hydrochloride Type of Each Dose Motor Block Conc. (mL) (mg) Block(1) Local infiltration 0.25%(4) up to max. up to max. - Epidural 0.75%(2,4) 0.5%(4) 0.25%(4) 10-20 10-20 10-20 75-150 50-100 25-50 completemoderate to completepartial to moderate Caudal 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 15-3015-30 75-15037.5-75 moderate to completemoderate Peripheral nerves 0.5%(4)0.25%(4) 5 to max.5 to max. 25 to max.12.5 to max. moderate to completemoderate to complete Retrobulbar(3) 0.75% 2-4 15-30 complete Sympathetic 0.25% 20-50 50-125 - Epidural(3) 0.5% 2-3 10-15 - Test Dose w/ epi (10-15 micrograms epinephrine) (1)With continuous (intermittent) techniques, repeat doses increase the degree of motor block. The first repeat dose of 0.5% may produce complete motor block. Intercostal nerve block with 0.25% may also produce complete motor block for intra-abdominal surgery. (2)For single-dose use, not for intermittent epidural technique. Not for obstetrical anesthesia. (3)See PRECAUTIONS. (4)Solutions with or without epinephrine.
Levophed

Levophed

Norepinephrine Bitartrate Injection is a concentrated, potent drug which must be diluted in dextrose containing solutions prior to infusion. An infusion of LEVOPHED should be given into a large vein (see PRECAUTIONS).Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intraaortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, LEVOPHED can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.Diluent: LEVOPHED should be diluted in 5 percent dextrose injection or 5 percent dextrose and sodium chloride injections. These dextrose containing fluids are protection against significant loss of potency due to oxidation. Administration in saline solution alone is not recommended. Whole blood or plasma, if indicated to increase blood volume, should be administered separately (for example, by use of a Y-tube and individual containers if given simultaneously).Average Dosage: Add a 4 mL ampul (4 mg) of LEVOPHED to 1,000 mL of a 5 percent dextrose containing solution. Each mL of this dilution contains 4 mcg of the base of LEVOPHED. Give this solution by intravenous infusion. Insert a plastic intravenous catheter through a suitable bore needle well advanced centrally into the vein and securely fixed with adhesive tape, avoiding, if possible, a catheter tie-in technique as this promotes stasis. An IV drip chamber or other suitable metering device is essential to permit an accurate estimation of the rate of flow in drops per minute. After observing the response to an initial dose of 2 mL to 3 mL (from 8 mcg to 12 mcg of base) per minute, adjust the rate of flow to establish and maintain a low normal blood pressure (usually 80 mm Hg to 100 mm Hg systolic) sufficient to maintain the circulation to vital organs. In previously hypertensive patients, it is recommendedthat the blood pressure should be raised no higher than 40 mm Hg below the preexisting systolic pressure. The average maintenance dose ranges from 0.5 mL to 1 mL per minute (from 2 mcg to 4 mcg of base). High Dosage: Great individual variation occurs in the dose required to attain and maintain an adequate blood pressure. In all cases, dosage of LEVOPHED should be titrated according to the response of the patient. Occasionally much larger or even enormous daily doses (as high as 68 mg base or 17 ampuls) may be necessary if the patient remains hypotensive, but occult blood volume depletion should always be suspected and corrected when present. Central venous pressure monitoring is usually helpful in detecting and treating this situation.Fluid Intake: The degree of dilution depends on clinical fluid volume requirements. If large volumes of fluid (dextrose) are needed at a flow rate that would involve an excessive dose of the pressor agent per unit of time, a solution more dilute than 4 mcg per mL should be used. On the other hand, when large volumes of fluid are clinically undesirable, a concentration greater than 4 mcg per mL may be necessary.Duration of Therapy: The infusion should be continued until adequate blood pressure and tissue perfusion are maintained without therapy. Infusions of LEVOPHED should be reduced gradually, avoiding abrupt withdrawal. In some of the reported cases of vascular collapse due to acute myocardial infarction, treatment was required for up to six days.Adjunctive Treatment in Cardiac Arrest Infusions of LEVOPHED are usually administered intravenously during cardiac resuscitation to restore and maintain an adequate blood pressure after an effective heartbeat and ventilation have been established by other means. [LEVOPHED’s powerful betaadrenergic stimulating action is also thought to increase the strength and effectiveness of systolic contractions once they occur.]Average Dosage: To maintain systemic blood pressure during the management of cardiac arrest, LEVOPHED is used in the same manner as described under Restoration of Blood Pressure in Acute Hypotensive States. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.Do not use the solution if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate. Avoid contact with iron salts, alkalis, or oxidizing agents.
Isovue-m 200

Isovue-m 200

In adults a solution that is approximately isotonic (ISOVUE-M 200) is recommended for examination of the lumbar region. For movement of the contrast medium to distant target areas the more concentrated ISOVUE-M 300 preparation should be used to compensate for dilution of ISOVUE-M (lopamidol Injection) with cerebrospinal fluid.The usual recommended adult dose range for iopamidol is 2000-3000 mg iodine. Iopamidol formulated to contain more than 300 mgl/ml should not be used intrathecally in adults. The minimum dose needed to perform a procedure should always be used.

In pediatric patients, a solution that is approximately isotonic (ISOVUE-M 200) is recommended for all intrathecal procedures. In children, loss of contrast due to mixing on movement of the medium is less apt to occur because of their shorter spinal cord.

The usual recommended pediatric dose range for iopamidol is 1400-2400 mg iodine. Iopamidol formulated to contain more than 200 mgl/ml should not be used. See pediatric dosage table for recommended dosage.Anesthesia is not necessary. However, young children may require general anesthesia for technical reasons. Premedication with sedatives or tranquillizers is usually not needed. In patients with a history of seizure activity who are on anticonvulsant therapy, premedication with barbiturates or phenytoin should be considered.Lumbar puncture is usually made between L3 and L4; if pathology is suspected at this level, the interspace immediately above or below may be selected. A lateral cervical puncture may also be used.Rate of Injection: To avoid excessive mixing with cerebrospinal fluid and consequent loss of contrast as well as premature cephalad dispersion, injection must be made slowly over one to two minutes; the needle maythen be removed.An interval of at least 48 hours should be allowed before repeat examination; however, whenever possible five to seven days isrecommended.As with all radiopaque contrast agents, only the lowest dose of ISOVUE-M necessary to obtain adequate visualization should be used. A lower dose reduces the possibility of an adverse reaction. Most procedures do not require use of either a maximum dose or the highest available concentration of ISOVUE-M; the combination of dose and ISOVUE-M concentration to be used should be carefully individualized, and factors such as age, body size, anticipated pathology and degree and extent of opacification required, structure(s) or area to be examined, disease processes affecting the patient, and equipment and technique to be employed should be considered. Following are the usual recommended pediatric and adult doses of ISOVUE-M.The pediatric doses listed below, intended as a guideline, are based on age rather than weight because the brain and CSF capacity is independent of weight. Variations will depend on such factors as height, suspected pathology, the patient's condition, technique used, etc. (e.g. CT or standard radiology or movement of the contrast media directed distal to the sit of injection).
Pediatric Dosage Table ISOVUE-M 200 (200mgl/mL) Usual Age Recommended Procedure Years Dose (mL) Lumbar, thoracic myelogram 2-7 7-9 8-12 8-11 13-18 10-12 Adult Dosage Table Usual Concentration Recommended of Solution Dose (mgl/mL) (mL) Lumbar myelogram 200 10 to 15 Thoracic myelogram 200 10 to 15 Cervical myelogram 200 10 to 15 (via lumbar injection) 300 10 Cervical myelogram 200 10 (via lateral cervical injection) Total columnar myelography 300 10 CT cisternography 200 4 to 6 (via lumbar injection) Following subarachnoid injection, conventional radiography will continue to provide good diagnostic contrast for at lease 30 minutes. At about one hour, diagnostic degree of contrast will not usually be available. However, suffiicient contrast for CT myelography will be available for several hours. CT myelography following conventional myelography should be deferred for at least four hours to reduce the degree of contrast. Aspiration of iopamidol is unnecessary following intrathecal administration (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). It is desirable that solutions of radio paque diagnostic agents for intrathecal use be at body temperature when injected. In the even that crystallization of the medium has occurred, place the vial in hot (60 degree to 100 degree C) water for about five minutes, then shake gently to obtain a clear solution. Cool to body temperature before use. Discard vial without use if solids persist. Withdrawal of contrast agents from their containers should be accomplished under aseptic conditions with sterile syringes. Spinal puncture must always be performed under sterile conditions. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discolorationprior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Iopamidol solutions should be used only if clear and within the normal colorless to pale yellow range. Patients should be well hydrated prior to and following ISOVUE-M (Iopamidol Injection) administration. Suggestions for Usual Patient ManagementPreprocedure * See WARNINGS regarding discontinuation of neuroleptic agents * Maintain normal diet up to 2 hours before procedure * Ensure hydration-fluids up to time of procedure During Procedure * Use minimum dose and concentration required for satisfactory contrast. * Inject slowly over 1 to 2 minutes to avoid excessive mixing. * Abrupt or active patient movement causes excessive mixing with CSF. * Instruct patient to remain passive. Move patient slowly and only as necessary. * To maintain as a bolus, move medium to distal area very slowly under fluoroscopic control. * In all positioning techniques keep the patient's head elevated above highest level of spine. * Do not lower head of table more than 15 degrees during thoraco-cervical procedures. * In patients with excessive lordosis, consider lateral position for injection and movement of the medium cephalad. * Avoid intracranial entry of a bolus. * Avoid early and high cephalad dispersion of the medium. * At completion of direct cervical or lumbo-cervical procedures, raise head of table steeply (45 degrees) for about 2 minutes to restore medium to lower levels. Post procedure * Raise head of stretcher to at lease 30 degrees before moving patient onto it. * Movement onto stretcher, and off the stretcher to bed, should be done slowly with patient completely passive, maintaining head up position. * Before moving patient onto bed, raise head of be 30 degree to 45 degree and maintain the patient in this position under close observation for 12 to 24 hours. * Advise patient to remain still in bed, in head up position for the first 24 hours. * Obtain visitors cooperation in keeping the patient quiet and in head up position, especially in first few hours. * Encourage oral fluids and diet as tolerated. * Antinauseants of the phenothiazine class should not be administered to treat the postprocedural nausea or vomiting (see WARNINGS). Since persistent nausea and vomiting may result in dehydration, prompt consideration of volume replacement by intravenous fluids is recommended. Drug Incompatibilities Many radiopaque contrast agents are incompatible in vitro with some antihistamines and many other drugs; therefore, no other pharmaceuticals should be admixed with contrast agents.
Metoclopramide

Metoclopramide

For the Relief of Symptoms Associated with Diabetic Gastroparesis (Diabetic Gastric Stasis): If only the earliest manifestations of diabetic gastric stasis are present, oral administration of metoclopramide may be initiated. However, if severe symptoms are present, therapy should begin with metoclopramide injection (IM or IV). Doses of 10 mg may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

Administration of Metoclopramide Injection, USP up to 10 days may be required before symptoms subside, at which time oral administration of metoclopramide may be instituted. The physician should make a thorough assessment of the risks and benefits prior to prescribing further metoclopramide treatment.

For the Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy:
Intravenous infusions should be made slowly over a period of not less than 15 minutes, 30 minutes before beginning cancer chemotherapy and repeated every 2 hours for two doses, then every 3 hours for three doses. The initial two doses should be 2 mg/kg if highly emetogenic drugs such as cisplatin or dacarbazine are used alone or in combination. For less emetogenic regimens, 1 mg/kg per dose may be adequate.
For doses in excess of 10 mg, Metoclopramide Injection, USP should be diluted in 50 mL of a parenteral solution.

The preferred parenteral solution is Sodium Chloride Injection (normal saline), which when combined with Metoclopramide Injection, USP, can be stored frozen for up to 4 weeks. Metoclopramide Injection, USP is degraded when admixed and frozen with Dextrose-5% in Water. Metoclopramide Injection, USP diluted in Sodium Chloride Injection, Dextrose-5% in Water, Dextrose-5% in 0.45% Sodium Chloride, Ringer's Injection, or Lactated Ringer's Injection may be stored up to 48 hours (without freezing) after preparation if protected from light. All dilutions may be stored unprotected from light under normal light conditions up to 24 hours after preparation. If acute dystonic reactions should occur, inject 50 mg Benadryl® (diphenhydramine hydrochloride) intramuscularly, and the symtoms usually will subside.

For the Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting: Metoclopramide Injection, USP should be given intramuscularly near the end of surgery. The usual adult dose is 10 mg; however, doses of 20 mg may be used.

To Facilitate Small Bowel Intubation: If the tube has not passed the pylorus with conventional maneuvers in 10 minutes, a single dose (undiluted) may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

The recommended single dose is: Pediatric patients above 14 years of age and adults − 10 mg metoclopramide base. Pediatric patients (6 − 14 years of age) − 2.5 to 5 mg metoclopramide base; (under 6 years of age) − 0.1 mg/kg metoclopramide base.

To Aid in Radiological Examinations: In patients where delayed gastric emptying interferes with radiological examination of the stomach and/or small intestine, a single dose may be administered slowly by the intravenous route over a 1 to 2 minute period.

For dosage, see intubation, above.

Use in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment: Since metoclopramide is excreted principally through the kidneys, in those patients whose creatinine clearanceis below 40 mL/min, therapy should be initiated at approximately one-half the recommended dosage. Depending upon clinical efficacy and safety considerations, the dosage may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

See OVERDOSAGE section for information regarding dialysis.

Metoclopramide undergoes minimal hepatic metabolism, except for simple conjugation. Its safe use has been described in patients with advanced liver disease whose renal function was normal.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Admixure Compatibilites

Metoclopramide Injection, USP is compatible for mixing and injection with the following dosage forms to the extent indicated below:

Physically and Chemically Compatible Up to 48 Hours

Cimetidine Hydrochloride (SKandF), Mannitol, USP (Hospira), Potassium Acetate, USP (Invenex), Potassium Phosphate, USP (Invenex).

Physically Compatible Up to 48 Hours

Ascorbic Acid, USP (hospira), Benztropine Mesylate, USP (MSand D), Cytarabine, USP (Upjohn), Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate, USP (ESI, MSandD), Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride, USP (Parke-Davis), Doxorubicin Hydrochloride, USP (Adria), Heparin Sodium, USP (ESI), Hydrocortisone Sodium Phosphate (MSandD), Lidocaine Hydrochloride, USP (ESI), Multi-Vitamin Infusion (must be refrigerated USV), Vitamin B Complex with Ascorbic Acid (Roche).

Physically Compatible Up to 24 Hours (Do not use if precipitation occurs)

Clindamycin Phosphate, USP (Upjohn), Cyclophosphamide, USP (Mead-Johnson), Insulin, USP (Lilly).

Conditionally Compatible (Use within one hour after mixing or may be infused directly into the same running IV line)

Ampicillin Sodium, USP (Bristol), Cisplatin (Bristol), Erythromycin Lctobionate, USP (Hospira), Methotrexate Sodium, USP (Lederle), Penicillin G Potassium, USP (Squibb), Tetracycline Hydrochloride, USP (Lederle).

Incompatible (Do Not Mix)

Cephalothin Sodium, USP (Lilly), Chloramphenicol Sodium, USP (Parke-Davis), Sodium Bicarbonate, USP (Hospira)
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

Usual Adult Dosage Type of Infection Dose Frequency Moderate to severe infections 500 mg to 1 gram every 6 to 8 hours Mild infections caused by susceptivle gram-positive cocci 250 mg to 500 mg every 8 hours Acute, uncomplicated urinary tract infections 1 gram every 12 hours Pneumocaocal pneumonia 500 mg every 12 hours Severe, life-threatening infections (e.g., endocarditis, septicemia) (1) 1 gram to 1.5 grams every 6 hours (1) In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin for injection per day have been used Perioperative Prophylactic Use
To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:

a. 1 gram IV or IM administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery.

b. For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure).

c. 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.

It is important that (1) the preoperative dose be given just (1/2 to 1 hour) prior to the start of surgery so that adequate antibiotic levels are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (2) Cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient levels of the antibiotic at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin for injection may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.
Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Reduced Renal Function
Cefazolin may be used in patients with reduced renal function with the following dosage adjustments: Patients with a creatinine clearance of 55 mL/min. or greater or a serum creatinine of 1.5 mg % or less can be given full doses. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 35 to 54 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 1.6 to 3 mg % can also be given full doses but dosage should be restricted to at least 8 hour intervals. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 11 to 34 mL/min. or serum creatinine of 3.1 to 4.5 mg % should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 12 hours. Patients with creatinine clearance rates of 10 mL/min. or less or serum creatinine of 4.6 mg % or greater should be given 1/2 the usual dose every 18 to 24 hours. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection. Patients undergoing peritoneal dialysis: See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.
Pediatric Dosage
In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for injection in these patients is not recommended.
Pediatric Dosage Guide Weight 25 mg/kg/Day Divided into 3 Doses 25 mg/kg/Day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of125 mg/mL ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of125 mg/mL 10 4.5 40 mg 0.35 mL 30 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 75 mg 0.6 mL 55 mg 0.45 mL 30 13.6 115 mg 0.9 mL 85 mg 0.7 mL 40 18.1 150 mg 1.2 mL 115 mg 0.9 mL 50 22.7 190 mg 1.5 mL 140 mg 1.1 mL Weight 50 mg/kg/Day Divided into 3 Doses 50 mg/kg/Day Divided into 4 Doses Lbs Kg ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q8h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of225 mg/mL ApproximateSingle Dosemg/q6h Vol. (mL)needed withdilution of225 mg/mL 10 4.5 75 mg 0.35 mL 55 mg 0.25 mL 20 9 150 mg 0.7 mL 110 mg 0.5 mL 30 13.6 225 mg 1 mL 170 mg 0.75 mL 40 18.1 300 mg 1.35 mL 225 mg 1 mL 50 22.7 375 mg 1.7 mL 285 mg 1.25 mL
In pediatric patients with mild to moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 70 to 40 mL/min.), 60 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be sufficient. In patients with moderate impairment (creatinine clearance of 40 to 20 mL/min.), 25 percent of the normal daily dose given in equally divided doses every 12 hours should be adequate. Pediatric patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 20 to 5 mL/min.) may be given 10 percent of the normal daily dose every 24 hours. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.
RECONSTITUTION Preparation of Parenteral Solution
Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin for injection is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41 °F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.
Single-Dose Vials
For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL.
Vial size Amount of Diluent Approximate Concentration Approximate Available Volume 1 gram 2.5 mL 330 mg/mL 3 mL ADMINISTRATION Intramuscular Administration
Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with cefazolin.
Intravenous Administration
Direct (bolus) injection: Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below).

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted cefazolin in 50 to 100 mL of 1 of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP
Dexamethasone Sodium Ph...

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate

Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection, 10 mg/mL-For intravenous and intramuscular injection only.Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection can be given directly from the vial, or it can be added to Sodium Chloride Injection or Dextrose Injection and administered by intravenous drop.Solutions used for intravenous administration of further dilution of this product should be preservative free when used in the neonate, especially the premature infant.When it is mixed with an infusion solution, sterile precautions should be observed. Since infusion solutions generally do not contain preservatives, mixtures should be used within 24 hours.DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.Intravenous and Intramuscular InjectionThe initial dosage of dexamethasone sodium phospate injection varies from 0.5 to 9 mg a day depending on the disease being treated. In less severe diseases doses lower than 0.5 mg may suffice, while in severe diseases doses higher than 9 mg may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until the patient's response is satisfactory. If a satisfactory clinical response does not occur after a reasonable period of time, discontinue dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection and transfer the patient to other therapy.After a favorable initial response, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial dosage in small amounts to the lowest dosage that maintains an adequate clinical response. Patients should be observed closely for signs that might require dosage adjustment, including changes in clinical status resulting from remissions or exacerbations of the disease, individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of stress (e.g., surgery, infection, trauma). During stress it may be necessary to increase dosage temporarily. If the drug is to be stopped after more than a few days of treatment, it usually should be withdrawn gradually.When the intravenous route of administration is used, dosage usually should be the same as the oral dosage. In certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, however, administration in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages. The slower rate of absorption by intramuscular administration should be recognized.ShockThere is a tendency in current medical practice to use high (pharmacologic) doses of corticosteroids for the treatment of unresponsive shock. The following dosages of dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection have been suggested by various authors. Author DosageCavanagh1 3 mg/kg of body weight per 24 hours by constant intravenous infusion after an initial intravenous injection of 20 mgDietzman2 2 to 6 mg/kg of body weight as a single intravenous injectionFrank3 40 mg initially followed by repeat intravenous injection every 4 to 6 hours while shock persisitsOaks4 40 mg initially followed by repeat intravenous injection every 2 to 6 hours while shock persistsSchumer5 1 mg/kg of body weight as a single intravenous injectionAdministration of high dose corticosteroids therapy should be continued only until the patient's condition has stabilized and usually not longer than 48 to 72 hours. Although adverse reactions associated with high dose, short term corticosteroid therapy are uncommon, peptic ulceration may occur. Cerebral EdemaDexamethasone sodium phosphate injection is generally administered initially in a dosage of 10 mg intravenously followed by four mg every six hours intramuscularly until the symptoms of cerebral edema subside. Response is usually noted within 12 to 24 hours and dosage may be reduced after two to four days and gradually discontinued over a period of five to seven days. For palliative management of patients with recurrent or inoperable brain tumors, maintenance therapy with 2 mg two or three times a day may be effective. Acute Allergic DisordersIn acute, self-limited allergic disorders or acute exacerbations of chronic allergic disorders, the following dosage schedule combining parenteral and oral therapy is suggested:Dexamethasone sodium phosphate injection, first day, 4 or 8 mg intramuscularly. Dexamethasone tablets, 0.75 mg; second and third days, 4 tablets in two divided doses each day; fourth day, 2 tablets in two divided doses; fifth and sixth days, 1 tablet each day; seventh day, no treatment; eighth day, follow-up visit. This schedule is designed to ensure adequate therapy during acute episodes, while minimizing the risk of overdosage in chronic cases. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever the solution and container permit.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual dose of atropine sulfate is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested dosages for pediatric patients are as follows: 7 - 16 lbs. - 0.1 mg 40 - 65 lbs. - 0.3 mg 17 - 24 lbs. - 0.15 mg 65 - 90 lbs. - 0.4 mg 24 - 40 lbs. - 0.2 mg Over 90 lbs. - 0.4 to 0.6 mg Table of Dosage EquivalentsAtropine Sulfate Solution (mL required) mg required 1 mg per mL 0.4 mg per mL 1 1 0.80 0.80 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.50 0.40 0.40 1 0.30 0.30 0.75 0.25 0.25 0.63 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.18 0.18 0.45 0.15 0.15 0.38 0.12 0.12 0.30 0.10 0.10 0.25 These doses may be exceeded in certain cases. For hypotonic radiography of the gastrointestinal tract, the usual adult dose is 1 mg intramuscularly. Adults suspected of contact with organic phosphorous insecticides of the parathion type should be given atropine sulfate 0.8 mg intramuscularly. If an atropine effect is not apparent within 30 minutes or if definite symptoms of the poisoning occur (nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, pupillary constriction, pulmonary edema, fasciculations of eyelids and tongue, jerky ocular movements and excessive sweating, salivation and bronchial secretion), atropine sulfate 2 mg should be given intramuscularly at hourly intervals until signs of atropinization are observed. Up to 2 or 3 times of this dose (4 to 6 mg) may be required in severe cases. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

FOR INTRAVENOUS USE ONLY. VERAPAMIL HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION SHOULD BE GIVEN AS A SLOW INTRAVENOUS INJECTION OVER AT LEAST A TWO-MINUTE PERIOD OF TIME UNDER CONTINUOUS ELECTROCARDIOGRAPHIC (ECG) AND BLOOD PRESSURE MONITORING. The recommended intravenous doses of verapamil hydrochloride injection are as follows:Adult:Initial dose - 5 to 10 mg (0.075 to 0.15 mg/kg body weight) given as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes.Repeat dose - 10 mg (0.15 mg/kg body weight) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate. An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.Older patients - The dose should be administered over at least 3 minutes to minimize the risk of untoward drug effects.Pediatric:Initial dose:0 to 1 year: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 0.75 to 2 mg) should be administered as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes under continuous ECG monitoring. 1 to 15 years: 0.1 to 0.3 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 2 to 5 mg) should be administered as an intravenous bolus over at least 2 minutes. Do not exceed 5 mg. Repeat dose: 0 to 1 year: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 0.75 to 2 mg) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate (under continuous ECG monitoring). An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.1 to 15 years: 0.1 to 0.3 mg/kg body weight (usual single dose range: 2 to 5 mg) 30 minutes after the first dose if the initial response is not adequate. Do not exceed 10 mg as a single dose. An optimal interval for subsequent I.V. doses has not been determined, and should be individualized for each patient.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Use only if solution is clear and vial seal is intact. Unused amount of solution should be discarded immediately following withdrawal of any portion of contents.

For stability reasons this product is not recommended for dilution with Sodium Lactate Injection, USP in polyvinyl chloride bags. Verapamil is physically compatible and chemically stable for at least 24 hours at 25°C protected from light in most common large volume parenteral solutions. Admixing verapamil hydrochloride injection with albumin, amphotericin B, hydralazine hydrochloride and trimethoprim with sulfamethoxazole should be avoided. Verapamil hydrochloride injection will precipitate in any solution with a pH above 6.0.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). The 1 mL vial must not be confused with a “catheter lock flush” vial or other 1 mL vial of inappropriate strength. Confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength prior to administration of the drug. When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution. Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittentintravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site. The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient’s coagulation testresults. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every four hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drugis administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn four to six hours after the injection. Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.Converting to Oral Anticoagulant When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about five hours after the last IV bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time. In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose Heparin Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:
METHOD OF ADMINISTRATION FREQUENCY RECOMMENDED DOSE(based on 150 lb [68 kg] patient) Deep Subcutaneous (Intrafat) InjectionA different site should be usedfor each injection to prevent the development of massive hematoma Initial DoseEvery 8 hoursor Every 12hours 5,000 units by IV injection, followed by 10,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution, subcutaneously8,000 to 10,000 units of a concentrated solution15,000 to 20,000 units of a concentrated solution Intermittent Intravenous Injection Initial DoseEvery 4 to 6 hours 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5,000 to 10,000 units, either undiluted or in 50 to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP Intravenous Infusion Initial DoseContinuous 5,000 units by IV injection20,000 to 40,000 units/24 hours in 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP(or in any compatible solution) for infusion. Pediatric Use Do not administer Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preserved with benzyl alcohol, to neonates and infants (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, Pregnancy, Nursing Mothers, and Pediatric Use and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use). When indicated, Heparin Sodium Injection, USP (porcine), preservative free should be used in neonates and infants. Follow recommendations of appropriate pediatric reference texts. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline: Initial Dose: 50 units/kg (IV, infusion) Maintenance Dose: 100 units/kg (IV, infusion) every four hours, or 20,000 units/m2/24 hours continuously Geriatric Use Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin. Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes. Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for seven days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as well as patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters. Extracorporeal Dialysis Follow equipment manufacturers’ operating directions carefully. Blood Transfusion Addition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units/1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood. Laboratory Samples Addition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within two hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered. For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra: The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catherization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra: 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures. Lubrication for endotracheal intubation: Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect. MAXIMUM DOSAGE: No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75-100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Mannitol

Mannitol

Mannitol I.V. (Mannitol Injection, USP) should be administered only by intravenous infusion. The total dosage, concentration and rate of administration should be governed by the nature and severity of the condition being treated, fluid requirement and urinary output. The usual adult dosage ranges from 50 to 200 g in a 24-hour period, but in most instances an adequate response will be achieved at a dosage of approximately 100 g/24 hours. The rate of administration is usually adjusted to maintain a urine flow of at least 30 to 50 mL/hr. The total dose should be adjusted according to the clinical response and adverse events (see WARNINGS).

Test Dose: A test dose of mannitol should be given prior to instituting Mannitol I.V. therapy for patients with marked oliguria or those believed to have inadequate renal function. In adults the dose is 0.2 g/kg body weight. In pediatric patients the dose is 0.2 g/kg body weight or 6 g/m2 body surface area. The infusion is given as a 15% to 25% solution over a period of 3 to 5 minutes to produce a urine flow of at least 30 to 50 mL/hour. If urine flow does not increase, a second dose may be given; but if there is inadequate response, the patient should be re-evaluated.

Prevention of Acute Renal Failure (Oliguria): When used during cardiovascular or other types of surgery, 50 to 100 g of mannitol as a 5%, 10%, or 15% solution may be given. The concentration will depend on the fluid requirements of the patient.

Treatment of Oliguria: The usual dose to promote diuresis in oliguric patients: Adults, 300 to 400 mg/kg of body weight (21 to 28 g for a 70 kg patient) or up to 100 g of solution, given as a single dose (often in conjunction with furosemide); pediatric patients, 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight or 60 g/m2 body surface area as a 15% to 20% solution over a period of 2 to 6 hours. Doses should not be repeated in patients with persistent oliguria.

Reduction of Intracranial Pressure and Brain Mass: In adults a dose of 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight as a 15% to 25% solution administered over a period of 30 to 60 minutes; pediatric patients 1 to 2 g/kg body weight or 30 to 60 g/m2 body surface area over a period of 30 to 60 minutes. In small or debilitated patients, a dose of 500 mg/kg may be sufficient. Careful evaluation must be made of the circulatory and renal reserve prior to and during administration of mannitol at the higher doses and rapid infusion rates. Careful attention must be paid to fluid and electrolyte balance, body weight, and total input and output before and after infusion of mannitol. Evidence of reduced cerebral spinal fluid pressure must be observed within 15 minutes after starting infusion.

Reduction of Intraocular Pressure: In adults a dose of 0.25 to 2 g/kg body weight as a 15% to 25% solution administered over a period of 30 to 60 minutes; pediatric patients 1 to 2 g/kg body weight or 30 to 60 g/m2 body surface area over a period of 30 to 60 minutes. In small or debilitated patients, a dose of 500 mg/kg may be sufficient. When used preoperatively, the dose should be given one to one and one-half hours before surgery to achieve maximal reduction of intraocular pressure before operation.

Adjunctive Therapy for Intoxications: As an agent to promote urinary excretion of toxic substances: Adults may receive a 5% to 25% solution for as long as indicated if urinary output remains high; pediatric patients may receive 2 g/kg of body weight of a 5% or 10% solution. The concentration will depend upon the fluid requirement and urinary output of the patient. If benefits are not observed after 200 g of mannitol are administered, discontinue the mannitol therapy. Intravenous water and electrolytes must be given to match the loss of these substances in the urine, sweat and expired air.

Measurement of Glomerular Filtration Rate (GFR): 100 mL of a 20% solution (20 g) should be diluted with 180 mL of sodium chloride injection (normal saline) or 200 mL of a 10% solution (20 g) should be diluted with 80 mL of sodium chloride injection (normal saline). The resulting 280 mL of 7.2% solution is infused at a rate of 20 mL per minute. The urine is collected by catheter for a specific period of time and analyzed for mannitol excreted in mg per minute. A blood sample is drawn at the start and at the end of the time period and the concentration of mannitol determined in mg/mL of plasma. GFR is the number of mL of plasma that must have been filtered to account for the amount excreted per minute in the urine. Normal clearance rates are approximately 125 mL/minute for men; 116 mL/minute for women.

Drug Interactions Additives may be incompatible. Consult with pharmacist, if available. When introducing additives to the flexible container, use aseptic technique, mix thoroughly and do not store. Do not place 25% Mannitol Injection, USP in polyvinylchloride bags; a white flocculent precipitate may form from contact with PVC surfaces. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration; whenever container and solution permit. (See PRECAUTIONS).

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE - Flexible Container To Open Tear outer wrap at notch and remove solution container. If supplemental medication is desired, follow directions below before preparing for administration. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.To Add Medication 1. Prepare additive port.2. Using aseptic technique and an additive delivery needle of appropriate length, puncture resealable additive port at target area, inner diaphragm and inject. Withdraw needle after injecting medication.3. The additive port may be protected by covering with an additive cap.4. Mix container contents thoroughly.Preparation for Administration (Use aseptic technique) 1. Close flow control clamp of administration set.2. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container.3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the set is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton.4. Suspend container from hanger.5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber.6. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp.7. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture.8. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

INSTRUCTlONS FOR USE - Fliptop Vial Remove cover and cleanse stopper with antiseptic before use.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.

The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra: The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catherization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.

For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra: 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures.

Lubrication for endotracheal intubation: Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect.

MAXIMUM DOSAGE: No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.

Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75-100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride for Injection Concentrate, USP must be diluted before administration. Care must be taken to ensure there is complete mixing of the potassium chloride with the large volume fluid, particularly if soft or bag type containers are used. The dose and rate of administration are dependent upon the specific condition of each patient. If the serum potassium level is greater than 2.5 mEq/liter, potassium can be given at a rate not to exceed 10 mEq/hour in a concentration of up to 40 mEq/liter. The 24-hour total dose should not exceed 200 mEq. If urgent treatment is indicated (serum potassium level less than 2.0 mEq/liter with electrocardiographic changes and/or muscle paralysis) potassium chloride may be infused very cautiously at a rate of up to 40 mEq/hour. In such cases, continuous cardiac monitoring is essential. As much as 400 mEq may be administered in a 24 hour period. In critical conditions, potassium chloride may be administered in saline (unless contraindicated), rather than in dextrose containing fluids, as dextrose may lower serum potassium levels. Prior to entering vial, remove the metal seal and cleanse the rubber closure with a suitable antiseptic agent. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.

TO PREVENT NEEDLE-STICK INJURIES, NEEDLES SHOULD NOT BE RECAPPED, PURPOSELY BENT, OR BROKEN BY HAND.
Lidocaine Hydrochloride...

Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly

When Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is used concomitantly with other products containing lidocaine, the total dose contributed by all formulations must be kept in mind.

The dosage varies and depends upon the area to be anesthetized, vascularity of the tissues, individual tolerance, and the technique of anesthesia. The lowest dosage needed to provide effective anesthesia should be administered. Dosages should be reduced for children and for elderly and debilitated patients. Although the incidence of adverse effects with Lidocaine Hydrochloride Jelly USP, 2% is quite low, caution should be exercised, particularly when employing large amounts, since the incidence of adverse effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent administered.

For surface anesthesia of the male adult urethra: The outer orifice is washed and disinfected. The plastic tip is introduced into the orifice, where it is firmly held in position. The jelly is instilled by an easy syringe-like action, until the patient has a feeling of tension or until about 15 mL (i.e., 300 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride) is instilled. A penile clamp is then applied for several minutes at the corona and then additional jelly (about 15 mL) is instilled. To save time, the injection is performed against the resistance of the sphincter, possibly assisted by asking the patient to strain as for defecation or to press as in voiding. The jelly will then pass into the posterior urethra. Prior to sounding or cystoscopy, a penile clamp should be applied for 5 to 10 minutes to obtain adequate anesthesia. If the instrument is introduced immediately, a lubricant is unnecessary. Otherwise some jelly can be expressed from the vial and applied to the instrument tip. About 30 mL (i.e., 600 mg) may be required to fill and dilate the male urethra. When it is desired to anesthetize only the anterior male urethra, as prior to catheterization, considerably smaller volumes, such as the contents from a 5 mL (i.e., 100 mg) or 10 mL (i.e., 200 mg) size vial, are usually adequate for lubrication.

For surface anesthesia of the female adult urethra: 3 to 5 mL of the jelly is instilled slowly into the urethra by gently expressing the contents of the vial. If desired, some jelly may be deposited on a cotton swab and introduced into the urethra. In order to obtain adequate anesthesia, several minutes should be allowed prior to performing urological procedures.

Lubrication for endotracheal intubation: Apply a moderate amount of jelly to the external surface of the endotracheal tube shortly before use. Care should be taken to avoid introducing the product into the lumen of the tube. Do not use the jelly to lubricate endotracheal stylettes. See WARNINGS and ADVERSE REACTIONS concerning rare reports of inner lumen occlusion. It is also recommended that use of endotracheal tubes with dried jelly on the external surface be avoided for lack of lubricating effect.

MAXIMUM DOSAGE: No more than 600 mg of lidocaine hydrochloride should be given in any 12 hour period.

Children: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children less than ten years who have a normal lean body mass and a normal lean body development, the maximum dose may be determined by the application of one of the standard pediatric drug formulas (e.g., Clark's rule). For example, in a child of five years weighing 50 lbs., the dose of lidocaine hydrochloride should not exceed 75–100 mg when calculated according to Clark's rule. In any case, the maximum amount of lidocaine administered should not exceed 4.5 mg / kg (2 mg / lb) of body weight.
Amidate

Amidate

Etomidate Injection, USP is intended for administration only by the intravenous route (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). The dose for induction of anesthesia in adult patients and in pediatric patients above the age of ten (10) years will vary between 0.2 and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight, and it must be individualized in each case. The usual dose for induction in these patients is 0.3 mg/kg, injected over a period of 30 to 60 seconds. There are inadequate data to make dosage recommendations for induction of anesthesia in patients below the age of ten (10) years; therefore, such use is not recommended. Geriatric patients may require reduced doses of etomidate.

Smaller increments of intravenous etomidate may be administered to adult patients during short operative procedures to supplement subpotent anesthetic agents, such as nitrous oxide. The dosage employed under these circumstances, although usually smaller than the original induction dose, must be individualized. There are insufficient data to support this use of etomidate for longer adult procedures or for any procedures in pediatric patients; therefore, such use is not recommended. The use of intravenous fentanyl and other neuroactive drugs employed during the conduct of anesthesia may alter the etomidate dosage requirements. Consult the prescribing information for all other such drugs before using.

Premedication: Etomidate Injection, USP is compatible with commonly administered pre-anesthetic medications, which may be employed as indicated. See also CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and dosage recommendations for maintenance of anesthesia.

Etomidate hypnosis does not significantly alter the usual dosage requirements of neuromuscular blocking agents employed for endotracheal intubation or other purposes shortly after induction of anesthesia.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Phytonadione

Phytonadione

Whenever possible, phytonadione should be given by the subcuteanous route (see Box WARNING). When intravenous or intramuscular administration is considered unavoidable, the drug should be injected very slowly, not exceeding 1 mg per minute.

Protect from light at all times.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Dilution

Phytonadione may be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or 5% Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection. Benzyl alcohol as a preservative has been associated with toxicity in newborns. Therefore, all of the above diluents should be preservative-free. (See WARNINGS) Other diluents should not be used. When dilutions are indicated, administration should be started immediately after mixture with the diluent, and unused portions of the dilution should be discarded, as well as unused contents of the vial.

Prophylaxis of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that vitamin K1 be given to the newborn. A single intramuscular dose of phytonadione 0.5 to 1 mg within one hour of birth is recommended.

Treatment of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

Empiric administration of vitamin K1 should not replace proper laboratory evaluation of the coagulation mechanism. A prompt response (shortening of the prothrombin time in 2 to 4 hours) following administration of vitamin K1 is usually diagnostic of hemorrhagic disease of the newborn, and failure to respond indicates another diagnosis or coagulation disorder.

Phytonadione 1 mg should be given either subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants.

Whole blood or component therapy may be indicated if bleeding is excessive. This therapy, however, does not correct the underlying disorder and phytonadione should be given concurrently.

Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults

To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin time caused by oral anticoagulant therapy - 2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required. Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition (see WARNINGS). If in 6 to 8 hours after parenteral administration the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated.

In the event of shock or excessive blood loss, the use of whole blood or component therapy is indicated.

Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults

A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained.

If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates, antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent phytonadione. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of phytonadione is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.
Ketamine Hydrochloride

Ketamine Hydrochloride

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Note: Barbiturates and ketamine, being chemically incompatible because of precipitate formation, should not be injected from the same syringe.

If the ketamine dose is augmented with diazepam, the two drugs must be given separately. Do not mix ketamine hydrochloride and diazepam in syringe or infusion flask. For additional information on the use of diazepam, refer to the WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION sections of the diazepam insert.

Preoperative Preparations
While vomiting has been reported following ketamine administration, some airway protection may be afforded because of active laryngeal-pharyngeal reflexes. However, since aspiration may occur with ketamine and since protective reflexes may also be diminished by supplementary anesthetics and msucle relaxants, the possibility of aspiration must be considered. Ketamine is recommended for use in the patient whose stomach is not empty when, in the judgment of the practitioner, the benefits of the drug outweigh the possible risks. Atropine, scopolamine, or another drying agent should be given at an appropriate interval prior to induction.
Onset and Duration

Because of rapid induction following the initial intravenous injection, the patient should be in a supported position during administration.

The onset of action of ketamine is rapid; an intravenous dose of 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb) of body weight usually produces surgical anesthesia within 30 seconds after injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting five to ten minutes. If a longer effect is desired, additional increments can be administered intravenously or intramuscularly to maintain anesthesia without producing significant cumulative effects.

Intramuscular doses, in a range of 9 to 13 mg/kg (4 to 6 mg/lb) usually produce surgical anesthesia within 3 to 4 minutes following injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting 12 to 25 minutes.

Dosage

As with other general anesthetic agents, the individual response to ketamine is somewhat varied depending on the dose, route of administration, and age of patient, so that dosage recommendation cannot be absolutely fixed. The drug should be titrated against the patient's requirements.

Induction

Intravenous Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intravenously may range from 1 mg/kg to 4.5 mg/kg (0.5 to 2 mg/lb). The average amount required to produce five to ten minutes of surgical anesthesia has been 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb).

Alternatively, in adult patients an induction dose of 1 mg to 2 mg/kg intravenous ketamine at a rate of 0.5 mg/kg/min may be used for induction of anesthesia. In addition, diazepam in 2 mg to 5 mg doses, administered in a separate syringe over 60 seconds, may be used. In most cases, 15 mg of intravenous diazepam or less will suffice. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this induction dosage program.

Note: The 100 mg/mL concentration of ketamine should not be injected intravenously without proper dilution. It is recommended the drug be diluted with an equal volume of either Sterile Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% or Dextrose Injection, 5%.

Rate of administration: It is recommended that ketamine be administered slowly (over a period of 60 seconds). More rapid administration may result in respiratory depression and enhanced pressor response.

Intramuscular Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intramuscularly may range from 6.5 to 13 mg/kg (3 to 6 mg/lb). A dose of 10 mg/kg (5 mg/lb) will usually produce 12 to 25 minutes of surgical anesthesia.

Maintenance of Anesthesia

The maintenance dose should be adjusted according to the patient's anesthetic needs and whether an additional anesthetic agent is employed.

Increments of one-half to the full induction dose may be repeated as needed for maintenance of anesthesia. However, it should be noted that purposeless and tonic-clonic movements of extremities may occur during the course of anesthesia. These movements do not imply a light plane and are not indicative of the need for additional doses of the anesthetic.

It should be recognized that the larger the total dose of ketamine administered, the longer will be the time to complete recovery.

Adult patients induced with ketamine augmented with intravenous diazepam may be maintained on ketamine given by slow microdrip infusion technique at a dose of 0.1 to 0.5 mg/minute, augmented with diazepam 2 to 5 mg administered intavenously as needed. In many cases 20 mg or less of intravenous diazepam total for combined induction and maintenance will suffice. However, slightly more diazepam may be required depending on the nature and duration of the operation, physical status of the patient, and other factors. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this maintenance dosage program.

Dilution: To prepare a dilute solution containing 1 mg of ketamine per mL, aseptically transfer 10 mL (50 mg per mL vial) or 5 mL (100 mg per mL vial) to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, 5% or Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% and mix well. The resultant solution will contain 1 mg of ketamine per mL.

The fluid requirements of the patient and duration of anesthesia must be considered when selecting the appropriate dilution of ketamine hydrochloride injection. If fluid restriction is required, ketamine hydrochloride injection can be added to a 250 mL infusion as described above to provide a ketamine concentration of 2 mg/mL.

Supplementary Agents

Ketamine is clinically compatible with the commonly used general and local anesthetic agents when an adequate respiratory exchange is maintained.

The regimen of a reduced dose of ketamine supplemented with diazepam can be used to produce balanced anesthesia by combination with other agents such as nitrous oxide and oxygen.
Robinul

Robinul

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS)

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

ROBINUL Injection may be administered intramuscularly, or intravenously, without dilution, in the following indications.

Adults

PREANESTHETIC MEDICATION

The recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.004 mg/kg by intramuscular injection, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered.

INTRAOPERATIVE MEDICATION

ROBINUL Injection may be used during surgery to counteract drug-induced or vagal reflexes and their associated arrhythmias (e.g., bradycardia). It should be administered intravenously as single doses of 0.1 mg and repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

REVERSAL OF NEUROMUSCULAR BLOCKADE

The recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe.

PEPTIC ULCER

The usual recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.1 mg administered at 4-hour intervals, 3 or 4 times daily intravenously or intramuscularly. Where more profound effect is required, 0.2 mg may be given. Some patients may need only a single dose, and frequency of administration should be dictated by patient response up to a maximum of four times daily.

ROBINUL Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use).

Pediatric Patients (see PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use)

PREANESTHETIC MEDICATION

The recommended dose of ROBINUL Injection in pediatric patients is 0.004 mg/kg intramuscularly, given 30 to 60 minutes prior to the anticipated time of induction of anesthesia or at the time the preanesthetic narcotic and/or sedative are administered.

INFANTS

(1 month to 2 years of age) may require up to 0.009 mg/kg.

INTRAOPERATIVE MEDICATION

Because of the long duration of action of ROBINUL Injection if used as preanesthetic medication, additional ROBINUL Injection for anticholinergic effect intraoperatively is rarely needed; in the event it is required the recommended pediatric dose is 0.004 mg/kg intravenously, not to exceed 0.1 mg in a single dose which may be repeated, as needed, at intervals of 2 to 3 minutes. The usual attempts should be made to determine the etiology of the arrhythmia, and the surgical or anesthetic manipulations necessary to correct parasympathetic imbalance should be performed.

REVERSAL OF NEUROMUSCULAR BLOCKADE

The recommended pediatric dose of ROBINUL Injection is 0.2 mg for each 1.0 mg of neostigmine or 5.0 mg of pyridostigmine. In order to minimize the appearance of cardiac side effects, the drugs may be administered simultaneously by intravenous injection and may be mixed in the same syringe.

PEPTIC ULCER

ROBINUL Injection is not recommended for the treatment of peptic ulcer in pediatric patients (see PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use).

Diluent Compatibilities

Dextrose 5% and 10% in water, or saline, dextrose 5% in sodium chloride 0.45%, sodium chloride 0.9%, and Ringer's Injection.

Diluent Incompatibilities

Lactated Ringer's solution

Admixture Compatibilities

PHYSICAL COMPATIBILITY

This list does not constitute an endorsement of the clinical utility or safety of co-administration of ROBINUL with these drugs. ROBINUL Injection is compatible for mixing and injection with the following injectable dosage forms: atropine sulfate, USP; Antilirium® (physostigmine salicylate); Benadryl® (diphenhydramine HCL); codeine phosphate, USP; Emete-Con® (benz-quinamide HCL); hydromorphone HCL, USP; Inapsine® (droperidol); Levo-Dromoran® (levorphanol tartrate); lidocaine, USP; meperidine HCL, USP; Mestinon®/Regonol® (pyridostigmine bromide); morphine sulfate, USP; Nubain® (nalbuphine HCL); Numorphan® (oxymorphone HCL); procaine HCL, USP; promethazine HCL, USP; Prostigmin® (neostigmine methylsulfate, USP); scopolamine HBr, USP; Stadol® (butorphanol tartrate); Sublimaze® (fentanyl citrate); Tigan® (trimethobenzamide HCL); and Vistaril® (hydroxyzine HCL). ROBINUL Injection may be administered via the tubing of a running infusion of normal saline.

Admixture Incompatibilities

PHYSICAL IMCOMPATIBILITY

Since the stability of glycopyrrolate is questionable above a pH of 6.0 do not combine ROBINUL Injection in the same syringe with Brevital® (methohexital Na); Chloromycetin® (chloramphenicol Na succinate); Dramamine® (dimenhydrinate); Nembutal® (pentobarbital Na); Pentothal® (thiopental Na); Seconal® (secobarbital Na); sodium bicarbonate (Abbott); Valium® (diazepam); Decadron® (dexamethasone Na phosphate); or Talwin® (pentazocine lactate). These mixtures will result in a pH higher than 6.0 and may result in gas production or precipitation.
Ketamine Hydrochloride

Ketamine Hydrochloride

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Note: Barbiturates and ketamine, being chemically incompatible because of precipitate formation, should not be injected from the same syringe.

If the ketamine dose is augmented with diazepam, the two drugs must be given separately. Do not mix ketamine hydrochloride and diazepam in syringe or infusion flask. For additional information on the use of diazepam, refer to the WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION sections of the diazepam insert.

Preoperative Preparations
While vomiting has been reported following ketamine administration, some airway protection may be afforded because of active laryngeal-pharyngeal reflexes. However, since aspiration may occur with ketamine and since protective reflexes may also be diminished by supplementary anesthetics and msucle relaxants, the possibility of aspiration must be considered. Ketamine is recommended for use in the patient whose stomach is not empty when, in the judgment of the practitioner, the benefits of the drug outweigh the possible risks. Atropine, scopolamine, or another drying agent should be given at an appropriate interval prior to induction.
Onset and Duration

Because of rapid induction following the initial intravenous injection, the patient should be in a supported position during administration.

The onset of action of ketamine is rapid; an intravenous dose of 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb) of body weight usually produces surgical anesthesia within 30 seconds after injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting five to ten minutes. If a longer effect is desired, additional increments can be administered intravenously or intramuscularly to maintain anesthesia without producing significant cumulative effects.

Intramuscular doses, in a range of 9 to 13 mg/kg (4 to 6 mg/lb) usually produce surgical anesthesia within 3 to 4 minutes following injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting 12 to 25 minutes.

Dosage

As with other general anesthetic agents, the individual response to ketamine is somewhat varied depending on the dose, route of administration, and age of patient, so that dosage recommendation cannot be absolutely fixed. The drug should be titrated against the patient's requirements.

Induction

Intravenous Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intravenously may range from 1 mg/kg to 4.5 mg/kg (0.5 to 2 mg/lb). The average amount required to produce five to ten minutes of surgical anesthesia has been 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb).

Alternatively, in adult patients an induction dose of 1 mg to 2 mg/kg intravenous ketamine at a rate of 0.5 mg/kg/min may be used for induction of anesthesia. In addition, diazepam in 2 mg to 5 mg doses, administered in a separate syringe over 60 seconds, may be used. In most cases, 15 mg of intravenous diazepam or less will suffice. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this induction dosage program.

Note: The 100 mg/mL concentration of ketamine should not be injected intravenously without proper dilution. It is recommended the drug be diluted with an equal volume of either Sterile Water for Injection, Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% or Dextrose Injection, 5%.

Rate of administration: It is recommended that ketamine be administered slowly (over a period of 60 seconds). More rapid administration may result in respiratory depression and enhanced pressor response.

Intramuscular Route: The initial dose of ketamine administered intramuscularly may range from 6.5 to 13 mg/kg (3 to 6 mg/lb). A dose of 10 mg/kg (5 mg/lb) will usually produce 12 to 25 minutes of surgical anesthesia.

Maintenance of Anesthesia

The maintenance dose should be adjusted according to the patient's anesthetic needs and whether an additional anesthetic agent is employed.

Increments of one-half to the full induction dose may be repeated as needed for maintenance of anesthesia. However, it should be noted that purposeless and tonic-clonic movements of extremities may occur during the course of anesthesia. These movements do not imply a light plane and are not indicative of the need for additional doses of the anesthetic.

It should be recognized that the larger the total dose of ketamine administered, the longer will be the time to complete recovery.

Adult patients induced with ketamine augmented with intravenous diazepam may be maintained on ketamine given by slow microdrip infusion technique at a dose of 0.1 to 0.5 mg/minute, augmented with diazepam 2 to 5 mg administered intavenously as needed. In many cases 20 mg or less of intravenous diazepam total for combined induction and maintenance will suffice. However, slightly more diazepam may be required depending on the nature and duration of the operation, physical status of the patient, and other factors. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this maintenance dosage program.

Dilution: To prepare a dilute solution containing 1 mg of ketamine per mL, aseptically transfer 10 mL (50 mg per mL vial) or 5 mL (100 mg per mL vial) to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, 5% or Sodium Chloride Injection, 0.9% and mix well. The resultant solution will contain 1 mg of ketamine per mL.

The fluid requirements of the patient and duration of anesthesia must be considered when selecting the appropriate dilution of ketamine hydrochloride injection. If fluid restriction is required, ketamine hydrochloride injection can be added to a 250 mL infusion as described above to provide a ketamine concentration of 2 mg/mL.

Supplementary Agents

Ketamine is clinically compatible with the commonly used general and local anesthetic agents when an adequate respiratory exchange is maintained.

The regimen of a reduced dose of ketamine supplemented with diazepam can be used to produce balanced anesthesia by combination with other agents such as nitrous oxide and oxygen.
Droperidol

Droperidol

Dosage should be individualized. Some of the factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used, and the surgical procedure involved.

Vital signs and ECG should be monitored routinely.

Adult Dosage: The maximum recommended initial dose of droperidol is 2.5 mg IM or slow IV. Additional 1.25 mg doses of droperidol may be administered to achieve the desired effect. However, additional doses should be administered with caution, and only if the potential benefit outweighs the potential risk.

Children's Dosage: For children two to 12 years of age, the maximum recommended inital dose is 0.1 mg/kg, taking into account the patient's age and other clinical factors. However, additional doses should be administered with caution, and only if the potential benefit outweighs the potential risk.

See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS for use of droperidol with other CNS depressants, and in patients with altered response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. If such abnormalities are observed, the drug should not be administered.
Ketalar

Ketalar

Note: Barbiturates and Ketalar, being chemically incompatible because of precipitate formation, should not be injected from the same syringe.

If the ketalar dose is augmented with diazepam, the two drugs must be given separately. Do not mix Ketalar and diazepam in syringe or infusion flask. For additional information on the use of diazepam, refer to the WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION Sections of the diazepam insert.

Preoperative Preparations:
While vomiting has been reported following Ketalar administration, some airway protection may be afforded because of active laryngeal-pharyngeal reflexes. However, since aspiration may occur with Ketalar and since protective reflexes may also be diminished by supplementary anesthetics and muscle relaxants, the possibility of aspiration must be considered. Ketalar is recommended for use in the patient whose stomach is not empty when, in the judgment of the practitioner, the benefits of the drug outweigh the possible risks. Atropine, scopolamine, or another drying agent should be given at an appropriate interval prior to induction.
Onset and Duration:

Because of rapid induction following the initial intravenous injection, the patient should be in a supported position during administration.

The onset of action of Ketalar is rapid; an intravenous dose of 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb) of body weight usually produces surgical anesthesia within 30 seconds after injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting five to ten minutes. If a longer effect is desired, additional increments can be administered intravenously or intramuscularly to maintain anesthesia without producing significant cumulative effects.

Intramuscular doses, in a range of 9 to 13 mg/kg (4 to 6 mg/lb) usually produce surgical anesthesia within 3 to 4 minutes following injection, with the anesthetic effect usually lasting 12 to 25 minutes.

Dosage:

As with other general anesthetic agents, the individual response to Ketalar is somewhat varied depending on the dose, route of administration, and age of patient, so that dosage recommendation cannot be absolutely fixed. The drug should be titrated against the patient's requirements.

Induction:

Intravenous Route: The initial dose of Ketalar administered intravenously may range from 1 mg/kg to 4.5 mg/kg (0.5 to 2 mg/lb). The average amount required to produce five to ten minutes of surgical anesthesia has been 2 mg/kg (1 mg/lb).

Alternatively, in adult patients an induction dose of 1 mg to 2 mg/kg intravenous ketamine at a rate of 0.5 mg/kg/min may be used for induction of anesthesia. In addition, diazepam in 2 mg to 5 mg doses, administered in a separate syringe over 60 seconds, may be used. In most cases, 15 mg of intravenous diazepam or less will suffice. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this induction dosage program.

Note: The 100 mg/mL concentration of Ketalar should not be injected intravenously without proper dilution. It is recommended the drug be diluted with an equal volume of either Sterile Water for injection, USP, Normal Saline, or 5% Dextrose in Water.

Rate of Administration: It is recommended that Ketalar be administered slowly (over a period of 60 seconds). More rapid administration may result in respiratory depression and enhanced pressor response.

Intramuscular Route: The initial dose of Ketalar administered intramuscularly may range from 6.5 to 13 mg/kg (3 to 6 mg/lb). A dose of 10 mg/kg (5 mg/lb) will usually produce 12 to 25 minutes of surgical anesthesia.

Maintenance of Anesthesia:

The maintenance dose should be adjusted according to the patient's anesthetic needs and whether an additional anesthetic agent is employed.

Increments of one-half to the full induction dose may be repeated as needed for maintenance of anesthesia. However, it should be noted that purposeless and tonic-clonic movements of extremities may occur during the course of anesthesia. These movements do not imply a light plane and are not indicative of the need for additional doses of the anesthetic.

It should be recognized that the larger the total dose of Ketalar administered, the longer will be the time to complete recovery.

Adult patients induced with Ketalar augmented with intravenous diazepam may be maintained on Ketalar given by slow microdrip infusion technique at a dose of 0.1 to 0.5 mg/minute, augmented with diazepam 2 to 5 mg administered intravenously as needed. In many cases 20 mg or less of intravenous diazepam total for combined induction and maintenance will suffice. However, slightly more diazepam may be required depending on the nature and duration of the operation, physical status of patient, and other factors. The incidence of psychological manifestations during emergence, particularly dream-like observations and emergence delirium, may be reduced by this maintenance dosage program.

Dilution: To prepare a dilute solution containing 1 mg of ketamine per mL, aseptically transfer 10 mL (50 mg per mL) or 5 mL (100 mg per mL) to 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP (Normal Saline) and mix well. The resultant solution will contain 1 mg of ketamine per mL.

The fluid requirements of the patient and duration of anesthesia must be considered when selecting the appropriate dilution of Ketalar. If fluid restriction is required, Ketalar can be added to a 250 mL infusion as described above to provide a Ketalar concentration of 2 mg/mL.

Ketalar 10 mg/mL are not recommended for dilution.

Supplementary Agents:

Ketalar is clinically compatible with the commonly used general and local anesthetic agents when an adequate respiratory exchange is maintained.

The regimen of a reduced dose of Ketalar supplemented with diazepam can be used to produce balanced anesthesia by combination with other agents such as nitrous oxide and oxygen.
Cleocin Phosphate

Cleocin Phosphate

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults: Parenteral (IM or IV Administration): Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens): 600-1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspected Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens: 1200-2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life-threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Dilution and Infusion Rates section below.

Single intramuscular injections of greater than 600 mg are not recommended.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:

To maintain serum clindamycin levels

Rapid infusion rate

Maintenance infusion rate

Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1.00 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month): 15 to 20 mg/kg/day in 3 to 4 equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients 1 month of age to 16 years: Parenteral (IM or IV) Administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to oral CLEOCIN PEDIATRIC® Flavored Granules (clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride) or CLEOCIN HCL® Capsules (clindamycin hydrochloride) when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of B-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Dilution and Infusion Rates: Clindamycin phosphate must be diluted prior to IV administration. The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute.

The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Dose

Diluent

Time

300 mg

50 mL

10 min

600 mg

50 mL

20 min

900 mg

50-100 mL

30 min

1200 mg

100 mL

40 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility: Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE Sterile Solution (clindamycin phosphate) in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions. For current information regarding compatibilities of clindamycin phosphate under specific conditions, please contact the Medical and Drug Information Unit, Pharmacia & Upjohn Company (Division of Pfizer Inc).

Physico-Chemical Stability of diluted solutions of CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE

Room temperature: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in dextrose injection 5%, sodium chloride injection 0.9%, or Lactated Ringers Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also, 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in dextrose injection 5%, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in dextrose injection 5%, sodium chloride injection 0.9%, or Lactated Ringers Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C. IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in dextrose injection 5%, sodium chloride injection 0.9%, or Lactated Ringers Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

DIRECTIONS FOR DISPENSING

Pharmacy Bulk Package-Not for Direct Infusion

The Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a Pharmacy Admixture Service only under a laminar flow hood. Entry into the vial should be made with a small diameter sterile transfer set or other small diameter sterile dispensing device, and contents dispensed in aliquots using aseptic technique. Multiple entries with a needle and syringe are not recommended. AFTER ENTRY USE ENTIRE CONTENTS OF VIAL PROMPTLY. ANY UNUSED PORTION MUST BE DISCARDED WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER INITIAL ENTRY.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE IV Solution in Galaxy Plastic Container

Premixed CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE IV Solution is for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. Check for minute leaks prior to use by squeezing bag firmly. If leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired. Do not add supplementary medication. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use unless solution is clear and seal is intact.

Caution: Do not use plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.

Preparation for Administration:
Suspend container from eyelet support. Remove protector from outlet port at bottom of container. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
Preparation of CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE in ADD-Vantage System-For IV Use Only. CLEOCIN PHOSPHATE 600 mg and 900 mg may be reconstituted in 50 mL or 100 mL, respectively, of dextrose injection 5% or sodium chloride injection 0.9% in the ADD-diluent container. Refer to separate instructions for ADD-Vantage ‡ System.
Nighttime Sleep Aid

Nighttime Sleep Aid

Dosing Information

Supraventricular Tachycardia

Dosage needs to be titrated, using ventricular rate as the guide.

An initial loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg (500 mcg/kg) infused over a minute duration followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.05 mg/kg/min (50 mcg/kg/min) for the next 4 minutes is recommended. This should give a rough guide with respect to the responsiveness of ventricular rate.

After the 4 minutes of initial maintenance infusion (total treatment duration being 5 minutes), depending upon the desired ventricular response, the maintenance infusion may be continued at 0.05 mg/kg/min or increased step-wise (e.g. 0.1 mg/kg/min, 0.15 mg/kg/min to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min) with each step being maintained for 4 or more minutes.

If more rapid slowing of ventricular response is imperative, the 0.5 mg/kg loading dose infused over a 1 minute period may be repeated, followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.1 mg/kg/min for 4 minutes. Then, depending upon ventricular rate, another (and final) loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg/min infused over a 1 minute period may be administered followed by a maintenance infusion of 0.15 mg/kg/min. If needed, after 4 minutes of the 0.15 mg/kg/min maintenance infusion, the maintenance infusion may be increased to a maximum of 0.2 mg/kg/min.

In the absence of loading doses, constant infusion of a single concentration of esmolol reaches pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic steady-state in about 30 minutes. Maintenance infusions (with or without loading doses) may be continued for as long as 24 hours.

The following table summarizes the above and assumes that 3 loading doses (the maximum recommended) are infused over 1 minute and incremental maintenance doses are required after each loading dose. There should be no 4th loading dose, but the maintenance dose may be incremented one more time.

* As the desired heart rate or endpoint is approached, the loading infusion may be omitted and the maintenance infusion titrated to 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) or downward as appropriate. Maintenance dosages above 200 mcg/kg/min (0.2 mg/kg/min) have not been shown to have significantly increased benefits. The interval between titration steps may be increased.In the treatment of supraventricular tachycardia, responses to Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection usually (over 95%) occur within the range of 50 to 200 mcg/kg/min (0.05 to 0.2 mg/kg/min). The average effective dosage is approximately 100 mcg/kg/min (0.1 mg/kg/min) although dosages as low as 25 mcg/kg/min (0.025 mg/kg/min) have been adequate in some patients. Dosages as high as 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) have been used, but these provide little added effect and increase the rate of adverse effects, so doses greater than 200 micrograms/kg/min are not recommended. Dosage of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection in supraventricular tachycardia must be individualized by titration in which each step consists of a loading dosage followed by a maintenance dosage. This specific dosage regimen has not been studied intraoperatively and, because of the time required for titration, may not be optimal for intraoperative use.The safety of dosages above 300 mcg/kg/min (0.3 mg/kg/min) has not been studied.In the event of an adverse reaction, the dosage of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection may be reduced or discontinued. If a local infusion site reaction develops, an alternate infusion site should be used and caution should be taken to prevent extravasation. The use of butterfly needles should be avoided.Abrupt cessation of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection in patients has not been reported to produce the withdrawal effects which may occur with abrupt withdrawal of beta blockers following chronic use in coronary artery disease (CAD) patients. However, caution should still be used in abruptly discontinuing infusions of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection in CAD patients.After achieving an adequate control of the heart rate and a stable clinical status in patients with supraventricular tachycardia, transition to alternative antiarrhythmic agents such as propranolol, digoxin, or verapamil, may be accomplished.A recommended guideline for such a transition is given below but the physician should carefully consider the labeling instructions for the alternative agent selected.
Alternative Agent Dosage Propranolol hydrochloride 10 to 20 mg q 4 to 6 hrs Digoxin 0.125 to 0.5 mg q 6 hrs (p.o. or i.v.) Verapamil 80 mg q 6 hrs
The dosage of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection should be reduced as follows:1. Thirty minutes following the first dose of the alternative agent, reduce the infusion rate of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection by one-half (50%).2. Following the second dose of the alternative agent, monitor the patient's response and if satisfactory response is maintained for the first hour, discontinue Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection.The use of infusions of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection up to 24 hours has been well documented; in addition, limited data from 24 to 48 hrs (N=48) indicate that Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection is well tolerated up to 48 hours.Intraoperative and Postoperative Tachycardia and/or HypertensionIn the intraoperative and postoperative settings it is not always advisable to slowly titrate the dose of esmolol hydrochloride to a therapeutic effect. Therefore, two dosing options are presented: immediate control dosing and a gradual control when the physician has time to titrate.1. Immediate ControlFor intraoperative treatment of tachycardia and/or hypertension give an 80 mg (approximately 1 mg/kg) bolus dose over 30 seconds followed by a 150 mcg/kg/min infusion, if necessary. Adjust the infusion rate as required up to 300 mcg/kg/min to maintain desired heart rate and/or blood pressure.2. Gradual ControlFor postoperative tachycardia and hypertension, the dosing schedule is the same as that used in supraventricular tachycardia. To initiate treatment, administer a loading dosage infusion of 500 mcg/kg/min of Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection for one minute followed by a four-minute maintenance infusion of 50 mcg/kg/min. If an adequate therapeutic effect is not observed within five minutes, repeat the same loading dosage and follow with a maintenance infusion increased to 100 mcg/kg/min (see above Supraventricular Tachycardia).Notes:1. Higher dosages (250 to 300 mcg/kg/min) may be required for adequate control of blood pressure than those required for the treatment of atrial fibrillation , flutter and sinus bradycardia. One third of the postoperative hypertensive patients required these higher doses.2. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.Direction for useEsmolol Hydrochloride Injection is recommended for intravenous administration. It may be used to administer the appropriate loading dosage infusions by hand-held syringe while the maintenance infusion is being prepared.Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection has a concentration of 10 mg/mL. When using this concentration, a loading dose of 0.5 mg/kg infused over a 1 minute period of time, for a 70 kg patient is 3.5 mL.Compatibility with Commonly Used Intravenous FluidsEsmolol Hydrochloride Injection was tested for compatibility with 10 commonly used intravenous fluids at a final concentration of 10 mg esmolol hydrochloride per mL. Esmolol Hydrochloride Injection was found to be compatible with the following solutions and was stable for at least 24 hours at controlled room temperature or under refrigeration:Dextrose (5%) Injection, USPDextrose (5%) in Lactated Ringer's InjectionDextrose (5%) in Ringer's InjectionDextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USPDextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USPLactated Ringer's Injection, USPPotassium Chloride (40 mEq/liter) in Dextrose (5%) Injection, USPSodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USPSodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USPEsmolol Hydrochloride Injection is NOT compatible with Sodium Bicarbonate (5%) Injection, USP.
Midazolam Hydrochloride...

Midazolam Hydrochloride

Midazolam hydrochloride injection is a potent sedative agent that requires slow administration and individualization of dosage. Clinical experience has shown midazolam hydrochloride to be 3 to 4 times as potent per mg as diazepam. BECAUSE SERIOUS AND LIFE-THREATENING CARDIORESPIRATORY ADVERSE EVENTS HAVE BEEN REPORTED, PROVISION FOR MONITORING, DETECTION AND CORRECTION OF THESE REACTIONS MUST BE MADE FOR EVERY PATIENT T0 WHOM MIDAZOLAM HYDROCHLORIDE INJECTION IS ADMINISTERED, REGARDLESS OF AGE OR HEALTH STATUS. Excessive single doses or rapid intravenous administration may result in respiratory depression, airway obstruction and/or arrest. The potential for these latter effects is increased in debilitated patients, those receiving concomitant medications capable of depressing the CNS, and patients without an endotracheal tube but undergoing a procedure involving the upper airway such as endoscopy or dental (see Boxed WARNING and WARNINGS). Reactions such as agitation, involuntary movements, hyperactivity and combativeness have been reported in adult and pediatric patients. Should such reactions occur, caution should be exercised before continuing administration of midazolam hydrochloride (see WARNINGS). Midazolam hydrochloride injection should only be administered IM or IV (see WARNINGS). Care should be taken to avoid intra-arterial injection or extravasation (see WARNINGS). Midazolam Hydrochloride Injection may be mixed in the same syringe with the following frequently used premedications: morphinesulfate, meperidine, atropine sulfate or scopolamine. Midazolam, at a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL, is compatible with 5% dextrose in water and 0.9% sodium chloride for up to 24 hours and with lactated Ringer’s solution for up to 4 hours. Both the 1 mg/mL and 5 mg/ mL formulations of midazolam may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water.Monitoring: Patient response to sedative agents, and resultant respiratory status, is variable. Regardless of the intended level of sedation or route of administration, sedation is a continuum; a patient may move easily from light to deep sedation, with potential loss of protective reflexes. This is especially true in pediatric patients. Sedative doses should be individually titrated, taking into account patient age, clinical status and concomitant use of other CNS depressants. Continuous monitoring of respiratory and cardiac function is required (i.e., pulse oximetry).Adults and Pediatrics: Sedation guidelines recommend a careful presedation history to determine how a patient’s underlying medical conditions or concomitant medications might affect their response to sedation/analgesia as well as a physical examination including a focused examination of the airway for abnormalities. Further recommendations include appropriate presedation fasting. Titration to effect with multiple small doses is essential for safe administration. It should be noted that adequate time to achieve peak central nervous system effect (3 to 5 minutes) for midazolam should be allowed between doses to minimize the potential for oversedation. Sufficient time must elapse between doses of concomitant sedative medications to allow the effect of each dose to be assessed before subsequent drug administration. This is an important consideration for all patients who receive intravenous midazolam. Immediate availability of resuscitative drugs and age- and size-appropriate equipment and personnel trained in their use and skilled in airway management should be assured (see WARNINGS).Pediatrics: For deeply sedated pediatric patients a dedicated individual, other than the practitioner performing the procedure, should monitor the patient throughout the procedure.Intravenous access is not thought to be necessary for all pediatric patients sedated for a diagnostic or therapeutic procedure because in some cases the difficulty of gaining IV access would defeat the purpose of sedating the child; rather, emphasis should be placed upon having the intravenous equipment available and a practitioner skilled in establishing vascular access in pediatric patients immediately available.

USUAL ADULT DOSE
INTRAMUSCULARLY For preoperative sedation/anxiolysis/ amnesia (induction ofsleepiness or drowsiness and relief of apprehension and to impairmemory of perioperative events).For intramuscular use, midazolam hydrochloride should beinjected deep in a large muscle mass. The recommended premedication dose of midazolam for goodrisk (ASA Physical Status I and II) adult patients below the ageof 60 years is 0.07 to 0.08 mg/kg IM (approximately 5 mg IM)administered up to 1 hour before surgery.The dose must be individualized and reduced when IMmidazolam is administered to patients with chronic obstructivepulmonary disease, other higher risk surgical patients, patients60 or more years of age, and patients who have receivedconcomitant narcotics or other CNS depressants (see ADVERSEREACTIONS). In a study of patients 60 years or older, who didnot receive concomitant administration of narcotics, 2 to 3 mg(0.02 to 0.05 mg/kg) of midazolam produced adequate sedationduring the preoperative period. The dose of 1 mg IM midazolammay suffice for some older patients if the anticipated intensityand duration of sedation is less critical. As with any potentialrespiratory depressant, these patients require observation for signsof cardiorespiratory depression after receiving IM midazolam.Onset is within 15 minutes, peaking at 30 to 60 minutes. It can beadministered concomitantly with atropine sulfate or scopolaminehydrochloride and reduced doses of narcotics. INTRAVENOUSLY Sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for procedures (See INDICATIONSAND USAGE): Narcotic premedication results in less variabilityin patient response and a reduction in dosage of midazolam. Forperoral procedures, the use of an appropriate topical anesthetic isrecommended. For bronchoscopic procedures, the use of narcoticpremedication is recommended.Midazolam hydrochloride 1 mg/mLformulation is recommended for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia forprocedures to facilitate slowerinjection. Both the 1 mg/mL and the5 mg/mL formulations may be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water. When used for sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia for a procedure,dosage must be individualized and titrated. Midazolamhydrochloride should always be titrated slowly; administer over atleast 2 minutes and allow an additional 2 or more minutes to fullyevaluate the sedative effect. Individual response will vary withage, physical status and concomitant medications, but may alsovary independent of these factors. (See WARNINGS concerningcardiac/respiratory arrest/airway obstruction/ hypoventilation.)1. Healthy Adults Below the Age of 60: Titrate slowly to thedesired effect, (e.g., the initiation of slurred speech). Somepatients may respond to as little as 1 mg. No more than 2.5mg should be given over a period of at least 2 minutes. Waitan additional 2 or more minutes to fully evaluate the sedativeeffect. If further titration is necessary, continue to titrate, usingsmall increments, to the appropriate level of sedation. Waitan additional 2 or more minutes after each increment to fullyevaluate the sedative effect. A total dose greater than 5 mg isnot usually necessary to reach the desired endpoint.If narcotic premedication or other CNS depressants are used,patients will require approximately 30% less midazolam thanunpremedicated patients.2. Patients Age 60 or Older, and Debilitated or ChronicallyIII Patients: Because the danger of hypoventilation, airwayobstruction, or apnea is greater in elderly patients and thosewith chronic disease states or decreased pulmonary reserve,and because the peak effect may take longer in these patients,increments should be smaller and the rate of injection slower.Titrate slowly to the desired effect, (e.g., the initiation ofslurred speech). Some patients may respond to as little as 1mg. No more than 1.5 mg should be given over a period ofno less than 2 minutes. Wait an additional 2 or more minutesto fully evaluate the sedative effect. If additional titration isnecessary, it should be given at a rate of no more than 1 mgover a period of 2 minutes, waiting an additional 2 or moreminutes each time to fully evaluate the sedative effect. Totaldoses greater than 3.5 mg are not usually necessary.If concomitant CNS depressant premedications are used inthese patients, they will require at least 50% less midazolamthan healthy young unpremedicated patients.3. Maintenance Dose: Additional doses to maintain the desiredlevel of sedation may be given in increments of 25% of thedose used to first reach the sedative endpoint, but again onlyby slow titration, especially in the elderly and chronically illor debilitated patient. These additional doses should be givenonly after a thorough clinical evaluation clearly indicates theneed for additional sedation. Induction of Anesthesia: For induction of general anesthesia, before administration of otheranesthetic agents. Individual response to the drug is variable, particularly when anarcotic premedication is not used. The dosage should be titratedto the desired effect according to the patient’s age and clinicalstatus.When midazolam is used before other intravenous agents forinduction of anesthesia, the initial dose of each agent may besignificantly reduced, at times to as low as 25% of the usual initialdose of the individual agents.Unpremedicated Patients: In the absence of premedication, anaverage adult under the age of 55 years will usually require aninitial dose of 0.3 to 0.35 mg/kg for induction, administered over20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes for effect. If neededto complete induction, increments of approximately 25% of thepatient’s initial dose may be used; induction may instead becompleted with inhalational anesthetics. In resistant cases, up to0.6 mg/kg total dose may be used for induction, but such largerdoses may prolong recovery.Unpremedicated patients over the age of 55 years usually requireless midazolam for induction; an initial dose of 0.3 mg/kg isrecommended. Unpremedicated patients with severe systemicdisease or other debilitation usually require less midazolam forinduction. An initial dose of 0.2 to 0.25 mg/kg will usually suffice;in some cases, as little as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.Premedicated Patients: When the patient has received sedative ornarcotic premedication, particularly narcotic premedication, therange of recommended doses is 0.15 to 0.35 mg/kg.In average adults below the age of 55 years, a dose of 0.25 mg/kg, administered over 20 to 30 seconds and allowing 2 minutes foreffect, will usually suffice.The initial dose of 0.2 mg/kg is recommended for good risk (ASAI and II) surgical patients over the age of 55 years.In some patients with severe systemic disease or debilitation, aslittle as 0.15 mg/kg may suffice.Narcotic premedication frequently used during clinical trialsincluded fentanyl (1.5 to 2 mcg/kg IV, administered 5 minutesbefore induction), morphine (dosage individualized, up to 0.15mg/kg IM), and meperidine (dosage individualized, up to 1 mg/kg IM). Sedative premedications were hydroxyzine pamoate (100mg orally) and sodium secobarbital (200 mg orally). Except forintravenous fentanyl, administered 5 minutes before induction,all other premedications should be administered approximately1 hour prior to the time anticipated for midazolam induction. Injectable midazolam hydrochloride can also be usedduring maintenance of anesthesia, for surgical procedures,as a component of balanced anesthesia. Effective narcoticpremedication is especially recommended in such cases. Incremental injections of approximately 25% of the induction doseshould be given in response to signs of lightening of anesthesiaand repeated as necessary. CONTINUOUS INFUSION For continuous infusion, midazolam hydrochloride 5 mg/mLformulation is recommended diluted to a concentration of 0.5 mg/mL with 0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose in water. Usual Adult Dose: If a loading dose is necessary to rapidlyinitiate sedation, 0.01 to 0.05 mg/kg (approximately 0.5 to 4mg for a typical adult) may be given slowly or infused overseveral minutes. This dose may be repeated at 10 to 15 minuteintervals until adequate sedation is achieved. For maintenanceof sedation, the usual initial infusion rate is 0.02 to 0.1 mg/kg/hr (1 to 7 mg/hr). Higher loading or maintenance infusionrates may occasionally be required in some patients. The lowestrecommended doses should be used in patients with residualeffects from anesthetic drugs, or in those concurrently receivingother sedatives or opioids.Individual response to midazolam is variable. The infusion rateshould be titrated to the desired level of sedation, taking intoaccount the patient’s age, clinical status and current medications.In general, midazolam should be infused at the lowest rate thatproduces the desired level of sedation.Assessment of sedation should be performed at regular intervalsand the midazolam infusion rate adjusted up or down by 25% to50% of the initial infusion rate so as to assure adequate titrationof sedation level. Larger adjustments or even a small incrementaldose may be necessary if rapid changes in the level of sedationare indicated. In addition, the infusion rate should be decreasedby 10% to 25% every few hours to find the minimum effectiveinfusion rate. Finding the minimum effective infusion ratedecreases the potential accumulation of midazolam and providesfor the most rapid recovery once the infusion is terminated.Patients who exhibit agitation, hypertension, or tachycardia inresponse to noxious stimulation, but who are otherwise adequatelysedated, may benefit from concurrent administration of anopioid analgesic. Addition of an opioid will generally reduce theminimum effective midazolam hydrochloride infusion rate. PEDIATRIC PATIENTS UNLIKE ADULT PATIENTS, PEDIATRIC PATIENTSGENERALLY RECEIVE INCREMENTS OF MIDAZOLAMHYDROCHLORIDE ON A MG/KG BASIS. As a group,pediatric patients generally require higher dosages of midazolamhydrochloride (mg/kg) than do adults. Younger (less than sixyears) pediatric patients may require higher dosages (mg/kg)than older pediatric patients, and may require close monitoring(see tables below). In obese PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, thedose should be calculated based on ideal body weight. Whenmidazolam is given in conjunction with opioids or other sedatives,the potential for respiratory depression, airway obstruction, orhypoventilation is increased. For appropriate patient monitoring,see Boxed WARNING, WARNINGS, and DOSAGE ANDADMINISTRATION, Monitoring. The health care practitionerwho uses this medication in pediatric patients should be aware ofand follow accepted professional guidelines for pediatric sedationappropriate to their situation. OBSERVER'S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION (OAA/S) Responsiveness Speech Facial Expression Eyes Composite Score Responds readily to namespoken in normal tone normal normal clear, no ptosis 5 (alert) Lethargic response to namespoken in normal tone mild slowingor thickening mild relaxation glazed or mild ptosis(less than half the eye) 4 Responds only after name iscalled loudly and/or repeatedly slurring orprominent slowing marked relaxation(slack jaw) glazed and marked ptosis 3 Responds only after mildprodding or shaking few recognizablewords - - 2 Does not respond to mildprodding or shaking - - - 1 (deep sleep) FREQUENCY OF OBSERVER'S ASSESSMENT OF ALERTNESS/SEDATION COMPOSITE SCORES IN ONE STUDY OF PEDIATRIC PATIENTS UNDERGOING PROCEDURES WITH INTRAVENOUS MIDAZOLAM FOR SEDATION Age Range(years) n OAA/S Score 1(deep sleep) 2 3 4 5 (alert) 1-2 16 6(38%) 4(25%) 3(19%) 3(19%) 0 greater than 2-5 22 9(41%) 5(23%) 8(36%) 0 0 greater than 5-12 34 1(3%) 6(18%) 22(65%) 5(15%) 0 greater than 12-17 18 0 4(22%) 14 (78%) 0 0 Total (1-17 90 16(18%) 19(21%) 47(52%) 8(9%) 0 INTRAMUSCULARLY For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to anesthesia or forprocedures, intramuscular midazolam can be used to sedatepediatric patients to facilitate less traumatic insertion of anintravenous catheter for titration of additional medication. USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)Sedation after intramuscular midazolam is age and dosedependent: higher doses may result in deeper and more prolongedsedation. Doses of 0.1 to 0.15 mg/kg are usually effective and donot prolong emergence from general anesthesia. For more anxiouspatients, doses up to 0.5 mg/kg have been used. Although notsystematically studied, the total dose usually does not exceed 10mg. If midazolam is given with an opioid, the initial dose of eachmust be reduced. INTRAVENOUSLY BYINTERMITTENT INJECTION For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia prior to and during procedures orprior to anesthesia. USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)It should be recognized that the depth of sedation/anxiolysisneeded for pediatric patients depends on the type of procedure tobe performed. For example, simple light sedation/anxiolysis inthe preoperative period is quite different from the deep sedationand analgesia required for an endoscopic procedure in a child.For this reason, there is a broad range of dosage. For all pediatricpatients, regardless of the indications for sedation/anxiolysis, itis vital to titrate midazolam hydrochloride and other concomitantmedications slowly to the desired clinical effect. The initial doseof midazolam should be administered over 2 to 3 minutes. Sincemidazolam hydrochloride is water soluble, it takes approximatelythree times longer than diazepam to achieve peak EEG effects,therefore one must wait an additional 2 to 3 minutes to fullyevaluate the sedative effect before initiating a procedure orrepeating a dose. If further sedation is necessary, continue totitrate with small increments until the appropriate level of sedationis achieved. If other medications capable of depressing theCNS are coadministered, the peak effect of those concomitantmedications must be considered and the dose of midazolamadjusted. The importance of drug titration to effect is vital to thesafe sedation/anxiolysis of the pediatric patient. The total dose ofmidazolam will depend on patient response, the type and durationof the procedure, as well as the type and dose of concomitantmedications.1. Pediatric patients less than 6 months of age: Limitedinformation is available in non-intubated pediatric patientsless than 6 months of age. It is uncertain when the patienttransfers from neonatal physiology to pediatric physiology,therefore the dosing recommendations are unclear. Pediatricpatients less than 6 months of age are particularly vulnerable toairway obstruction and hypoventilation, therefore titration withsmall increments to clinical effect and careful monitoring areessential.2. Pediatric patients 6 months to 5 years of age: Initial dose 0.05to 0.1 mg/kg. A total dose up to 0.6 mg/kg may be necessaryto reach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 6mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may beassociated with the higher doses.3. Pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age: Initial dose 0.025to 0.05 mg/kg; total dose up to 0.4 mg/kg may be needed toreach the desired endpoint but usually does not exceed 10mg. Prolonged sedation and risk of hypoventilation may beassociated with the higher doses.4. Pediatric patients 12 to 16 years of age: Should be dosedas adults. Prolonged sedation may be associated with higherdoses; some patients in this age range will require higher thanrecommended adult doses but the total dose usually does notexceed 10 mg.The dose of midazolam hydrochloride must be reduced in patientspremedicated with opioid or other sedative agents includingmidazolam. Higher risk or debilitated patients may require lowerdosages whether or not concomitant sedating medications havebeen administered (see WARNINGS). CONTINUOUSINTRAVENOUS INFUSION For sedation/anxiolysis/amnesia in critical care settings. USUAL PEDIATRIC DOSE (NON-NEONATAL)To initiate sedation, an intravenous loading dose of 0.05 to 0.2mg/kg administered over at least 2 to 3 minutes can be usedto establish the desired clinical effect IN PATIENTS WHOSETRACHEA IS INTUBATED. (Midazolam should not beadministered as a rapid intravenous dose.) This loading dose maybe followed by a continuous intravenous infusion to maintainthe effect. An infusion of midazolam hydrochloride injectionhas been used in patients whose trachea was intubated but whowere allowed to breathe spontaneously. Assisted ventilationis recommended for pediatric patients who are receiving othercentral nervous system depressant medications such as opioids.Based on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinicalexperience, continuous intravenous infusions of midazolam shouldbe initiated at a rate of 0.06 to 0.12 mg/kg/hr (1 to 2 mcg/kg/min).The rate of infusion can be increased or decreased (generallyby 25% of the initial or subsequent infusion rate) as required,or supplemental intravenous doses of midazolam hydrochloridecan be administered to increase or maintain the desired effect.Frequent assessment at regular intervals using standard pain/sedation scales is recommended. Drug elimination may bedelayed in patients receiving erythromycin and/or other P450-3A4enzyme inhibitors (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactionssection) and in patients with liver dysfunction, low cardiac output(especially those requiring inotropic support), and in neonates.Hypotension may be observed in patients who are critically ill,particularly those receiving opioids and/or when midazolam israpidly administered.When initiating an infusion with midazolam in hemodynamicallycompromised patients, the usual loading dose of midazolamhydrochloride should be titrated in small increments and thepatient monitored for hemodynamic instability, e.g., hypotension.These patients are also vulnerable to the respiratory depressanteffects of midazolam and require careful monitoring of respiratoryrate and oxygen saturation. CONTINUOUSINTRAVENOUS INFUSION For sedation in critical care settings. USUAL NEONATAL DOSEBased on pharmacokinetic parameters and reported clinicalexperience in preterm and term neonates WHOSE TRACHEAWAS INTUBATED, continuous intravenous infusions ofmidazolam hydrochloride injection should be initiated at a rateof 0.03 mg/kg/hr (0.5 mcg/kg/min) in neonates less than32 weeks and0.06 mg/kg/hr (1 mcg/kg/min) in neonates more than 32 weeks. Intravenousloading doses should not be used in neonates, rather the infusionmay be run more rapidly for the first several hours to establishtherapeutic plasma levels. The rate of infusion should be carefullyand frequently reassessed, particularly after the first 24 hours soas to administer the lowest possible effective dose and reduce thepotential for drug accumulation. Hypotension may be observedin patients who are critically ill and in preterm and term infants,particularly those receiving fentanyl and/or when midazolam isadministered rapidly. Due to an increased risk of apnea, extremecaution is advised when sedating preterm and former pretermpatients whose trachea is not intubated. Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

Because of the increased risk of adverse cardiovascular reactions associated with rapid administration, intravenous administration should not exceed 50 mg per minute in adults. In pediatric patients, the drug should be administered at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.

As non-emergency therapy, Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be administered more slowly as either a loading dose or by intermittent infusion. Because of the risks of cardiac and local toxicity associated with intravenous phenytoin, oral phenytoin should be used whenever possible.

Because adverse cardiovascular reactions have occurred during and after infusions, careful cardiac monitoring is needed during and after the administration of intravenous Phenytoin Sodium Injection. Reduction in rate of administration or discontinuation of dosing may be needed.

Because of the risk of local toxicity, intravenous Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be administered directly into a large peripheral or central vein through a large-gauge catheter. Prior to the administration, the patency of the IV catheter should be tested with a flush of sterile saline. Each injection of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should then be followed by a flush of sterile saline through the same cathether to avoid local venous irritation due to the alkalinity of the solution.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection can be given diluted with normal saline. The addition of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection to dextrose and dextrose-containing solutions should be avoided due to lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.

Treatment with Phenytoin Sodium Injection can be initiated either with a loading dose or an infusion:

Loading Dose: A loading dose of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be injected slowly, not exceeding 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/min (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients.

Infusion: For infusion administration, parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be diluted in normal saline with the final concentration of phenytoin sodium in the solution no less than 5 mg/mL. Administration should commence immediately after the mixture has been prepared and must be completed within 1 to 4 hours (the infusion mixture should not be refrigerated). An in-line filter (0.22-0.55 microns) should be used.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

The diluted infusion mixture (Phenytoin Sodium Injection plus normal saline) should not be refrigerated. If the undiluted parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection is refrigerated or frozen, a precipitate might form: this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. A faint yellow coloration may develop, however this has no effect on the potency of the solution.

Status Epilepticus

In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70-kg patient).

The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6-8 hours.

In the pediatric population, a loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg of phenytoin sodium intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10-20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.

Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression.

Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage.

Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous short-acting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of phenytoin.

If administration of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia and other appropriate measures should be considered.

Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Nonemergent Loading and Maintenance Dosing

Because of the risks of cardiac and local toxicity associated with intravenous phenytoin, oral phenytoin should be used whenever possible. In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly. The rate of intravenous administration should not exceed 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/min (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients. Slower administration rates are recommended to minimize the cardiovascular adverse reactions. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram, blood pressure, and respiratory function is essential.

The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses or oral or intravenous phenytoin every 6-8 hours.

Ordinarily, Phenytoin Sodium Injection should not be given intramuscularly because of the risk of necrosis, abscess formation, and erratic absorption. If intramuscular administration is required, compensating dosage adjustments are ncessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites.

Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected.

IV Substitution For Oral Phenytoin Therapy

When treatment with oral phenytoin is not possible, IV phenytoin can be substituted for oral phenytoin at the same total daily dose. Phenytoin capsules are approximately 90% bioavailable by the oral route. Phenytoin is 100% bioavailable by the IV route. For this reason, plasma phenytoin concentrations may increase modestly when IV phenytoin is substituted for oral phenytoin sodium therapy. The rate of administration for IV phenytoin should be no greater than 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/mi (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients.

Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form. Phenytoin Sodium Injection is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease: Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution. Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations.

Elderly Patients: Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric: A loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg of Phenytoin Sodium Injection intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10-20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.
Phenytoin Sodium

Phenytoin Sodium

Because of the increased risk of adverse cardiovascular reactions associated with rapid administration, intravenous administration should not exceed 50 mg per minute in adults. In pediatric patients, the drug should be administered at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.

As non-emergency therapy, Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be administered more slowly as either a loading dose or by intermittent infusion. Because of the risks of cardiac and local toxicity associated with intravenous phenytoin, oral phenytoin should be used whenever possible.

Because adverse cardiovascular reactions have occurred during and after infusions, careful cardiac monitoring is needed during and after the administration of intravenous Phenytoin Sodium Injection. Reduction in rate of administration or discontinuation of dosing may be needed.

Because of the risk of local toxicity, intravenous Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be administered directly into a large peripheral or central vein through a large-gauge catheter. Prior to the administration, the patency of the IV catheter should be tested with a flush of sterile saline. Each injection of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should then be followed by a flush of sterile saline through the same cathether to avoid local venous irritation due to the alkalinity of the solution.

Phenytoin Sodium Injection can be given diluted with normal saline. The addition of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection to dextrose and dextrose-containing solutions should be avoided due to lack of solubility and resultant precipitation.

Treatment with Phenytoin Sodium Injection can be initiated either with a loading dose or an infusion:

Loading Dose: A loading dose of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be injected slowly, not exceeding 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/min (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients.

Infusion: For infusion administration, parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection should be diluted in normal saline with the final concentration of phenytoin sodium in the solution no less than 5 mg/mL. Administration should commence immediately after the mixture has been prepared and must be completed within 1 to 4 hours (the infusion mixture should not be refrigerated). An in-line filter (0.22-0.55 microns) should be used.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

The diluted infusion mixture (Phenytoin Sodium Injection plus normal saline) should not be refrigerated. If the undiluted parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection is refrigerated or frozen, a precipitate might form: this will dissolve again after the solution is allowed to stand at room temperature. The product is still suitable for use. A faint yellow coloration may develop, however this has no effect on the potency of the solution.

Status Epilepticus

In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly intravenously, at a rate not exceeding 50 mg per minute (this will require approximately 20 minutes in a 70-kg patient).

The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses of 100 mg orally or intravenously every 6-8 hours.

In the pediatric population, a loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg of phenytoin sodium intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10-20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.

Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram and blood pressure is essential. The patient should be observed for signs of respiratory depression.

Determination of phenytoin plasma levels is advised when using phenytoin in the management of status epilepticus and in the subsequent establishment of maintenance dosage.

Other measures, including concomitant administration of an intravenous benzodiazepine such as diazepam, or an intravenous short-acting barbiturate, will usually be necessary for rapid control of seizures because of the required slow rate of administration of phenytoin.

If administration of parenteral Phenytoin Sodium Injection does not terminate seizures, the use of other anticonvulsants, intravenous barbiturates, general anesthesia and other appropriate measures should be considered.

Intramuscular administration should not be used in the treatment of status epilepticus because the attainment of peak plasma levels may require up to 24 hours.

Nonemergent Loading and Maintenance Dosing

Because of the risks of cardiac and local toxicity associated with intravenous phenytoin, oral phenytoin should be used whenever possible. In adults, a loading dose of 10 to 15 mg/kg should be administered slowly. The rate of intravenous administration should not exceed 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/min (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients. Slower administration rates are recommended to minimize the cardiovascular adverse reactions. Continuous monitoring of the electrocardiogram, blood pressure, and respiratory function is essential.

The loading dose should be followed by maintenance doses or oral or intravenous phenytoin every 6-8 hours.

Ordinarily, Phenytoin Sodium Injection should not be given intramuscularly because of the risk of necrosis, abscess formation, and erratic absorption. If intramuscular administration is required, compensating dosage adjustments are ncessary to maintain therapeutic plasma levels. An intramuscular dose 50% greater than the oral dose is necessary to maintain these levels. When returned to oral administration, the dose should be reduced by 50% of the original oral dose for one week to prevent excessive plasma levels due to sustained release from intramuscular tissue sites.

Monitoring plasma levels would help prevent a fall into the subtherapeutic range. Serum blood level determinations are especially helpful when possible drug interactions are suspected.

IV Substitution For Oral Phenytoin Therapy

When treatment with oral phenytoin is not possible, IV phenytoin can be substituted for oral phenytoin at the same total daily dose. Phenytoin capsules are approximately 90% bioavailable by the oral route. Phenytoin is 100% bioavailable by the IV route. For this reason, plasma phenytoin concentrations may increase modestly when IV phenytoin is substituted for oral phenytoin sodium therapy. The rate of administration for IV phenytoin should be no greater than 50 mg per minute in adults and 1-3 mg/kg/mi (or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower) in pediatric patients.

Serum concentrations should be monitored and care should be taken when switching a patient from the sodium salt to the free acid form. Phenytoin Sodium Injection is formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease: Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution. Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations.

Elderly Patients: Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric: A loading dose of 15-20 mg/kg of Phenytoin Sodium Injection intravenously will usually produce plasma concentrations of phenytoin within the generally accepted therapeutic range (10-20 mcg/mL). The drug should be injected slowly intravenously at a rate not exceeding 1-3 mg/kg/min or 50 mg per minute, whichever is slower.
Amiodarone Hydrochlorid...

Amiodarone Hydrochloride

Amiodarone shows considerable interindividual variation in response. Although a starting dose adequate to suppress life-threatening arrhythmias is needed, close monitoring with adjustment of dose is essential. The recommended starting dose of amiodarone is about 1000 mg over the first 24 hours of therapy, delivered by the following infusion regimen: Table 1: AMIODARONE DOSE RECOMMENDATIONS: FIRST 24 HOURS Loading infusions First Rapid: 150 mg over the FIRST 10 minutes (15 mg/min). Add 3 mL of amiodarone (150 mg) to 100 mL D5W (concentration = 1.5 mg/mL). Infuse 100 mL over 10 minutes. Followed by Slow: 360 mg over the NEXT 6 hours (1 mg/min). Add 18 mL of amiodarone (900 mg) to 500 mL D5W (concentration = 1.8 mg/mL) Maintenance infusion 540 mg over the REMAINING 18 hours (0.5 mg/min). Decrease the rate of the slow loading infusion to 0.5 mg/min. After the first 24 hours, continue the maintenance infusion rate of 0.5 mg/min (720 mg per 24 hours) utilizing a concentration of 1 to 6 mg/mL (Use a central venous catheter for amiodarone concentrations greater than 2 mg/mL). The rate of the maintenance infusion may be increased to achieve effective arrhythmia suppression. In the event of breakthrough episodes of VF or hemodynamically unstable VT, use 150 mg supplemental infusions of amiodarone (mixed in 100 mL of D5W and infused over 10 minutes to minimize the potential for hypotension). The first 24-hour dose may be individualized for each patient; however, in controlled clinical trials, mean daily doses above 2100 mg were associated with an increased risk of hypotension. Do not exceed an initial infusion rate of 30 mg/min. Based on the experience from clinical studies of intravenous amiodarone, a maintenance infusion of up to 0.5 mg/min can be continued for 2 to 3 weeks regardless of the patient's age, renal function, or left ventricular function. There has been limited experience in patients receiving intravenous amiodarone for longer than 3 weeks. The surface properties of solutions containing injectable amiodarone are altered such that the drop size may be reduced. This reduction may lead to underdosage of the patient by up to 30% if drop counter infusion sets are used. Amiodarone must be delivered by a volumetric infusion pump. Administer amiodarone, whenever possible, through a central venous catheter dedicated to that purpose. Use an in-line filter during administration. Intravenous amiodarone loading infusions at much higher concentrations and rates of infusion much faster than recommended have resulted in hepatocellular necrosis and acute renal failure, leading to death[see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Intravenous amiodarone concentrations greater than 3 mg/mL in D5W have been associated with a high incidence of peripheral vein phlebitis; however, concentrations of 2.5 mg/mL or less appear to be less irritating. Therefore, for infusions longer than 1 hour, do not exceed amiodarone concentrations of 2 mg/mL, unless a central venous catheter is used[see Adverse Reactions (6.2)]. Amiodarone infusions exceeding 2 hours must be administered in glass or polyolefin bottles containing D5W. Do not use evacuated glass containers for admixing, as incompatibility with a buffer in the container may cause precipitation. Amiodarone absorbs to polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing, but all of the clinical experience has been with PVC tubing and the concentrations and rates of infusion provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION reflect dosing in these studies. Amiodarone has been found to leach out plasticizers, including DEHP [di-(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate] from intravenous tubing (including PVC tubing). The degree of leaching increases when infusing amiodarone at higher concentrations and lower flow rates than provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION. Polysorbate 80, a component of amiodarone injection, is also known to leach DEHP from PVC[see Description (11)]. Amiodarone does not need to be protected from light during administration. NOTE: Inspect parenteral drug products for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Table 2: AMIODARONE HCL SOLUTION STABILITY Solution Concentration(mg/mL) Container Comments 5% Dextrose in Water (D5W) 1 to 6 PVC Physically compatible, with amiodarone loss less than 10% at 2 hours at room temperature. 5% Dextrose in Water (D5W) 1 to 6 Polyolefin, Glass Physically compatible, with no amiodarone loss at 24 hours at room temperature. Admixture Incompatibility Amiodarone in D5W is incompatible with the drugs shown in Table 3. Table 3: Y-SITE INJECTION INCOMPATIBILITY Drug Vehicle Amiodarone Concentration Comments Aminophylline D5W 4 mg/mL Precipitate Cefamandole Nafate D5W 4 mg/mL Precipitate Cefazolin Sodium D5W 4 mg/mL Precipitate Mezlocillin Sodium D5W 4 mg/mL Precipitate Heparin Sodium D5W -- Precipitate Sodium Bicarbonate D5W 3 mg/mL Precipitate Intravenous to Oral Transition Patients whose arrhythmias have been suppressed by amiodarone may be switched to oral amiodarone. When changing to oral amiodarone therapy, clinical monitoring is recommended, particularly for elderly patients. See package insert for oral amiodarone. Since grapefruit juice is known to inhibit CYP3A-mediated metabolism of oral amiodarone in the intestinal mucosa, resulting in increased plasma levels of amiodarone, do not drink grapefruit juice during treatment with oral amiodarone[see Drug Interactions (7)]. Table 4 provides suggested doses of oral amiodarone to be initiated after varying durations of amiodarone administration. These reommendations are made on the basis of a similar total body amount of amiodarone delivered by the intravenous and oral routes, based on 50% bioavailability of oral amiodarone. Table 4: RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ORAL DOSAGE AFTER INTRAVENOUS INFUSION Duration of Amiodarone Infusion † Initial Daily Dose of Oral Amiodarone Less than 1 week 800 to 1600 mg 1-3 weeks 600 to 800 mg Greater than 3 weeks * 400 mg † Assuming a 720 mg/day infusion (0.5 mg/min). * Intravenous amiodarone is not intended for maintenance treatment.
Solu-medrol

Solu-medrol

NOTE: Some of the SOLU-MEDROL formulations contain benzyl alcohol (see DESCRIPTION, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use)

Because of possible physical incompatibilities, SOLU-MEDROL should not be diluted or mixed with other solutions.

Use only the accompanying diluent or Bacteriostatic Water For Injection with Benzyl Alcohol when reconstituting SOLU-MEDROL (see DESCRIPTION). Use within 48 hours after mixing.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

This preparation may be administered by intravenous injection, by intravenous infusion, or by intramuscular injection, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. Following the initial emergency period, consideration should be given to employing a longer acting injectable preparation or an oral preparation.

There are reports of cardiac arrhythmias and/or cardiac arrest following the rapid administration of large IV doses of SOLU-MEDROL (greater than 0.5 gram administered over a period of less than 10 minutes). Bradycardia has been reported during or after the administration of large doses of methylprednisolone sodium succinate, and may be unrelated to the speed or duration of infusion. When high dose therapy is desired, the recommended dose of SOLU-MEDROL Sterile Powder is 30 mg/kg administered intravenously over at least 30 minutes. This dose may be repeated every 4 to 6 hours for 48 hours.

In general, high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient's condition has stabilized; usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours.

In other indications, initial dosage will vary from 10 to 40 mg of methylprednisolone depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administrations in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages. It Should Be Emphasized that Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient's individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation, it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient's condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

SOLU-MEDROL may be administered by intravenous or intramuscular injection or by intravenous infusion, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. To administer by intravenous (or intramuscular) injection, prepare solution as directed. The desired dose may be administered intravenously over a period of several minutes. If desired, the medication may be administered in diluted solutions by adding Water for Injection or other suitable diluent (see below) to the Act-O-Vial and withdrawing the indicated dose.

To prepare solutions for intravenous infusion, first prepare the solution for injection as directed. This solution may then be added to indicated amounts of 5% dextrose in water, isotonic saline solution, or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of methylprednisolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

The National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) recommended dosing for systemic prednisone, prednisolone, or methylprednisolone in pediatric patients whose asthma is uncontrolled by inhaled corticosteroids and long-acting bronchodilators is 1-2 mg/kg/day in single or divided doses. It is further recommended that short course, or "burst" therapy, be continued until the patient achieves a peak expiratory flow rate at 80% of his or her personal best or until symptoms resolve. This usually requires 3 to 10 days of treatment, although it can take longer. There is no evidence that tapering the dose after improvement will prevent a relapse.

Dosage may be reduced for infants and children but should be governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or size. It should not be less than 0.5 mg per kg every 24 hours.

Dosage must be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days. If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued. Routine laboratory studies, such as urinalysis, two-hour postprandial blood sugar, determination of blood pressure and body weight, and a chest X-ray should be made at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with an ulcer history or significant dyspepsia.

In treatment of acute exacerbations or multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 160 mg of methylprednisolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (see PRECAUTIONS, Neurologic-psychiatric).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Hydrocortisone, 20

Prednisolone, 5

Prednisone, 5

Methylprednisolone, 4

Triamcinolone, 4

Paramethasone, 2

Betamethasone, 0.75

Dexamethasone, 0.75

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE ACT-O-VIAL SYSTEM
Press down on plastic activator to force diluent into the lower compartment. Gently agitate to effect solution. Remove plastic tab covering center of stopper. Sterilize top of stopper with a suitable germicide. Insert needle squarely through center of stopper until tip is just visible. Invert vial and withdraw dose.
Solu-medrol

Solu-medrol

NOTE: Some of the SOLU-MEDROL formulations contain benzyl alcohol (see DESCRIPTION, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use)

Because of possible physical incompatibilities, SOLU-MEDROL should not be diluted or mixed with other solutions.

Use only the accompanying diluent or Bacteriostatic Water For Injection with Benzyl Alcohol when reconstituting SOLU-MEDROL (see DESCRIPTION). Use within 48 hours after mixing.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

This preparation may be administered by intravenous injection, by intravenous infusion, or by intramuscular injection, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. Following the initial emergency period, consideration should be given to employing a longer acting injectable preparation or an oral preparation.

There are reports of cardiac arrhythmias and/or cardiac arrest following the rapid administration of large IV doses of SOLU-MEDROL (greater than 0.5 gram administered over a period of less than 10 minutes). Bradycardia has been reported during or after the administration of large doses of methylprednisolone sodium succinate, and may be unrelated to the speed or duration of infusion. When high dose therapy is desired, the recommended dose of SOLU-MEDROL Sterile Powder is 30 mg/kg administered intravenously over at least 30 minutes. This dose may be repeated every 4 to 6 hours for 48 hours.

In general, high dose corticosteroid therapy should be continued only until the patient's condition has stabilized; usually not beyond 48 to 72 hours.

In other indications, initial dosage will vary from 10 to 40 mg of methylprednisolone depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administrations in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages. It Should Be Emphasized that Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient's individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation, it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient's condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

SOLU-MEDROL may be administered by intravenous or intramuscular injection or by intravenous infusion, the preferred method for initial emergency use being intravenous injection. To administer by intravenous (or intramuscular) injection, prepare solution as directed. The desired dose may be administered intravenously over a period of several minutes. If desired, the medication may be administered in diluted solutions by adding Water for Injection or other suitable diluent (see below) to the Act-O-Vial and withdrawing the indicated dose.

To prepare solutions for intravenous infusion, first prepare the solution for injection as directed. This solution may then be added to indicated amounts of 5% dextrose in water, isotonic saline solution, or 5% dextrose in isotonic saline solution.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of methylprednisolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

The National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI) recommended dosing for systemic prednisone, prednisolone, or methylprednisolone in pediatric patients whose asthma is uncontrolled by inhaled corticosteroids and long-acting bronchodilators is 1-2 mg/kg/day in single or divided doses. It is further recommended that short course, or "burst" therapy, be continued until the patient achieves a peak expiratory flow rate at 80% of his or her personal best or until symptoms resolve. This usually requires 3 to 10 days of treatment, although it can take longer. There is no evidence that tapering the dose after improvement will prevent a relapse.

Dosage may be reduced for infants and children but should be governed more by the severity of the condition and response of the patient than by age or size. It should not be less than 0.5 mg per kg every 24 hours.

Dosage must be decreased or discontinued gradually when the drug has been administered for more than a few days. If a period of spontaneous remission occurs in a chronic condition, treatment should be discontinued. Routine laboratory studies, such as urinalysis, two-hour postprandial blood sugar, determination of blood pressure and body weight, and a chest X-ray should be made at regular intervals during prolonged therapy. Upper GI X-rays are desirable in patients with an ulcer history or significant dyspepsia.

In treatment of acute exacerbations or multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 160 mg of methylprednisolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (see PRECAUTIONS, Neurologic-psychiatric).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Hydrocortisone, 20

Prednisolone, 5

Prednisone, 5

Methylprednisolone, 4

Triamcinolone, 4

Paramethasone, 2

Betamethasone, 0.75

Dexamethasone, 0.75

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE ACT-O-VIAL SYSTEM
Press down on plastic activator to force diluent into the lower compartment. Gently agitate to effect solution. Remove plastic tab covering center of stopper. Sterilize top of stopper with a suitable germicide. Insert needle squarely through center of stopper until tip is just visible. Invert vial and withdraw dose.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration, and it is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some narcotics may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance and repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion: Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% or Dextrose Injection 5%. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused solution must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient's response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high-molecular-weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

USAGE IN ADULTS

Narcotic Overdose-Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions is not obtained, it may be repeated at 2 to 3 minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of narcotic-induced or partial narcotic-induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Narcotic Depression: For the partial reversal of narcotic depression following the use of narcotics during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone hydrochloride should be titrated according to the patient's response. Naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two to three minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal-i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating, or circulatory stress.

Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one- to two-hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short- or long-acting) and time interval since last administration of narcotic. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

USAGE IN CHILDREN

Narcotic Overdose-Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in children is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, naloxone may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, naloxone hydrochloride injection can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Narcotic Depression: Follow the recommendations and cautions under "Adult Postoperative Depression." For the initial reversal of respiratory depression naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intavenously at two- to three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

USAGE IN NEONATES

When using naloxone hydrochloride injection in Neonates a product containing 0.02 mg/mL should be used.

Narcotic-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative narcotic depression.
Nesacaine

Nesacaine

Chloroprocaine may be administered as a single injection or continuously through an indwelling catheter. As with all local anesthetics, the dose administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the vascularity of the tissues, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, and the physical condition of the patient. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be used. Dosage should be reduced for children, elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The maximum single recommended doses of chloroprocaine in adults are: without epinephrine, 11 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 800 mg; with epinephrine (1:200,000), 14 mg/kg, not to exceed a maximum total dose of 1000 mg. For specific techniques and procedures, refer to standard textbooks.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Nesacaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: In order to guard against adverse experiences sometimes noted following unintended penetration of the subarachnoid space, the following procedure modifications are recommended:

1. Use an adequate test dose (3 mL of Nesacaine-MPF 3% Injection or 5 mL of Nesacaine-MPF 2% Injection) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose.

2. Avoid the rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection through the catheter. Consider fractional doses, when feasible.

3. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic injection into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

As a guide for some routine procedures, suggested doses are given below:

1. Infiltration and Peripheral Nerve Block: NESACAINE or NESACAINE-MPF (chloroprocaine HCL Injection, USP)

2. Caudal and Lumbar Epidural Block: NESACAINE-MPF INJECTION.

For caudal anesthesia, the inital dose is 15 to 25 mL of a 2% or 3% solution. Repeated doses may be given at 40 to 60 minute intervals.

For lumbar epidural anesthesia, 2 to 2.5 mL per segment of a 2% of 3% solution can be used. The usual total volume of Nesacaine-MPF Injection is from 15 to 25 mL. Repeated doses 2 to 6 mL less than the original dose may be given at 40 to 50 minute intervals.

The above dosages are recommended as a guide for use in the average adult. Maximum dosages of all local anesthetics must be individualized after evaluating the size and physical condition of the patient and the rate of systemic absorption from a particular injection site.

Pediatric Dosage: It is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child's age and weight and should not exceed 11 mg/kg (5 mg/lb). For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs (23 kg), the dose of chloroprocaine HCL without epinephrine would be 250 mg. Concentrations of 0.5-1% are suggested for infiltration and 1-1.5% for nerve block. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. Some of the lower concentrations for use in infants and smaller children are not available in prepackaged containers; it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with the amount of 0.9% sodium chloride injection necessary to obtain the required final concentration of chloroprocaine injection.

Preparation of Epinephrine Injections - To prepare a 1:200,000 epinephrine-chloroprocaine HCL injection, add 0.1 mL of a 1 to 1000 Epinephrine Injection USP to 20 mL of Nesacaine-MPF Injection.

Chloroprocaine is incompatible with caustic alkalis and their carbonates, soaps, silver salts, iodine and iodides.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever injection and container permit. As with other anesthetics having a free aromatic amino group, Nesacaine and Nesacaine-MPF Injections are slightly photosensitive and may become discolored after prolonged exposure to light. It is recommended that these vials be stored in the original outer containers, protected from direct sunlight. Discolored injection should not be administered. If exposed to low temperatures, Nesacaine and Nesacaine-MPF Injections may deposit crystals of chloroprocaine HCL which will redissolve with shaking when returned to room temperature. The product should not be used if it contains undissolved (eg, particulate) material.
Phytonadione

Phytonadione

Whenever possible, phytonadione should be given by the subcutaneous route (see Box WARNING). When intravenous or intramuscular administration is considered unavoidable, the drug should be injected very slowly, not exceeding 1 mg per minute.

Protect from light at all times.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Dilution

Phytonadione may be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or 5% Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection. Benzyl alcohol as a preservative has been associated with toxicity in newborns. Therefore, all of the above diluents should be preservative-free. (See WARNINGS) Other diluents should not be used. When dilutions are indicated, administration should be started immediately after mixture with the diluent, and unused portions of the dilution should be discarded, as well as unused contents of the vial.

Prophylaxis of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that vitamin K1 be given to the newborn. A single intramuscular dose of phytonadione 0.5 to 1 mg within one hour of birth is recommended.

Treatment of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

Empiric administration of vitamin K1 should not replace proper laboratory evaluation of the coagulation mechanism. A prompt response (shortening of the prothrombin time in 2 to 4 hours) following administration of vitamin K1 is usually diagnostic of hemorrhagic disease of the newborn, and failure to respond indicates another diagnosis or coagulation disorder.

Phytonadione 1 mg should be given either subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants.

Whole blood or component therapy may be indicated if bleeding is excessive. This therapy, however, does not correct the underlying disorder and phytonadione should be given concurrently.

Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults

To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin time caused by oral anticoagulant thearpy - 2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required. Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition (see WARNINGS). If in 6 to 8 hours after parenteral administration the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated.

Phytonadione Summary of Dosage Guidelines (See insert text for details)

In the event of shock or excessive blood loss, the use of whole blood or component therapy is indicated.

Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults

A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained.

If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates, antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent phytonadione. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of phytonadione is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.
Ephinephrine

Ephinephrine

Epinephrine Injection, USP is administered by intravenous injection and/or in cardiac arrest, by intracardiac injection into the left ventricular chamber or via endotracheal tube directly into thebronchial tree. The adult intravenous dose for hypersensitivity reactions or to relieve bronchospasm usually ranges from 0.1 to 0.25 mg (1 to 2.5 mL of 1:10,000 solution), injected slowly. Neonates may be given a dose of 0.01 mg per kg of body weight; for the infant 0.05 mg is an adequate initial dose and this may be repeated at 20 to 30 minute intervals in the management of asthma attacks. In cardiac arrest, 0.5 to 1.0 mg (5 to 10 mL of 1:10,000 solution) may be given. During a resuscitation effort, 0.5 mg (5 mL) should be administered intravenously every five minutes. Intracardiac injection should only be administered by personnel well trained in the technique, if there has not been sufficient time to establish an intravenous route. The intracardiac dose usually ranges from 0.3 to 0.5 mg (3 to 5 mL of 1:10,000 solution). Alternatively, if the patient has been intubated, epinephrine can be injected via the endotracheal tube directly into the bronchial tree at the same dosage as for intravenous injection. It is rapidly absorbed through the lung capillary bed. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. (See PRECAUTIONS.) To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent or broken byhand.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil injection, USP is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and normal saline solutions. If flumazenil injection is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil injection should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil injection should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60 second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20 minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil injection administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil injection in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients

For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1 minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil injection. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil injection, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil injection, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and Handling

Flumazenil injection is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil injection, USP is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer's and normal saline solutions. If flumazenil injection is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil injection should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil injection should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60 second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20 minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60 second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient's response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil injection administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil injection in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient's response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients

For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1 minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil injection. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil injection, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil injection, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and Handling

Flumazenil injection is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae:

Adults: Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours.

Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.

The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis.

Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous infusion therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia.

Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 Kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 Kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses at 6-to 8-hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae:

Adults: Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours.

Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.

The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis.

Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous infusion therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia.

Adults and children: 150 to 200 mg/Kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Phenylephrine Hydrochlo...

Phenylephrine Hydrochloride

2.1 General Administration Instructions

Phenylephrine hydrochloride must be diluted before administration as bolus intravenous infusion or continuous intravenous infusion.

Inspect the solution for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. The diluted solution should not be held for more than 4 hours at room temperature or for more than 24 hours under refrigerated conditions.

Discard any unused portion.

During phenylephrine hydrochloride administration:
Correct intravascular volume depletion. Correct acidosis. Acidosis may reduce the effectiveness of phenylephrine.
2.2 Preparing a 100 mcg/mL Solution for Bolus Intravenous Administration

For bolus intravenous administration, withdraw 10 mg (1 mL of 10 mg/mL concentration) of phenylephrine injection and dilute with 99 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. This will yield a final concentration of 100 mcg/mL. Withdraw an appropriate dose from the 100 mcg/mL solution prior to bolus intravenous administration.

2.3 Preparing a Solution for Continuous Intravenous Infusion

For continuous intravenous infusion, withdraw 10 mg (1 mL of 10 mg/mL concentration) of phenylephrine hydrochloride injection and add to 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (providing a final concentration of 20 mcg/mL).

2.4 Dosing for Perioperative Setting

In adult patients undergoing surgical procedures with either neuraxial anesthesia or general anesthesia:
50 mcg to 250 mcg by intravenous bolus administration. The most frequently reported initial bolus dose is 50 mcg or 100 mcg. 0.5 mcg/kg/min to 1.4 mcg/kg/min by intravenous continuous infusion, titrated to blood pressure goal.
2.5 Dosing for Septic or Other Vasodilatory Shock

In adult patients with septic or other vasodilatory shock:
No bolus. 0.5 mcg/kg/min by intravenous continuous infusion, titrated to blood pressure goal. Doses above 6 mcg/kg/min do not show significant incremental increase in blood pressure.
Xylocaine

Xylocaine

Table 1 (Recommended Dosages) summarizes the recommended volumes and concentrations of Xylocaine Injection for various types of anesthetic procedures. The dosages suggested in this table are for normal healthy adults and refer to the use of epinephrinefree solutions. When larger volumes are required, only solutions containing epinephrine should be used except in those cases where vasopressor drugs may be contraindicated.There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Xylocaine is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).These recommended doses serve only as a guide to the amount of anesthetic required for most routine procedures. The actual volumes and concentrations to be used depend on a number of factors such as type and extent of surgical procedure, depth of anesthesia and degree of muscular relaxation required, duration of anesthesia required, and the physical condition of the patient. In all cases the lowest concentration and smallest dose that will produce the desired result should be given. Dosages should be reduced for children and for the elderly and debilitated patients and patients with cardiac and/or liver disease. The onset of anesthesia, the duration of anesthesia and the degree of muscular relaxation are proportional to the volume and concentration (ie, total dose) of local anesthetic used. Thus, an increase in volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection will decrease the onset of anesthesia, prolong the duration of anesthesia, provide a greater degree of muscular relaxation and increase the segmental spread of anesthesia. However, increasing the volume and concentration of Xylocaine Injection may result in a moreprofound fall in blood pressure when used in epidural anesthesia. Although the incidence of side effects with lidocaine HCl is quite low, caution should be exercised when employing large volumes and concentrations, since the incidence of side effects is directly proportional to the total dose of local anesthetic agent injected. For intravenous regional anesthesia, only the 50 mL single dose vial containing Xylocaine (lidocaine HCl) 0.5% Injection should be used.Epidural AnesthesiaFor epidural anesthesia, only the following dosage forms Xylocaine Injection are recommended:1% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1% without epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1% with epinephrine 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0001.5% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% without epinephrine 20 mL Polyamp DuoFit™1.5% with epinephrine 30 mL ampules, 30 mL single dose solutions1:200,0002% without epinephrine 10 mL Polyamp DuoFit™2% with epinephrine 20 mL ampules, 20 mL single dose solutions1:200,000Although these solutions are intended specifically for epidural anesthesia, they may also be used for infiltration and peripheral nerve block, provided they are employed as single dose units. These solutions contain no bacteriostatic agent. In epidural anesthesia, the dosage varies with the number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (generally 2 to 3 mL of the indicated concentration per dermatome).Caudal and Lumbar Epidural BlockAs a precaution against the adverse experience sometimes observed following unintentional penetration of the subarachnoid space, a test dose such as 2 to 3 mL of 1.5% lidocaine HCl should be administered at least 5 minutes prior to injecting the total volume required for a lumbar or caudal epidural block. The test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in a manner that may have displaced the catheter. Epinephrine, if contained in the test dose (10 to 15 mcg have been suggested), may serve as a warning of unintentional intravascular injection. If injected into a blood vessel, this amount of epinephrine is likely to produce a transient “epinephrine response” within 45 seconds, consisting of an increase in heart rate and systolic blood pressure, circumoral pallor, palpitations and nervousness in the unsedated patient. The sedated patient may exhibit only a pulse rate increase of 20 or more beats per minute for 15 or more seconds. Patients on beta blockers may not manifest changes in heart rate, but blood pressure monitoring can detect an evanescent rise in systolic blood pressure. Adequate time should be allowed for onset of anesthesia after administration of each test dose. The rapid injection of a large volume of Xylocaine Injection through the catheter should be avoided, and, when feasible, fractional doses should be administered. In the event of the known injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution into the subarachnoid space, after suitable resuscitation and if the catheter is in place, consider attempting the recovery of drug by draining a moderate amount of cerebrospinal fluid (such as 10 mL) through the epidural catheter.

MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSAGESAdultsFor normal healthy adults, the individual maximum recommended dose of lidocaine HCl with epinephrine should not exceed 7 mg/kg (3.5 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose not exceed 500 mg. When used without epinephrine the maximum individual dose should not exceed 4.5 mg/kg (2 mg/lb) of body weight, and in general it is recommended that the maximum total dose does not exceed 300 mg. For continuous epidural or caudal anesthesia, the maximum recommended dosage should not be administered at intervals of less than 90 minutes. When continuous lumbar or caudal epidural anesthesia is used for non-obstetrical procedures, more drug may be administered if required to produce adequate anesthesia. The maximum recommended dose per 90 minute period of lidocaine hydrochloride for paracervical block in obstetrical patients and non-obstetrical patients is 200 mg total. One half of the total dose is usually administered to each side. Inject slowly, five minutes between sides (see also discussion of paracervical block in PRECAUTIONS). For intravenous regional anesthesia, the dose administered should not exceed 4 mg/kg in adults.ChildrenIt is difficult to recommend a maximum dose of any drug for children, since this varies as a function of age and weight. For children over 3 years of age who have a normal lean body mass and normal body development, the maximum dose is determined by the child’s age and weight. For example, in a child of 5 years weighing 50 lbs the dose of lidocaine HCl should not exceed 75 to 100 mg (1.5 to 2 mg/lb). The use of even more dilute solutions (ie, 0.25 to 0.5%) and total dosages not to exceed 3 mg/kg (1.4 mg/lb) are recommended for induction of intravenous regional anesthesia in children. In order to guard against systemic toxicity, the lowest effective concentration and lowest effective dose should be used at all times. In some cases it will be necessary to dilute available concentrations with 0.9% sodium chloride injection in order to obtain the requiredfinal concentration.NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. The Injection is not to be used if its color is pinkish or darker than slightly yellow or if it contains a precipitate.Table 1: Recommended Dosages
Procedure Xylocaine (lidocaine hydrochloride) Injection (without epinephrine) Conc (%) Vol (mL) Total Dose (mg) Infiltration Percutaneous 0.5 or 1 1 to 60 5 to 300 Intravenous regional 0.5 10 to 60 50 to 300 Peripheral Nerve Blocks, eg, Brachial 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 Dental 2 1 to 5 20 to 100 Intercostal 1 3 30 Paravertebral 1 3 to 5 30 to 50 Pudendal (each side) 1 10 100 Paracervical Obstetrical analgesia (each side) 1 10 100 Sympathetic Nerve Blocks, eg, Cervical (stellate ganglion) 1 5 50 Lumbar 1 5 to 10 50 to 100 Central Neural Blocks Epidural* Thoracic 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Lumbar Analgesia 1 25 to 30 250 to 300 Anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300 2 10 to 15 200 to 300 Caudal Obstetrical analgesia 1 20 to 30 200 to 300 Surgical anesthesia 1.5 15 to 20 225 to 300
*Dose determined by number of dermatomes to be anesthetized (2 to 3 mL/dermatome).THE ABOVE SUGGESTED CONCENTRATIONS AND VOLUMES SERVE ONLY AS A GUIDE. OTHER VOLUMES AND CONCENTRATIONS MAY BE USED PROVIDED THE TOTAL MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED DOSE IS NOT EXCEEDED. STERILIZATION, STORAGE AND TECHNICAL PROCEDURESDisinfecting agents containing heavy metals, which cause release of respective ions (mercury, zinc, copper, etc) should not be used for skin or mucous membrane disinfection as they have been related to incidents of swelling and edema. When chemical disinfection of multi-dose vials is desired, either isopropyl alcohol (91%) or ethyl alcohol (70%) is recommended. Many commercially available brands of rubbing alcohol, as well as solutions of ethyl alcohol not of USP grade, contain denaturants which are injurious to rubber and therefore are not to be used.Dosage forms listed as Xylocaine-MPF indicate single dose solutions that are Methyl Paraben Free (MPF).
Vasopressin

Vasopressin

Vasopressin may be administered intramuscularly or subcutaneously.

Ten units of vasopressin (0.5 mL) will usually elicit full physiologic response in adult patients; 5 units will be adequate in many cases. Vasopressin should be given intramuscularly at three- or four-hour intervals as needed. The dosage should be proportionately reduced for children. (For an additional discussion of dosage, consult the sections below.)

When determining the dose of vasopressin for a given case, the following should be kept in mind.

It is particularly desirable to give a dose not much larger than is just sufficient to elicit the desired physiologic response. Excessive doses may cause undesirable side effects - blanching of the skin, abdominal cramps, nausea - which, though not serious, may be alarming to the patient. Spontaneous recovery from such side effects occurs in a few minutes. It has been found that one or two glasses of water given at the time vasopressin is administered reduce such symptoms.

Abdominal Distention: In the average postoperative adult patient, give 5 units (0.25 mL) initially, increase to 10 units (0.5 mL) at subsequent injections if necessary. It is recommended that vasopressin be given intramuscularly and that injections be repeated at three- or four-hour intervals as required. Dosage to be reduced proportionately for children.

Vasopressin used in this manner will frequently prevent or relieve postoperative distension. These recommendations apply also to distention complicating pneumonia or other acute toxemias.

Abdominal Roentgenography: For the average case, two injections of 10 units each (0.5 mL) are suggested. These should be given two hours and one-half hour, respectively, before films are exposed. Many roentgenologists advise giving an enema prior to the first dose of vasopressin.

Diabetes Insipidus: Vasopressin may be given by injection or administered intranasally on cotton pledgets, by nasal spray, or by dropper. The dose by injection is 5 to 10 units (0.25 to 0.5 mL) repeated two or three times daily as needed. When vasopressin is administered intranasally by spray or on pledgets, the dosage and interval between treatments must be determined for each patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.
Vasopressin

Vasopressin

Vasopressin may be administered intramuscularly or subcutaneously.

Ten units of vasopressin (0.5 mL) will usually elicit full physiologic response in adult patients; 5 units will be adequate in many cases. Vasopressin should be given intramuscularly at three- or four-hour intervals as needed. The dosage should be proportionately reduced for children. (For an additional discussion of dosage, consult the sections below.)

When determining the dose of vasopressin for a given case, the following should be kept in mind.

It is particularly desirable to give a dose not much larger than is just sufficient to elicit the desired physiologic response. Excessive doses may cause undesirable side effects - blanching of the skin, abdominal cramps, nausea - which, though not serious, may be alarming to the patient. Spontaneous recovery from such side effects occurs in a few minutes. It has been found that one or two glasses of water given at the time vasopressin is administered reduce such symptoms.

Abdominal Distention: In the average postoperative adult patient, give 5 units (0.25 mL) initially, increase to 10 units (0.5 mL) at subsequent injections if necessary. It is recommended that vasopressin be given intramuscularly and that injections be repeated at three- or four-hour intervals as required. Dosage to be reduced proportionately for children.

Vasopressin used in this manner will frequently prevent or relieve postoperative distension. These recommendations apply also to distention complicating pneumonia or other acute toxemias.

Abdominal Roentgenography: For the average case, two injections of 10 units each (0.5 mL) are suggested. These should be given two hours and one-half hour, respectively, before films are exposed. Many roentgenologists advise giving an enema prior to the first dose of vasopressin.

Diabetes Insipidus: Vasopressin may be given by injection or administered intranasally on cotton pledgets, by nasal spray, or by dropper. The dose by injection is 5 to 10 units (0.25 to 0.5 mL) repeated two or three times daily as needed. When vasopressin is administered intranasally by spray or on pledgets, the dosage and interval between treatments must be determined for each patient.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use, whenever solution and container permit.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Important Notes on Administration Promethazine hydrochloride injection can cause severe chemical irritation and damage to tissues regardless of the route of administration. Irritation and damage can result from perivascular extravasation, unintentional intra-arterial injection, and intraneuronal or perineuronal infiltration (see WARNINGS - Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).
The preferred parenteral route of administration for promethazine hydrochloride injection is by deep intramuscular injection. Under no circumstances should promethazine hydrochloride injection be given by intra-arterial injection due to the likelihood of severe arteriospasm and the possibility of resultant gangrene (see WARNINGS - Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene). Subcutaneous injection is contraindicated as it may result in tissue necrosis. When administered intravenously, promethazine hydrochloride injection should be given in a concentration no greater than 25 mg per mL and at a rate not to exceed 25 mg per minute. It is preferable to inject through the tubing of an intravenous infusion set that is known to be functioning satisfactorily. In the event that a patient complains of pain during intravenous injection of promethazine hydrochloride injection, the injection should be stopped immediately to evaluate for possible arterial injection or perivascular extravasation.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use promethazine hydrochloride injection if solution has developed color or contains precipitate.

To avoid the possibility of physical and/or chemical incompatibility, consult specialized literature before diluting with any injectable solution or combining with any other medication. Do not use if there is a precipitate or any sign of incompatibility.

Allergic Conditions The average adult dose is 25 mg. This dose may be repeated within two hours if necessary, but continued therapy, if indicated, should be via the oral route as soon as existing circumstances permit. After initiation of treatment, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The average adult dose for amelioration of allergic reactions to blood or plasma is 25 mg.

Sedation In hospitalized adult patients, nighttime sedation may be achieved by a dose of 25 to 50 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection.

Nausea and Vomiting For control of nausea and vomiting, the usual adult dose is 12.5 to 25 mg, not to be repeated more frequently than every four hours. When used for control of postoperative nausea and vomiting, the dosage of analgesics and barbiturates should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions).

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use).

Preoperative and Postoperative Use As an adjunct to preoperative or postoperative medication, 25 to 50 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection in adults may be combined with appropriately reduced doses of analgesics and atropine-like drugs as desired. Dosage of concomitant analgesic or hypnotic medication should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions).

Promethazine hydrochloride is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than two years of age.

Obstetrics Promethazine hydrochloride injection in doses of 50 mg will provide sedation and relieve apprehension in the early stages of labor. When labor is definitely established, 25 to 75 mg (average dose, 50 mg) promethazine hydrochloride injection may be given with an appropriately reduced dose of any desired narcotic (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions). If necessary, promethazine hydrochloride injection with a reduced dose of analgesic may be repeated once or twice at four-hour intervals in the course of a normal labor. A maximum total dose of 100 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection may be administered during a 24-hour period to patients in labor.

Pediatric Patients Promethazine hydrochloride injection is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than 2 years of age (see WARNINGS - Respiratory Depression). Caution should be exercised when administering promethazine hydrochloride to pediatric patients 2 years of age or older. It is recommended that the lowest effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride be used in pediatric patients 2 years of age and older and concomitant administration of other drugs with respiratory depressant effects be avoided (see WARNINGS - Respiratory Depression). In pediatric patients 2 years of age and older, the dosage should not exceed half that of the suggested adult dose. As an adjunct to premedication, the suggested dose is 1.1 mg per kg of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions). Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in pediatric patients.
Suprane

Suprane

Only persons trained in the administration of general anesthesia should administer SUPRANE (desflurane, USP). Only a vaporizer specifically designed and designated for use with desflurane should be utilized for its administration. Facilities for maintenance of a patent airway, artificial ventilation, oxygen enrichment, and circulatory resuscitation must be immediately available.

SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) is administered by inhalation. The administration of general anesthesia must be individualized based on the patient's response. Hypotension and respiratory depression increase as anesthesia with desflurane is deepened. The minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) decreases with increasing patient age. The MAC for SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) is also reduced by concomitant N2O administration (see Table 1). The dose should be adjusted accordingly. The following table provides mean relative potency based upon age and effect of N2O in predominately ASA physical status I or II patients.

Benzodiazepines and opioids decrease the MAC of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) [see Drug Interactions (7.1, Table 3)]. SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) also decreases the doses of neuromuscular blocking agents required [see Drug Interactions (7.2, Table 4)]. The dose should be adjusted accordingly.

2.1 Preanesthetic Medication

Issues such as whether or not to premedicate and the choice of premedication(s) must be individualized. In clinical studies, patients scheduled to be anesthetized with desflurane frequently received IV preanesthetic medication, such as opioid and/or benzodiazepine.

2.2 Induction

In adults, some premedicated with opioid, a frequent starting concentration was 3% desflurane, increased in 0.5-1.0% increments every 2 to 3 breaths. End-tidal concentrations of 4-11%, desflurane with and without N2O, produced anesthesia within 2 to 4 minutes. When desflurane was tested as the primary anesthetic induction agent, the incidence of upper airway irritation (apnea, breathholding, laryngospasm, coughing and secretions) was high. During induction in adults, the overall incidence of oxyhemoglobin desaturation (SpO2 < 90%) was 6% [see Adverse Reactions (6.1)].

After induction in adults with an intravenous drug such as thiopental or propofol, desflurane can be started at approximately 0.5-1 MAC, whether the carrier gas is O2 or N2O/O2.

Inspired concentrations of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) greater than 12% have been safely administered to patients, particularly during induction of anesthesia. Such concentrations will proportionately dilute the concentration of oxygen; therefore, maintenance of an adequate concentration of oxygen may require a reduction of nitrous oxide or air if these gases are used concurrently.

2.3 Maintenance

Surgical levels of anesthesia in adults may be maintained with concentrations of 2.5-8.5% SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) with or without the concomitant use of nitrous oxide. In children, surgical levels of anesthesia may be maintained with concentrations of 5.2-10% SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) with or without the concomitant use of nitrous oxide.

During the maintenance of anesthesia with inflow rates of 2 L/min or more, the alveolar concentration of desflurane will usually be within 10% of the inspired concentration [Fa/FI, see Figure 2 in Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

During the maintenance of anesthesia, increasing concentrations of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) produce dose-dependent decreases in blood pressure. Excessive decreases in blood pressure may be due to depth of anesthesia and in such instances may be corrected by decreasing the inspired concentration of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP).

Concentrations of desflurane exceeding 1 MAC may increase heart rate. Thus with this drug, an increased heart rate may not serve reliably as a sign of inadequate anesthesia.

2.4 Maintenance of Anesthesia in Intubated Pediatric Patients

SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) is approved for maintenance of anesthesia in infants and children after induction of anesthesia with agents other than desflurane, and tracheal intubation.

SUPRANE (desflurane, USP), with or without N2O, and halothane, with or without N2O were studied in three clinical trials of pediatric patients aged 2 weeks to 12 years (median 2 years) and ASA physical status I or II. The concentration of SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) required for maintenance of general anethesia is age-dependent [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].

Changes in blood pressure during maintenance of and recovery from anesthesia with desflurane/N2O/O2 are similar to those observed with halothane/N2O/O2. Heart rate during maintenance of anesthesia is approximately 10 beats per minute faster with desflurane than with halothane. Patients were judged fit for discharge from post-anesthesia care units within one hour with both desflurane and halothane. There were no differences in the incidence of nausea and vomiting between patients receiving desflurane or halothane.

2.5 Recovery

The recovery from general anethesia should be assessed carefully before patients are discharged from the post anesthesia care unit (PACU).

2.6 Use in Patients with Coronary Artery Disease

In patients with coronary artery disease, maintenance of normal hemodynamics is important to prevent myocardial ischemia. Desflurane should not be used as the sole agent for anesthetic induction in patients with coronary artery disease or patients where increases in heart rate or blood pressure are undesirable. It should be used with other medications, preferably intravenous opioids and hypnotics [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.7 Neurosurgical Use

SUPRANE (desflurane, USP) may produce a dose-dependent increase in cerebrospinal fluid pressure (CSFP) when administered to patients with intracranial space occupying lesions. Desflurane should be administered at 0.8 MAC or less, and in conjunction with a barbiturate induction and hyperventilation (hypocapnia) until cerebral decompression in patients with known or suspected increases in CSFP. Appropriate attention must be paid to maintain cerebral perfusion pressure [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].
Diphenhydramine Hydroch...

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride

THIS PRODUCT IS FOR INTRAVENOUS OR INTRAMUSCULAR ADMINISTRATION ONLY.

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride Injection is indicated when the oral form is impractical.

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, OTHER THAN PREMATURE INFANTS AND NEONATES

5 mg/kg/24 hours or 150 mg/m2/24 hours. Maximum daily dosage is 300 mg. Divide into four doses, administered intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly.

ADULTS

10 to 50 mg intravenously at a rate generally not exceeding 25 mg/min, or deep intramuscularly; 100 mg if required; maximum daily dosage is 400 mg.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Sterile Vancomycin Hydr...

Sterile Vancomycin Hydrochloride

An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events are related to both concentration and rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients with Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual daily intravenous dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every six hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every six hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin may be warranted in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the first week of life and every eight hours thereafter up to the age of one month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients with Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and in the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography.

If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min:

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 h. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.

PREPARATION AND STABILITY

At the time of use, reconstitute the vial with Sterile Water for Injection, by adding 10 mL of the diluting solution to the 500-mg vial or 20 mL of the diluting solution to the 1-g vial of dry, vancomycin powder. FURTHER DILUTION IS REQUIRED.

After reconstitution with Sterile Water for Injection, the vials may be stored in a refrigerator for 14 days without significant loss of potency.

Reconstituted solutions containing 500 mg of vancomycin must be further diluted with at least 100 mL of diluent. Reconstituted solutions containing 1 g must be further diluted with at least 200 mL of diluent. The desired dose, diluted in this manner, should be administered by intermittent intravenous infusion over a period of at least 60 minutes.

Compatibility with Other Drugs and Intravenous Fluids

Solutions that are diluted with 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection may be refrigerated for 14 days without significant loss of potency. Solutions in the vial that are further diluted with the following infusion fluids may be stored in a refrigerator for 96 hours:

5% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP

Normosol®-M and 5% Dextrose

ISOLYTE® E

Vancomycin solution has a low pH and may cause chemical or physical instability when it is mixed with other compounds.

Mixtures of solutions of vancomycin and beta-lactam antibiotics have been shown to be physically incompatible. The likelihood of precipitation increases with higher concentrations of vancomycin. It is recommended to adequately flush the intravenous lines between the administration of these antibiotics. It is also recommended to dilute solutions of vancomycin to 5 mg/mL or less.

Although intravitreal injection is not an approved route of administration for vancomycin, precipitation has been reported after intravitreal injection of vancomycin and ceftazidime for endophthalmitis using different syringes and needles. The precipitates dissolved gradually, with complete clearing of the vitreous cavity over two months and with improvement of visual acuity.

Prior to administration, parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution or container permits.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Adults

Parenteral therapy with Furosemide Injection, USP should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 40 mg given as a single dose injected intramuscularly or intravenously. The intravenous dose should be given slowly (1 to 2 minutes). Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, another dose may be administered in the same manner 2 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg and given not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. This individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily.

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response. Close medical supervision is necessary.

When furosemide is given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (See PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

If the physician elects to use high dose parenteral therapy, add the Furosemide Injection to either Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP, or Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP after pH has been adjusted to above 5.5, and administer as a controlled intravenous infusion at a rate not greater than 4 mg/min. Furosemide Injection is a buffered alkaline solution with a pH of about 9 and drug may precipitate at pH values below 7. Care must be taken to ensure that the pH of the prepared infusion solution is in the weakly alkaline to neutral range. Acid solutions, including other parenteral medications (e.g., labetalol, ciprofloxacin, amrinone, milrinone) must not be administered concurrently in the same infusion because they may cause precipitation of the furosemide. In addition, furosemide injection should not be added to a running intravenous line containing any of these acidic products.

Acute Pulmonary Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 40 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes). If a satisfactory response does not occur within 1 hour, the dose may be increased to 80 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes).

If necessary, additional therapy (e.g., digitalis, oxygen) may be administered concomitantly.

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

Parenteral therapy should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

The usual initial dose of Furosemide (intravenously or intramuscularly) in pediatric patients is 1 mg/kg body weight and should be given slowly under close medical supervision. If the diuretic response to the initial dose is not satisfactory, dosage may be increased by 1 mg/kg not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose, until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended.

Literature reports suggest that the maximum dose for premature infants should not exceed 1 mg/kg/day (see WARNINGS, Pediatric Use).

Furosemide Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Adults

Parenteral therapy with Furosemide Injection, USP should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 40 mg given as a single dose injected intramuscularly or intravenously. The intravenous dose should be given slowly (1 to 2 minutes). Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, another dose may be administered in the same manner 2 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 mg and given not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. This individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily.

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response. Close medical supervision is necessary.

When furosemide is given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (see PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

If the physician elects to use high dose parenteral therapy, add the Furosemide Injection to either Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP, or Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP after pH has been adjusted to above 5.5, and administer as a controlled intravenous infusion at a rate not greater than 4 mg/min. Furosemide Injection is a buffered alkaline solution with a pH of about 9 and drug may precipitate at pH values below 7. Care must be taken to ensure that the pH of the prepared infusion solution is in the weakly alkaline to neutral range. Acid solutions, including other parenteral medications (e.g., labetalol, ciprofloxacin, amrinone, milrinone) must not be administered concurrently in the same infusion because they may cause precipitation of the furosemide. In addition, furosemide injection should not be added to a running intravenous line containing any of these acidic products.

Acute Pulmonary Edema

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 40 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes). If a satisfactory response does not occur within 1 hour, the dose may be increased to 80 mg injected slowly intravenously (over 1 to 2 minutes).

If necessary, additional therapy (e.g., digitalis, oxygen) may be administered concomitantly.

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

Parenteral therapy should be used only in patients unable to take oral medication or in emergency situations and should be replaced with oral therapy as soon as practical.

The usual initial dose of Furosemide (intravenously or intramuscularly) in pediatric patients is 1 mg/kg body weight and should be given slowly under close medical supervision. If the diuretic response to the initial dose is not satisfactory, dosage may be increased by 1 mg/kg not sooner than 2 hours after the previous dose, until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended.

Literature reports suggest that the maximum dose for premature infants should not exceed 1 mg/kg/day (see WARNINGS, Pediatric Use).

Furosemide Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is discolored.

To prevent needle-stick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent, or broken by hand.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with metoprolol tartrate can be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Treatment in this early phase should begin with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; the injections should be given at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram should be carefully monitored.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, should be initiated 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continued for 48 hours. Thereafter, patients should receive a maintenance dosage of 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, treatment with metoprolol should be discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Therapy should be continued for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Butorphanol Tartrate

Butorphanol Tartrate

Factors to be considered in determining the dose are age, body weight, physical status, underlying pathological condition, use of other drugs, type of anesthesia to be used, and surgical procedure involved. Use in the elderly, patients with hepatic or renal disease, or in labor requires extra caution (see PRECAUTIONS section and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Individualization of Dosage section). The following doses are for patients who do not have impaired hepatic or renal function and who are not on CNS active agents.

Use for Pain

Intravenous - The usual recommended single dose for IV administration is 1 mg repeated every three to four hours as necessary. The effective dosage range, depending on the severity of pain, is 0.5 to 2 mg repeated every three to four hours.

Intramuscular - The usual recommended single dose for IM administration is 2 mg in patients who will be able to remain recumbent, in the event drowsiness or dizziness occurs. This may be repeated every three to four hours, as necessary. The effective dosage range depending on the severity of pain is 1 to 4 mg repeated every three to four hours. There are insufficient clinical data to recommend single doses above 4 mg.

Use as Preoperative/Preanesthetic Medication

The preoperative medication dosage of butorphanol tartrate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Individualization of Dosage section). The usual adult dose is 2 mg IM, administered 60 to 90 minutes before surgery. This is approximately equivalent in sedative effect to 10 mg morphine or 80 mg meperidine.

Use in Balanced Anesthesia

The usual dose of butorphanol tartrate injection is 2 mg IV shortly before induction and/or 0.5 to 1 mg IV in increments during anesthesia. The increment may be higher, up to 0.06 mg/kg (4 mg/70 kg), depending on previous sedative, analgesic, and hypnotic drugs administered. The total dose of butorphanol injection will vary; however, patients seldom require less than 4 mg or more than 12.5 mg (approximately 0.06 to 0.18 mg/kg).

Labor

In patients at full term in early labor a 1 to 2 mg dose of butorphanol tartrate IV or IM may be administered and repeated after 4 hours. Alternative analgesia should be used for pain associated with delivery or if delivery is expected to occur within 4 hours.

If concomitant use of butorphanol with drugs that may potentiate its effects is deemed necessary (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions section) the lowest effective dose should be employed.

Safety and Handling

Butorphanol tartrate injection is supplied in sealed delivery systems that have a low risk of accidental exposure to health care workers. Ordinary care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation while preparing a syringe for use. Following skin contact, rinsing with cool water is recommended.

The disposal of Schedule IV controlled substances must be consistent with State and Federal Regulations.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Thiamine Hydrochloride

Thiamine Hydrochloride

"Wet" beriberi with myocardial failure must be treated as an emergency cardiac condition, and thiamine must be administered slowly by the IV route in this situation (see WARNINGS).

In the treatment of beriberi, 10 mg to 20 mg of thiamine hydrochloride are given IM 3 times daily for as long as 2 weeks. (See WARNINGS regarding repeated injection of thiamine.) An oral therapeutic multivitamin preparation containing 5 mg to 10 mg thiamine, administered daily for one month, is recommended to achieve body tissue saturation.

Infantile beriberi that is mild may respond to oral therapy, but if collapse occurs, doses of 25 mg may cautiously be given IV.

Poor dietary habits should be corrected and an abundant and well-balanced dietary intake should be prescribed.

Patients with neuritis of pregnancy in whom vomiting is severe enough to preclude adequate oral therapy should receive 5 mg to 10 mg of thiamine hydrochloride IM daily.

In the treatment of Wernicke-Korsakoff syndrome, thiamine hydrochloride has been administered IV in an initial dose of 100 mg, followed by IM doses of 50 mg to 100 mg daily until the patient is consuming a regular, balanced diet. (See WARNINGS regarding repeated injections of thiamine.)

Patients with marginal thiamine status to whom dextrose is being administered should receive 100 mg thiamine hydrochloride in each of the first few liters of IV fluid to avoid precipitating heart failure.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Heparin Sodium

Heparin Sodium

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Slight discoloration does not alter potency.

Confirm the choice of the correct Heparin Sodium Injection vial prior to administration of the drug to a patient (see WARNINGS, Fatal Medication Errors). The 1 mL vial must not be confused with a "catheter lock flush" vial or other 1 mL vial of inappropriate strength. Confirm that you have selected the correct medication and strength prior to administration of the drug.

When heparin is added to an infusion solution for continuous intravenous administration, the container should be inverted at least six times to ensure adequate mixing and prevent pooling of the heparin in the solution.

Heparin sodium is not effective by oral administration and should be given by intermittent intravenous injection, intravenous infusion, or deep subcutaneous (intrafat, i.e., above the iliac crest or abdominal fat layer) injection. The intramuscular route of administration should be avoided because of the frequent occurrence of hematoma at the injection site.

The dosage of heparin sodium should be adjusted according to the patient's coagulation test results. When heparin is given by continuous intravenous infusion, the coagulation time should be determined approximately every 4 hours in the early stages of treatment. When the drug is administered intermittently by intravenous injection, coagulation tests should be performed before each injection during the early stages of treatment and at appropriate intervals thereafter. Dosage is considered adequate when the activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is 1.5 to 2 times normal or when the whole blood clotting time is elevated approximately 2.5 to 3 times the control value. After deep subcutaneous (intrafat) injections, tests for adequacy of dosage are best performed on samples drawn 4 to 6 hours after the injection.

Periodic platelet counts, hematocrits and tests for occult blood in stool are recommended during the entire course of heparin therapy, regardless of the route of administration.

Converting to Oral Anticoagulant

When an oral anticoagulant of the coumarin or similar type is to be begun in patients already receiving heparin sodium, baseline and subsequent tests of prothrombin activity must be determined at a time when heparin activity is too low to affect the prothrombin time. This is about 5 hours after the last intravenous bolus and 24 hours after the last subcutaneous dose. If continuous IV heparin infusion is used, prothrombin time can usually be measured at any time.

In converting from heparin to an oral anticoagulant, the dose of the oral anticoagulant should be the usual initial amount and thereafter prothrombin time should be determined at the usual intervals. To ensure continuous anticoagulation, it is advisable to continue full heparin therapy for several days after the prothrombin time has reached the therapeutic range. Heparin therapy may then be discontinued without tapering.

Therapeutic Anticoagulant Effect With Full-Dose Heparin

Although dosage must be adjusted for the individual patient according to the results of suitable laboratory tests, the following dosage schedules may be used as guidelines:

Pediatric Use

Use preservative-free Heparin Sodium Injection in neonates and infants (see WARNINGS, Benzyl Alcohol Toxicity and PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

There are no adequate and well controlled studies on heparin use in pediatric patients. Pediatric dosing recommendations are based on clinical experience. In general, the following dosage schedule may be used as a guideline in pediatric patients:

Geriatric Use

Patients over 60 years of age may require lower doses of heparin.

Surgery of the Heart and Blood Vessels

Patients undergoing total body perfusion for open-heart surgery should receive an initial dose of not less than 150 units of heparin sodium per kilogram of body weight. Frequently, a dose of 300 units per kilogram is used for procedures estimated to last less than 60 minutes, or 400 units per kilogram for those estimated to last longer than 60 minutes.

Low-Dose Prophylaxis of Postoperative Thromboembolism

A number of well-controlled clinical trials have demonstrated that low-dose heparin prophylaxis, given just prior to and after surgery, will reduce the incidence of postoperative deep vein thrombosis in the legs (as measured by the I-125 fibrinogen technique and venography) and of clinical pulmonary embolism. The most widely used dosage has been 5,000 units 2 hours before surgery and 5,000 units every 8 to 12 hours thereafter for 7 days or until the patient is fully ambulatory, whichever is longer. The heparin is given by deep subcutaneous injection in the arm or abdomen with a fine needle (25 to 26 gauge) to minimize tissue trauma. A concentrated solution of heparin sodium is recommended. Such prophylaxis should be reserved for patients over the age of 40 who are undergoing major surgery. Patients with bleeding disorders and those having neurosurgery, spinal anesthesia, eye surgery or potentially sanguineous operations should be excluded, as should patients receiving oral anticoagulants or platelet-active drugs (see WARNINGS). The value of such prophylaxis in hip surgery has not been established. The possibility of increased bleeding during surgery or postoperatively should be borne in mind. If such bleeding occurs, discontinuance of heparin and neutralization with protamine sulfate are advisable. If clinical evidence of thromboembolism develops despite low-dose prophylaxis, full therapeutic doses of anticoagulants should be given unless contraindicated. All patients should be screened prior to heparinization to rule out bleeding disorders, and monitoring should be performed with appropriate coagulation tests just prior to surgery. Coagulation test values should be normal or only slightly elevated. There is usually no need for daily monitoring of the effect of low-dose heparin in patients with normal coagulation parameters.

Extracorporeal Dialysis

Follow equipment manufacturers' operating directions carefully.

Blood Transfusion

Addition of 400 to 600 USP units per 100 mL of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation. Usually, 7,500 USP units of heparin sodium are added to 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (or 75,000 USP units per 1,000 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP) and mixed; from this sterile solution, 6 to 8 mL are added per 100 mL of whole blood.

Laboratory Samples

Addition of 70 to 150 units of heparin sodium per 10 to 20 mL sample of whole blood is usually employed to prevent coagulation of the sample. Leukocyte counts should be performed on heparinized blood within 2 hours after addition of the heparin. Heparinized blood should not be used for isoagglutinin, complement, or erythrocyte fragility tests or platelet counts.
Clonidine Hydrochloride...

Clonidine Hydrochloride

Adults: The dose of clonidine hydrochloride tablets, USP must be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a general guide to its administration.

Initial Dose: 0.1 mg tablet twice daily (morning and bedtime). Elderly patients may benefit from a lower initial dose.

Maintenance Dose: Further increments of 0.1 mg per day may be made at weekly intervals if necessary until the desired response is achieved. Taking the larger portion of the oral daily dose at bedtime may minimize transient adjustment effects of dry mouth and drowsiness. The therapeutic doses most commonly employed have ranged from 0.2 mg to 0.6 mg per day given in divided doses.

Studies have indicated that 2.4 mg is the maximum effective daily dose, but doses as high as this have rarely been employed.

Renal Impairment: Patients with renal impairment may benefit from a lower initial dose. Patients should be carefully monitored. Since only a minimal amount of clonidine is removed during routine hemodialysis, there is no need to give supplemental clonidine following dialysis.

For questions regarding this product call Actavis at 1-800-432-8534.
Atropine Sulfate

Atropine Sulfate

The usual adult dose of atropine is 0.4 to 0.6 mg. Suggested doses for children are as follows:

7 - 16 pounds     -     0.1 mg

17 - 24 pounds   -     0.15 mg

24 - 40 pounds   -     0.2 mg

40 - 65 pounds   -     0.3 mg

65 - 90 pounds   -     0.4 mg

Over 90 pounds -     0.4 to 0.6 mg

As indicated previously, however, these doses may be considerably exceeded in certain cases.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration, whenever solution and container permit.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Important Notes on Administration Promethazine hydrochloride injection can cause severe chemical irritation and damage to tissues regardless of the route of administration. Irritation and damage can result from perivascular extravasation, unintentional intra-arterial injection, and intraneuronal or perineuronal infiltration (see WARNINGS - Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene).
The preferred parenteral route of administration for promethazine hydrochloride injection is by deep intramuscular injection. Under no circumstances should promethazine hydrochloride injection be given by intra-arterial injection due to the likelihood of severe arteriospasm and the possibility of resultant gangrene (see WARNINGS - Severe Tissue Injury, Including Gangrene). Subcutaneous injection is contraindicated as it may result in tissue necrosis. When administered intravenously, promethazine hydrochloride injection should be given in a concentration no greater than 25 mg per mL and at a rate not to exceed 25 mg per minute. It is preferable to inject through the tubing of an intravenous infusion set that is known to be functioning satisfactorily. In the event that a patient complains of pain during intravenous injection of promethazine hydrochloride injection, the injection should be stopped immediately to evaluate for possible arterial injection or perivascular extravasation.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use promethazine hydrochloride injection if solution has developed color or contains precipitate.

To avoid the possibility of physical and/or chemical incompatibility, consult specialized literature before diluting with any injectable solution or combining with any other medication. Do not use if there is a precipitate or any sign of incompatibility.

Allergic Conditions The average adult dose is 25 mg. This dose may be repeated within two hours if necessary, but continued therapy, if indicated, should be via the oral route as soon as existing circumstances permit. After initiation of treatment, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The average adult dose for amelioration of allergic reactions to blood or plasma is 25 mg.

Sedation In hospitalized adult patients, nighttime sedation may be achieved by a dose of 25 to 50 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection.

Nausea and Vomiting For control of nausea and vomiting, the usual adult dose is 12.5 to 25 mg, not to be repeated more frequently than every four hours. When used for control of postoperative nausea and vomiting, the dosage of analgesics and barbiturates should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions).

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see PRECAUTIONS - Pediatric Use).

Preoperative and Postoperative Use As an adjunct to preoperative or postoperative medication, 25 to 50 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection in adults may be combined with appropriately reduced doses of analgesics and atropine-like drugs as desired. Dosage of concomitant analgesic or hypnotic medication should be reduced accordingly (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions).

Promethazine hydrochloride is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than two years of age.

Obstetrics Promethazine hydrochloride injection in doses of 50 mg will provide sedation and relieve apprehension in the early stages of labor. When labor is definitely established, 25 to 75 mg (average dose, 50 mg) promethazine hydrochloride injection may be given with an appropriately reduced dose of any desired narcotic (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions). If necessary, promethazine hydrochloride injection with a reduced dose of analgesic may be repeated once or twice at four-hour intervals in the course of a normal labor. A maximum total dose of 100 mg of promethazine hydrochloride injection may be administered during a 24-hour period to patients in labor.

Pediatric Patients Promethazine hydrochloride injection is contraindicated for use in pediatric patients less than 2 years of age (see WARNINGS - Respiratory Depression). Caution should be exercised when administering promethazine hydrochloride to pediatric patients 2 years of age or older. It is recommended that the lowest effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride be used in pediatric patients 2 years of age and older and concomitant administration of other drugs with respiratory depressant effects be avoided (see WARNINGS - Respiratory Depression).

In pediatric patients 2 years of age and older, the dosage should not exceed half that of the suggested adult dose. As an adjunct to premedication, the suggested dose is 1.1 mg per kg of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug (see PRECAUTIONS - Drug Interactions). Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in pediatric patients.
Amiodarone Hydrochlorid...

Amiodarone Hydrochloride

Amiodarone shows considerable interindividual variation in response. Although a starting dose adequate to suppress life-threatening arrhythmias is needed, close monitoring with adjustment of dose is essential. The recommended starting dose of amiodarone is about 1000 mg over the first 24 hours of therapy, delivered by the following infusion regimen:

After the first 24 hours, continue the maintenance infusion rate of 0.5 mg/min (720 mg per 24 hours) utilizing a concentration of 1 to 6 mg/mL (Use a central venous catheter for amiodarone concentrations greater than 2 mg/mL). The rate of the maintenance infusion may be increased to achieve effective arrhythmia suppression.

In the event of breakthrough episodes of VT or hemodynamically unstable VT, use 150 mg supplemental infusions of amiodarone (mixed in 100 mL of D5W and infused over 10 minutes to minimize the potential for hypotension).

The first 24-hour dose may be individualized for each patient; however, in controlled clinical trials, mean daily doses above 2100 mg were associated with an increased risk of hypotension. Do not exceed an initial infusion rate of 30 mg/min.

Based on the experience from clinical studies of intravenous amiodarone, a maintenance infusion of up to 0.5 mg/min can be continued for 2 to 3 weeks regardless of the patient's age, renal function, or left ventricular function. There has been limited experience in patients receiving intravenous amiodarone for longer than 3 weeks.

The surface properties of solutions containing injectable amiodarone are altered such that the drop size may be reduced. This reduction may lead to underdosage of the patient by up to 30% if drop counter infusion sets are used. Amiodarone must be delivered by a volumetric infusion pump.

Administer amiodarone, whenever possible, through a central venous catheter dedicated to that purpose. Use an in-line filter during administration.

Intravenous amiodarone loading infusions at which higher concentrations and rates of infusion much faster than recommended have resulted in hepatocellular necrosis and acute renal failure, leading to death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Intravenous amiodarone concentrations greater than 3 mg/mL in D5W have been associated with a high incidence of peripheral vein phlebitis; however, concentrations of 2.5 mg/mL or less appear to be less irritating. Therefore, for infusions longer than 1 hour, do not exceed amiodarone concentrations of 2 mg/mL, unless a central venous catheter is used [see Adverse Reactions (6.2)].

Amiodarone infusions exceeding 2 hours must be administered in glass or polyolefin bottles containing D5W. Do not use evacuated glass containers for admixing, as incompatibility with a buffer in the container may cause precipitation. Amiodarone absorbs to polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing, but all of the clinical experience has been with PVC tubing and the concentrations and rates of infusion provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION reflect dosing in these studies.

Amiodarone has been found to leach out plasticizers, including DEHP [di-(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate] from intravenous tubing (including PVC tubing). The degree of leaching increases when infusing amiodarone at higher concentrations and lower flow rates than provided in DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION. Polysorbate 80, a component of amiodarone injection, is also known to leach DEHP from PVC [see Description (11)].

Amiodarone does not need to be protected from light during administration.

NOTE: Inspect parenteral drug products for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Admixture Incompatibility

Amiodarone in D5W is incompatible with the drugs shown in Table 3.

Intravenous to Oral Transition

Patients whose arrhythmias have been suppressed by amiodarone may be switched to oral amiodarone. When changing to oral amiodarone therapy, clinical monitoring is recommended, particularly for elderly patients. See package insert for oral amiodarone.

Since grapefruit juice is known to inhibit CYP3A-mediated metabolism of oral amiodarone in the intestinal mucosa, resulting in increased plasma levels of amiodarone, do not drink grapefruit juice during treatment with oral amiodarone [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Table 4 provides suggested doses of oral amiodarone to be initiated after varying durations of amiodarone administration. These recommendations are made on the basis of a similar total body amount of amiodarone delivered by the intravenous and oral routes, based on 50% bioavailability of oral amiodarone.
Nitrostat

Nitrostat

One tablet should be dissolved under the tongue or in the buccal pouch at the first sign of an acute anginal attack. The dose may be repeated approximately every 5 minutes until relief is obtained. If the pain persists after a total of 3 tablets in a 15-minute period, or if the pain is different than is typically experienced, prompt medical attention is recommended. NITROSTAT may be used prophylactically 5 to 10 minutes prior to engaging in activities that might precipitate an acute attack.

During administration the patient should rest, preferably in the sitting position.

No dosage adjustment is required in patients with renal failure.
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of oral ketorolac tromethamine is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine. See package insert for ketorolac tromethamine tablets for transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose oral ketorolac tromethamine.

Note: Oral formulation should not be given as an initial dose

Use minimum effective dose for the individual patient

Total duration of treatment in adult patients: the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and oral ketorolac tromethamine is not to exceed 5 days.

KETOROLAC TROMETHAMINE INJECTION

Ketorolac tromethamine injection may be used as a single or multiple dose on a regular or "prn" schedule for the management of moderately severe, acute pain that requires analgesia at the opioid level, usually in a postoperative setting. Hypovolemia should be corrected prior to the administration of ketorolac tromethamine (see WARNINGS - Renal Effects). Patients should be switched to alternative analgesics as soon as possible, but ketorolac tromethamine therapy is not to exceed 5 days.

When administering ketorolac tromethamine injection, the IV bolus must be given over no less than 15 seconds. The IM administration should be given slowly and deeply into the muscle. The analgesic effect begins in ~30 minutes with maximum effect in 1 to 2 hours after dosing IV or IM. Duration of analgesic effect is usually 4 to 6 hours.

Single-Dose Treatment: The following regimen should be limited to single administration use only

IM Dosing
Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 60 mg. Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 30 mg.
IV Dosing
Patients <65 years of age: One dose of 30 mg. Patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired and/or less than 50 kg (110 lbs) of body weight: One dose of 15 mg.
Multiple-Dose Treatment (IV or IM)
Patients <65 years of age: The recommended dose is 30 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 120 mg. For patients ≥65 years of age, renally impaired patients (see WARNINGS), and patients less than 50 kg (110 lbs): The recommended dose is 15 mg ketorolac tromethamine injection every 6 hours. The maximum daily dose for these populations should not exceed 60 mg.
For breakthrough pain, do not increase the dose or the frequency of ketorolac tromethamine. Consideration should be given to supplementing these regimens with low doses of opioids “prn” unless otherwise contraindicated.

Pharmaceutical Information for Ketorolac Tromethamine Injection

Ketorolac tromethamine injection should not be mixed in a small volume (e.g., in a syringe) with morphine sulfate, meperidine hydrochloride, promethazine hydrochloride or hydroxyzine hydrochloride; this will result in precipitation of ketorolac from solution.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration, which it is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in normal saline or 5% dextrose solutions. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused mixture must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accordance with the patient's response.

Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemical agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

General

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Usage in Adults

Opioid Overdose-Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions are not obtained, it may be repeated at two-to-three-minute intervals. If no response is observed at 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid-induced or partial opioid-induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous administration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochloride are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone hydrochloride should be titrated according to the patient's response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two-to-three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal--i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfort. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweating, or circulatory stress.

Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within one- to two-hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock: The optimal dosage of naloxone hydrochloride or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Usage in Children

Opioid Overdose--Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in children is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, naloxone may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, naloxone hydrochloride injection can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Opioid Depression: Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two- to three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

Usage in Neonates

Opioid-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression.
Claforan

Claforan

Adults

Dosage and route of administration should be determined by susceptibility of the causative organisms, severity of the infection, and the condition of the patient (see table for dosage guideline). CLAFORAN may be administered IM or IV after reconstitution. Premixed CLAFORAN Injection is intended for IV administration after thawing. The maximum daily dosage should not exceed 12 grams.

GUIDELINES FOR DOSAGE OF CLAFORAN
Type of Infection Daily Dose (grams) Frequency and Route Gonococcal urethritis/cervicitis in males and females 0.5 0.5 gram IM (single dose) Rectal gonorrhea in females
0.5
0.5 gram IM (single dose) Rectal gonorrhea in males 1 1 gram IM (single dose) Uncomplicated infections 2 1 gram every 12 hours IM or IV Moderate to severe infections 3-6 1-2 grams every 8 hours IM or IV Infections commonly needing antibiotics in higher dosage (e.g., septicemia) 6-8 2 grams every 6-8 hours IV Life-threating infections up to 12 2 grams every 4 hours IV
If C. trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate anti-chlamydial coverage should be added, because cefotaxime sodium has no activity against this organism. To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, the recommended dose is a single 1 gram IM or IV administered 30 to 90 minutes prior to start of surgery.

Cesarean Section Patients

The first dose of 1 gram is administered intravenously as soon as the umbilical cord is clamped. The second and third doses should be given as 1 gram intravenously or intramuscularly at 6 and 12 hours after the first dose.

Neonates, Infants, and Children

The following dosage schedule is recommended:

Neonates (birth to 1 month):

0–1 week of age 50 mg/kg per dose every 12 hours IV

1–4 weeks of age 50 mg/kg per dose every 8 hours IV

It is not necessary to differentiate between premature and normal-gestational age infants.

Infants and Children (1 month to 12 years):

For body weights less than 50 kg, the recommended daily dose is 50 to 180 mg/kg IM or IV body weight divided into four to six equal doses. The higher dosages should be used for more severe or serious infections, including meningitis. For body weights 50 kg or more, the usual adult dosage should be used; the maximum daily dosage should not exceed 12 grams.

Geriatric Use

This drug is known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function. (See PRECAUTIONS, General and PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use.)

Impaired Renal Function - see PRECAUTIONS, General.

NOTE: As with antibiotic therapy in general, administration of CLAFORAN should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours after the patient defervesces or after evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained; a minimum of 10 days of treatment is recommended for infections caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci in order to guard against the risk of rheumatic fever or glomerulonephritis; frequent bacteriologic and clinical appraisal is necessary during therapy of chronic urinary tract infection and may be required for several months after therapy has been completed; persistent infections may require treatment of several weeks and doses smaller than those indicated above should not be used.

Preparation of CLAFORAN Sterile

CLAFORAN for IM or IV administration should be reconstituted as follows:
Approximate Diluent Withdrawable Concentration Strength (mL) Volume (mL) (mg/mL) 500 mg vial*(IM) 2 2.2 230 1g vial* (IM) 3 3.4 300 2g vial* (IM) 5 6.0 330 500 mg vial* (IV) 10 10.2 50 1g vial* (IV) 10 10.4 95 2g vial*(IV) 10 11.0 180 1g infusion 50-100 50-100 20-10 2g infusion 50-100 50-100 40-20 (*) in conventional vials
Shake to dissolve; inspect for particulate matter and discoloration prior to use. Solutions of CLAFORAN range from very pale yellow to light amber, depending on concentration, diluent used, and length and condition of storage.

For intramuscular use: Reconstitute VIALS with Sterile Water for Injection or Bacteriostatic Water for Injection as described above.

For intravenous use: Reconstitute VIALS with at least 10 mL of Sterile Water for Injection. Reconstitute INFUSION BOTTLES with 50 or 100 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection. For other diluents, see COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY section.

NOTE: Solutions of CLAFORAN must not be admixed with aminoglycoside solutions. If CLAFORAN and aminoglycosides are to be administered to the same patient, they must be administered separately and not as mixed injection.

A SOLUTION OF 1 G CLAFORAN IN 14 ML OF STERILE WATER FOR INJECTION IS ISOTONIC.

IM Administration: As with all IM preparations, CLAFORAN should be injected well within the body of a relatively large muscle such as the upper outer quadrant of the buttock (i.e., gluteus maximus); aspiration is necessary to avoid inadvertent injection into a blood vessel. Individual IM doses of 2 grams may be given if the dose is divided and is administered in different intramuscular sites.

IV Administration: The IV route is preferable for patients with bacteremia, bacterial septicemia, peritonitis, meningitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or impending.

For intermittent IV administration, a solution containing 1 gram or 2 grams in 10 mL of Sterile Water for Injection can be injected over a period of three to five minutes. Cefotaxime should not be administered over a period of less than three minutes. (See WARNINGS). With an infusion system, it may also be given over a longer period of time through the tubing system by which the patient may be receiving other IV solutions. However, during infusion of the solution containing CLAFORAN, it is advisable to discontinue temporarily the administration of other solutions at the same site.

For the administration of higher doses by continuous IV infusion, a solution of CLAFORAN may be added to IV bottles containing the solutions discussed below.

Directions for use of CLAFORAN Injection in Galaxy Container (PL 2040 Plastic)

CLAFORAN Injection in Galaxy containers (PL 2040 plastic) is for continuous or intermittent infusion using sterile equipment.

Storage

Store in a freezer capable of maintaining a temperature of -20°C/-4°F.

Thawing of Plastic Container

Thaw frozen container at room temperature or under refrigeration (at or below 5°C). [DO NOT FORCE THAW BY IMMERSION IN WATER BATHS OR BY MICROWAVE IRRADIATION.]

Check for minute leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are detected, discard solution as sterility may be impaired.

DO NOT ADD SUPPLEMENTARY MEDICATION.

The container should be visually inspected. Components of the solution may precipitate in the frozen state and will dissolve upon reaching room temperature with little or no agitation. Potency is not affected. Agitate after solution has reached room temperature. If after visual inspection the solution remains cloudy or if an insoluble precipitate is noted or if any seals or outlet ports are not intact, the container should be discarded.

The thawed solution is stable for 10 days under refrigeration (at or below 5°C) or 24 hours at or below 22°C. Do not refreeze thawed antibiotics.

CAUTION: Do not use plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.

Preparation for Intravenous Administration:
Suspend container from eyelet support. Remove protector from outlet port at bottom of container. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
Preparation of CLAFORAN Sterile in ADD-Vantage System

CLAFORAN Sterile 1 g or 2 g may be reconstituted in 50 mL or 100 mL of 5% Dextrose or 0.9% Sodium Chloride in the ADD-Vantage diluent container. Refer to enclosed, separate INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADD-VANTAGE SYSTEM.

Compatibility and Stability

Solutions of CLAFORAN Sterile reconstituted as described above (Preparation of CLAFORAN Sterile) remain chemically stable (potency remains above 90%) as follows when stored in original containers and disposable plastic syringes:
Strength Reconstitured Stability at or Stability under Concentration below 22°C Refrigeration mg/mL (at or below 5°C) Original Plastic Containers Syringes 500 mg vial IM 230 12 hours 7 days 5 days 1g vial IM 300 12 hours 7 days 5 days 2g vial IM 330 12 hours 7 days 5 days 500 mg vial IV 50 24 hours 7 days 5 days 1g vial IV 95 24 hours 7 days 5 days 2g vial IV 180 12 hours 7 days 5 days 1g infusion bottle 10-20 24 hours 10 days 2g infusion bottle 20-40 24 hours 10 days
Reconstituted solutions stored in original containers and plastic syringes remain stable for 13 weeks frozen.

Reconstituted solutions may be further diluted up to 1000 mL with the following solutions and maintain satisfactory potency for 24 hours at or below 22°C, and at least 5 days under refrigeration (at or below 5°C): 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection; 5 or 10% Dextrose Injection; 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection; 5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection; Lactated Ringer's Solution; Sodium Lactate Injection (M/6); 10% Invert Sugar Injection, 8.5% TRAVASOL® (Amino Acid) Injection without Electrolytes.

Solutions of CLAFORAN Sterile reconstituted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection in Viaflex® plastic containers maintain satisfactory potency for 24 hours at or below 22°C, 5 days under refrigeration (at or below 5°C) and 13 weeks frozen. Solutions of CLAFORAN Sterile reconstituted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or 5% Dextrose Injection in the ADD-Vantage flexible containers maintain satisfactory potency for 24 hours at or below 22°C. DO NOT FREEZE. NOTE: CLAFORAN solutions exhibit maximum stability in the pH 5–7 range. Solutions of CLAFORAN should not be prepared with diluents having a pH above 7.5, such as Sodium Bicarbonate Injection.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Phytonadione

Phytonadione

Whenever possible, phytonadione should be given by the subcutaneous route (see Box WARNING). When intravenous or intramuscular administration is considered unavoidable, the drug should be injected very slowly, not exceeding 1 mg per minute.

Protect from light at all times.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Dilution

Phytonadione may be diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or 5% Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection. Benzyl alcohol as a preservative has been associated with toxicity in newborns. Therefore, all of the above diluents should be preservative-free. (See WARNINGS) Other diluents should not be used. When dilutions are indicated, administration should be started immediately after mixture with the diluent, and unused portions of the dilution should be discarded, as well as unused contents of the vial.

Prophylaxis of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that vitamin K1 be given to the newborn. A single intramuscular dose of phytonadione 0.5 to 1 mg within one hour of birth is recommended.

Treatment of Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

Empiric administration of vitamin K1 should not replace proper laboratory evaluation of the coagulation mechanism. A prompt response (shortening of the prothrombin time in 2 to 4 hours) following administration of vitamin K1 is usually diagnostic of hemorrhagic disease of the newborn, and failure to respond indicates another diagnosis or coagulation disorder.

Phytonadione 1 mg should be given either subcutaneously or intramuscularly. Higher doses may be necessary if the mother has been receiving oral anticoagulants.

Whole blood or component therapy may be indicated if bleeding is excessive. This therapy, however, does not correct the underlying disorder and phytonadione should be given concurrently.

Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults

To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin time caused by oral anticoagulant therapy - 2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required. Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition (see WARNINGS). If in 6 to 8 hours after parenteral administration the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated.

Phytonadione

Summary of Dosage Guidelines

(See insert text for details)
Newborns Dosage
Hemorrhagic Disease of the Newborn

Prophylaxis

Treatment

0.5 - 1 mg within 1 hour of birth

1 mg SC or IM

(Higher doses may be necessary if

the mother has been receiving

oral anti-coagulants)
Adults Initial Dosage
Anticoagulant - Induced

Prothrombin Deficiency

(caused by coumarin or

indanedione derivatives)

2.5 mg - 10 mg or

up to 25 mg

(rarely 50 mg)

Hypoprothrombinemia due to

other causes

(Antibiotics; Salicylates or other drugs;

Factors limiting absorption or synthesis)

2.5 mg - 25 mg or

more (rarely up to

50 mg)

In the event of shock or excessive blood loss, the use of whole blood or component therapy is indicated.

Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults

A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained.

If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates, antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent phytonadione. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of phytonadione is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.
Dehydrated Alcohol

Dehydrated Alcohol

The dosage of Dehydrated Alcohol Injection, USP for therapeutic nerve or ganglion block varies from as little as 0.05 to 0.5 mL in trigeminal neuralgia to 0.5 to 1.0 mL per interspace for subarachnoid injections. Doses larger than 1.5 mL are seldom required. All injections should be made slowly and only after all steps have been taken to ensure precise placement of the alcohol. A 1.0 mL tuberculin syringe is desirable to facilitate accurate measurement of the dose. Separate needles should be used for injection of successive interspaces or other sites. Since Dehydrated Alcohol Injection, USP is hypobaric as compared to spinal fluid, proper positioning of the patient is essential to control localization of injections into the subarachnoid space.

When lesser concentrations of alcohol are used, larger volumes are usually injected. A dose of 2 mL of 45% alcohol has been used for injecting individual motor nerves, or from 1.5 to 4.0 mL for epidural injection in children with spastic cerebral palsy; 50 mL of 50% alcohol has been used for celiac plexus blockade.

The LD50 oral dose in rats is 13.7 g/kg.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.

HOW SUPPLIED: Dehydrated Alcohol Injection, USP

NDC 17478-503-05 5 mL Vial Packages of 10

Storage: Store in a cool dry place away from any heat source.

Akorn

Manufactured by: Akorn, Inc.

Lake Forest, IL 60045

DA00N Rev. 09/11
Naropin

Naropin

The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should always be used. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Naropin is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. Patients in poor general condition due to aging or other compromising factors such as partial or complete heart conduction block, advanced liver disease or severe renal dysfunction require special attention although regional anesthesia is frequently indicated in these patients. To reduce the risk of potentially serious adverse reactions, attempts should be made to optimize the patient's condition before major blocks are performed, and the dosage should be adjusted accordingly.

Use an adequate test dose (3 to 5 mL of a short acting local anesthetic solution containing epinephrine) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.

The doses in the table are those considered to be necessary to produce a successful block and should be regarded as guidelines for use in adults. Individual variations in onset and duration occur. The figures reflect the expected average dose range needed. For other local anesthetic techniques standard current textbooks should be consulted.

When prolonged blocks are used, either through continuous infusion or through repeated bolus administration, the risks of reaching a toxic plasma concentration or inducing local neural injury must be considered. Experience to date indicates that a cumulative dose of up to 770 mg Naropin administered over 24 hours is well tolerated in adults when used for postoperative pain management: ie, 2016 mg. Caution should be exercised administering Naropin for prolonged periods of time, eg, >70 hours in debilitated patients.

For treatment of postoperative pain, the following technique can be recommended: If regional anesthesia was not used intraoperatively, then an initial epidural block with 5 to 7 mL Naropin is induced via an epidural catheter. Analgesia is maintained with an infusion of Naropin, 2 mg/mL (0.2%). Clinical studies have demonstrated that infusion rates of 6 to 14 mL (12 to 28 mg) per hour provide adequate analgesia with nonprogressive motor block. With this technique a significant reduction in the need for opioids was demonstrated. Clinical experience supports the use of Naropin epidural infusions for up to 72 hours.
Adenosine

Adenosine

For rapid bolus intravenouse use only.

Adenosine injection should be given as a rapid bolus by the peripheral intravenous route. To be certain the solution reaches the systemic circulation, it should be administered either directly into a vein or, if given into an IV line, it should be given as close to the patient as possible and followed by a rapid saline flush.

Adult Patients

The dose recommendation is based on clinical studies with peripheral venouse bolus dosing. Central venous (CVP or other) administration of adenosine injection has not been systematically studied.

The recommended intravenous doses for adults are as follows:

Inital dose: 6 mg given as a rapid intravenous bolus (administered over a 1 to 2 second period).

Repeat administration: If the first dose does not result in elimination of the supraventriuclar tachycardia within 1 to 2 minutes, 12 mg should be given as a reapid intravenouse bolus. This 12 mg dose may be repeated a second time if required.

Pediatric Patients

The dosages used in neonates, infants, children and adolescents were equivalent to those administered to adults on a weight basis.

Pediatric Patients with a Body Weight < 50 kg:

Initial Dose: Give 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg as a rapid IV bolus given either centrally or peripherally. A saline flush should follow.

Repeat administration: If conversion of PSVT does not occur within 1 to 2 minutes, additional bolus injections of adenosine can be administered at incrementally higher doses, increasing the amount given by 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. Follow each bolus with a saline flush. This process should continue until sinus rhythm is established or a maximum single dose of 0.3 mg/kg is used.

Pediatric Patiens with a Body Weight ≥ 50 kg: Administer the adult dose.

Doses greater than 12 mg are not recommended for adult and pediatric patients.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.
Hydralazine Hydrochlori...

Hydralazine Hydrochloride

When there is urgent need, therapy in the hospitalized patient may be initiated intramuscularly or as a rapid intravenous bolus injection directly into the vein. Hydralazine Hydrochloride Injection should be used only when the drug cannot be given orally. The usual dose is 20-40 mg, repeated as necessary.

Certain patients (especially those with marked renal damage) may require a lower dose. Blood pressure should be checked frequently. It may begin to fall within a few minutes after injection, with the average maximal decrease occurring in 10-80 minutes, In cases where there has been increased intracranial pressure, lowering the blood pressure may increase cerebral ischemia. Most patients can be transferred to oral hydralazine hydrochloride with 24-48 hours.

The product should be used immediately after the vial is opened. The product should not be added to infusion solutions. Hydralazine Hydrochloride Injection may discolor upon contact with metal; discolored solutions should be discarded.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone Hydrochloride

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously, intramuscularly, or subcutaneously. The most rapid onset of action is achieved by intravenous administration, which is recommended in emergency situations.

Since the duration of action of some opioids may exceed that of naloxone, the patient should be kept under continued surveillance. Repeated doses of naloxone should be administered, as necessary.

Intravenous Infusion

Naloxone hydrochloride injection may be diluted for intravenous infusion in normal saline or 5% dextrose solutions. The addition of 2 mg of naloxone in 500 mL of either solution provides a concentration of 0.004 mg/mL. Mixtures should be used within 24 hours. After 24 hours, the remaining unused mixture must be discarded. The rate of administration should be titrated in accoreance with the patient's response.

Naloxone hydrochloride injection should not be mixed with preparations containing bisulfite, metabisulfite, long-chain or high molecular weight anions, or any solution having an alkaline pH. No drug or chemcial agent should be added to naloxone hydrochloride injection unless its effect on the chemical and physical stability of the solution has first been established.

General

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Usage in Adults

Opioid Overdose-Known or Suspected: An initial dose of 0.4 mg to 2 mg of naloxone hydrochloride may be administered intravenously. If the desired degree of counteraction and improvement in respiratory functions are not obtained, it may be repeated at two-three-minute intervals. If no response is observed after 10 mg of naloxone hydrochloride have been administered, the diagnosis of opioid-induced or partial opioid-induced toxicity should be questioned. Intramuscular or subcutaneous adminstration may be necessary if the intravenous route is not available.

Postoperative Opioid Depression:

For the partial reversal of opioid depression following the use of opioids during surgery, smaller doses of naloxone hydrochlroide are usually sufficient. The dose of naloxone hydrochloride should be titrated according to the patient's response. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression, naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.1 to 0.2 mg intravenously at two-to-three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal-i.e., adequate ventilation and alertness without significant pain or discomfor. Larger than necessary dosage of naloxone may result in significant reversal of analgesia and increase in blood pressure. Similarly, too rapid reversal may induce nausea, vomiting, sweatin, or circulatory stress.

Repeat doses of naloxone may be required within on- to two-hour intervals depending upon the amount, type (i.e., short or long acting) and time interval since last administration of opioid. Supplemental intramuscular doses have been shown to produce a longer lasting effect.

Septic Shock:

The optimal dosage of naloxone hydrochloride or duration of therapy for the treatment of hypotension in septic shock patients has not been established (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Usage in Children

Opioid Overdose-Known or Suspected: The usual initial dose in children is 0.01 mg/kg body weight given I.V. If this dose does not result in the desired degree of clinical improvement, a subsequent dose of 0.1 mg/kg body weight may be administered. If an I.V. route of administration is not available, naloxone may be administered I.M. or S.C. in divided doses. If necessary, naloxone hydrochloride injection can be diluted with sterile water for injection.

Postoperative Opioid Depression:

Follow the recommendations and cautions under Adult Postoperative Depression. For the initial reversal of respiratory depression naloxone hydrochloride should be injected in increments of 0.005 mg to 0.01 mg intravenously at two- to three-minute intervals to the desired degree of reversal.

Usage in Neonates

Opioid-Induced Depression: The usual initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg body weight administered I.V., I.M., or S.C. This dose may be repeated in accordance with adult administration guidelines for postoperative opioid depression.
Adenosine

Adenosine

For rapid bolus intravenous use only.

Adenosine injection should be given as a rapid bolus by the peripheral intravenous route. To be certain the solution reaches the systemic circulation, it should be administered either directly into a vein or, if given into an IV line, it should be given as close to the patient as possible and followed by a rapid saline flush.

Adult Patients

The dose recommendation is based on clinical studies with peripheral venous bolus dosing. Central venous (CVP or other) administration of adenosine injection has not been systematically studied.

The recommended intravenous doses for adults are as follows:

Initial dose: 6 mg given as a rapid intravenous bolus (administered over a 1-2 second period).

Repeat administration: If the first dose does not result in elimination of the supraventricular tachycardia within 1-2 minutes, 12 mg should be given as a rapid intravenous bolus. This 12 mg dose may be repeated a second time if required.

Pediatric Patients

The dosages used in neonates, infants, children and adolescents were equivalent to those administered to adults on a weight basis.

Pediatric Patients with a Body Weight < 50 kg:

Initial dose: Give 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg as a rapid IV bolus given either centrally or peripherally. A saline flush should follow.

Repeat administration: If conversion of PSVT does not occur within 1-2 minutes, additional bolus injections of adenosine can be administered at incrementally higher doses, increasing the amount given by 0.05 to 0.1 mg/kg. Follow each bolus with a saline flush. This process should continue until sinus rhythm is established or a maximum single dose of 0.3 mg/kg is used.

Pediatric Patients with a Body Weight ≥ 50 kg: Administer the adult dose.

Doses greater than 12 mg are not recommended for adult and pediatric patients.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.
Calcium Gluconate

Calcium Gluconate

The dose is dependent on the requirements of the individual patient. Intravenous calcium gluconate injection must be administered slowly.

Usual Dosage

Adults-500 mg to 2 g (5 to 20 mL)

Pediatric Patients-200 to 500 mg (2 to 5 mL)

Infants-Not more than 200 mg (not more than 2 mL)

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Nighttime Sleep Aid

Nighttime Sleep Aid

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued. (See WARNING box).

Adults

Parenteral (IM or IV Administration):

Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspected Bacteroides fragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium speciesother than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life-threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Dilution and Infusion Rates section below.

Single IM injections of greater than 600 mg are not recommended.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:

Neonates (less than 1 month)

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in three to four equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients (1 month of age to 16 years)

Parenteral (IM or IV) administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsules when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of B-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Dilution and Infusion Rates

Clindamycin phosphate must be diluted prior to I.V. administration. The concentration of clindamycin in diluent for infusion should not exceed 18 mg per mL. Infusion rates should not exceed 30 mg per minute.

The usual infusion dilutions and rates are as follows:

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dilution and Compatibility

Physical and biological compatibility studies monitored for 24 hours at room temperature have demonstrated no inactivation or incompatibility with the use of clindamycin phosphate in IV solutions containing sodium chloride, glucose, calcium or potassium, and solutions containing vitamin B complex in concentrations usually used clinically. No incompatibility has been demonstrated with the antibiotics cephalothin, kanamycin, gentamicin, penicillin or carbenicillin.

The following drugs are physically incompatible with clindamycin phosphate: ampicillin sodium, phenytoin sodium, barbiturates, aminophylline, calcium gluconate, and magnesium sulfate.

The compatibility and duration of stability of drug admixtures will vary depending on concentration and other conditions.

Physico-Chemical Stability of Diluted Solutions of Clindamycin

Room temperature: 6, 9, and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C. Also, 18 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, in minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 16 days at 25°C.

Refrigeration: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in glass bottles or minibags, demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least 32 days at 4°C.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Frozen: 6, 9 and 12 mg/mL (equivalent to clindamycin base) in 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection in minibags demonstrated physical and chemical stability for at least eight weeks at -10°C.

Frozen solutions should be thawed at room temperature and not refrozen.

Caution: Do not use plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawnfrom the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.

Sign Up for a Free Account